[Teletypewriter Sets An/Tgc-1 and An/Tgc-1a]
[From the U.S. Government Publishing Office, www.gpo.gov]
S1/0/. /?. '//-Z2 03 —
• DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL “^^0
DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR FORCE MANUAL fiUfiL
NON-CIRCULATING
\
. I
TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/TGC-1
AND
AN/TGC-1 A
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE
MARCH 1949 north TEXAS STATE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY DENTON, TEXAS
TM 11-2203 — AFM 102-2
This manual supersedes TM 11-2203, 10 June 1944 and TB 11-2203-1, 16 August 1945
TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/TGC-l AND AN/TGC-1A
United States Government Printing Office Washington : 1949
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE
Washington 25, D. C., 10 March 1949
TM 11-2203—AFM 102-2, Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A, is published for the information and guidance of all concerned.
[AG 300.7 (3 Jan 47)]
By order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force :
Official :
EDWARD F. WITSELL
Major General
The Adjutant General
OMAR N. BRADLEY
Chief of Staff, United States Army
Official: HOYT S. VANDENBERG
L. L. JUDGE Chief of Staff, United States Air Force
Colonel, USAF
Air Adjutant General
Distribution :
Army:
Tech Sv (2) ; Arm & Sv Bd (1); AFF Bd (ea Sv Test Sec) (1) ; AFF (5) ; OS Maj Comd (5) ; Base Comd (3) ; MDW (5) ; A (ZI) (20), (Overseas) (5) ; CHQ (2) ; FC (2) ; USMA (2) ; Sch 11 (10) ; Gen Dep (10); Dep 11 (5) except Baltimore & Sacramento (20); Tng Ctr (2) ; PE (10) ; Lab 11 (2) ; 4th & 5th Ech Maint Shops 11 (2); T/O & E 11-47 (2) ; 11-107 (2) ; 11-127 (2) ; 11-587 (2) ; 11-592 (2) ; 11-597 (2); SPECIAL DISTRIBUTION.
Air Force:
Hq, USAF (25) ; USAF Maj Comd (5) ; USAF Sub Comds (3) ; Services (MATS) (2) ; All other Class III Installations (2). Overseas: Maj Air Comds (5); Numbered Air Forces (3) ; Overseas Air Bases (2). Special Distribution: Commandant, AF Technical School (Communications) Scott Air Force Base, Belleville, Ill. (10).
For explanation of distribution formula see TM 38-405.
Copyright Notice. This publication includes information contained in the following bulletins published by Teletype Corporation:
Bulletin 171, Issue 2, copyrights 1941 and 1944.
Bulletin 172, Issue 2, copyright 1941.
Bulletin 185, Issue 1, copyright 1944.
Bulletin 1100, Issue 2, copyright 1944.
Bulletin 1122, Issue 2, copyrights 1941 and 1944.
ii
CONTENTS
PART ONE . INTRODUCTION. Paragraph Page
Section I. Description_____________________________________________ 1-5 1
II. Application_____________________________________________ 6-16 7
III. Assembly, installation, and disassembly________________ 17-23 18
PART TWO . OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. Section IV. Equipment connections__________________________________ 24-32 29
V. Operating checks and adjustments_______________________ 33-40 34
VI. Operation____________________________________________ 41-55 36
VII. Routine checks of performance__________________________ 56-62 42
PART THR EE. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.
Section VIII. Preventive maintenance techniques_____________________ 63-79 50
IX. Preventive maintenance check list_____„_____________ 80-81 58
X. Lubrication___________________________________________ 82-88 59
XI. Weatherproofing of equipment__________________________ 89-92 70
PART FOU R. AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT. (Not used.)
PART FIV E. REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS.
Section XII. General repair procedure_____________________________ 93-94 77
XIII. Detailed functioning of equipment________________ _ 95-126 77
XIV. Test equipment_____________________________________ 127-134 103
XV. Trouble shooting____________________'________________ 135-145 109
XVI. Repair_______________________________________________ 146-160 115
XVII. Requirements and adjustments________________________ 161-220 124
APPENDIX I. REFERENCES, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GLOSSARY__________________ 141
II. PARTS IDENTIFICATION LISTS AND TABLES OF REPLACEABLE PARTS____________________________________________ 144
INDEX______________________________________________________________________ 203
iii
DESTRUCTION NOTICE
WHY —To prevent the enemy from using or salvaging this equipment for his benefit.
WHEN—When ordered by your commander.
HOW —1. Smash—Use sledges, axes, handaxes, pickaxes, hammers, crowbars, heavy tools.
2. Cut—Use axes, handaxes, machetes.
3. Burn—Use gasoline, kerosene, oil, flame throwers, incendiary grenades.
4. Explosives—Use firearms, grenades, TNT.
5. Disposal—Bury in slit trenches, fox holes, other holes. Throw in streams. Scatter.
USE ANYTHING IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE FOR DESTRUCTION OF THIS EQUIPMENT
WHAT—1. Smash—Signal indicator panel, typing reperforators, multiple transmitter distributor and base, tape winder and motor, rectifier, power cabinet, equipment drawer, and console.
2. Cut—All power and signal cords and wiring.
3. Burn—Technical manuals, records, and perforated tapes.
4. Bury or scatter—Any or all of the above pieces after smashing, breaking, and burning.
DESTROY EVERYTHING
iv
SAFETY NOTICE
Voltages used in this equipment are high enough to endanger human life and may be fatal if contacted by operating personnel. Operators must be careful not to contact the power supply while checking or servicing the equipment. Be sure that the power is off before touching terminals and conductors with bare hands. All test leads should be insulated.
V
First Aid for
Electric Shock
RESCUE
In case of electric shock, shut off the high voltage at once and ground the circuits. If the high voltage cannot be turned off without delay, free the victim from contact with the live conductor as promptly as possible Avoid direct contact with either the live conductor or the victim’s body. Use a dry board, dry clothing, or other nonconductor to free the victim. An ax may be used to cut the high-voltage wire. Use extreme caution to avoid the resulting electric flash.
SYMPTOMS
a- Breathing stops abruptly in electric shock if the current passes through the breathing center at the base of the brain. If the shock has not been too severe, the breath center recovers after a while and normal breathing is resumed, provided that a sufficient supply of air has been furnished meanwhile by artificial respiration.
b. The victim is usually very white or blue. The pulse is very weak or entirely absent and unconsciousness is complete. Burns are usually present. The victim’s body may become rigid or stiff in a very few minutes. This condition is due to the action of electricity and is not to be considered rigor mortis. Artificial respiration must still be given, as several such cases are reported to have recovered. The ordinary and general tests for death should never be accepted..
TREATMENT.
a. Start artificial respiration immediately. At the same time send for a medical officer, if assistance is available. Do not leave the victim unattended. Perform artificial respiration at the scene of the accident, unless the victim’s or operator’s life is endangered from such action. In this case only, remove the victim to another location, but no farther than
is necessary for safety. If the new location is more than a few feet away, artificial respiration should be given while the victim is being moved. If the method of transportation prohibits the use of the Shaeffer prone pressure method, other methods of resuscitation may be used. Pressure may be exerted on the front of the victim’s diaphragm, or the direct mouth-to-mouth method may be used. Artificial respiration, once started, must be continued, without loss of rhythm.
b. Lay the victim in a prone position, one arm extended directly overhead, and the other arm bent at the elbow so that the back of the hand supports the head. The face should be turned away from the bent elbow so that the nose and mouth are free for breathing.
c- Open the victim’s mouth and remove any foreign bodies, such as false teeth, chewing gum, or tobacco. The mouth should remain open, with the tongue extended. Do not permit the victim to draw his tongue back into his mouth or throat.
d- If an assistant is available during resuscitation, he should loosen any tight clothing to permit free circulation of blood and to prevent restriction of breathing. He should see that the victim is kept warm, by applying blankets or other covering, or by applying hot rocks or bricks wrapped in cloth or paper to prevent injury to the victim. The assistant should also be ever watchful to see that the victim does not swallow his tongue. He should continually wipe from the victim’s mouth any frothy mucus or saliva that may collect and interfere with respiration.
e. The resuscitating operator should straddle the victim’s thighs, or one leg, in such manner that:
(f ) the operator’s arms and thighs will be vertical while applying pressure on the small of the victim’s back;
(2) the operator’s fingers are in a natural position on the victim’s back with the little finger lying on the last rib;
(3) the heels of the hands rest on either side of the spine as far apart as convenient without allowing the hands to slip off the victim;
(4) the operator’s elbows are straight and locked,
f- The resuscitation procedure is as follows:
(I) Exert downward pressure, not exceeding GO pounds, for 1 second.
(2) Swing back, suddenly releasing pressure, and sit on the heels.
(3) After 2 seconds rest, swing forward again, positioning the hands exactly as before, and apply pressure for another second.
9- The forward swing, positioning of the hands, and the downward pressure should be accomplished in one continuous motion, which requires 1 second. The release and backward swing require 1 second. The addition of the 2-second rest makes a total of 4
TL15338-D
vi
A. CORRECT POSITION. Operator's elbows straight and locked. Victim's face turned away from bent elbow and resting on back of hand.
B. FORWARD SWING AND POSITIONINGOF HANDS. Little finger rests on last rib.
C. DOWNWARD PRESSURE. Arms and thighs vertical.
D. REST POSITION. Operator releases pressure suddenly, swings back on heels, and rests for 2 seconds.
seconds for a complete cycle. Until the operator is thoroughly familiar with the correct cadence of the cycle, he should count the seconds aloud, speaking distinctly and counting evenly in thousands. Example: one thousand and one, one thousand and two, etc.
b. Artificial respiration should be continued until the victim regains normal breathing or is pronounced dead by a medical officer. Since it may be necessary to continue resuscitation for several hours, relief operators should be used if available.
matic spirits of ammonia, the individual administering the stimulant should first test it himself to see how close he can hold the inhalant to his own nostril for comfortable breathing. Be sure that the inhalant is not held any closer to the victim’s nostrils, and then for only 1 or 2 seconds every minute.
b. After the victim has regained consciousness, he may be given hot coffee, hot tea, or a glass of water containing % teaspoon of aromatic spirits of ammonia. Do not give any liquids to an unconscious victim.
CAUTIONS.
RELIEVING OPERATOR.
The relief operator kneels beside the operator and follows him through several complete cycles. When the relief operator is sure he has the correct rhythm, he places his hands on the operator’s hands without applying pressure. This indicates that he is ready to take over. On the backward swing, the operator moves and the relief operator takes his position. The relieved operator follows through several complete cycles to be sure that the new operator has the correct rhythm. He remains alert to take over instantly if the new operator falters or hesitates on the cycle.
STIMULANTS.
o. if an inhalant stimulant is used, such as aro-
a. After the victim revives, keep him LYING QUIETLY. Any injury a person may have received may cause a condition of shock. Shock is present if the victim is pale and has a cold sweat, his pulse is weak and rapid, and his breathing is short and gasping.
b. Keep the victim lying flat on his back, with his head lower than the rest of his body and his hips elevated. Be sure that there is no tight clothing to restrict the free circulation of blood or hinder natural breathing. Keep him warm and quiet.
c. A resuscitated victim must be watched carefully as he may suddenly stop breathing. Never leave a resuscitated person alone until it is CERTAIN that he is fully conscious and breathing normally.
TL15338-E
vii
Figure 1. Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 or AN/TGC-1A, front view
viii
This manual supersedes TM 11-2203, 10 June 191/1/ and TB 11-2203-1, 16 August 191/5
PART ONE INTRODUCTION
Section I.
1. General
a. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A are complete teletypewriter sets designed for use in comcenters (communications center) and tape-relay stations. Each unit includes facilities for sending, receiving, and monitoring teletype messages on perforated tape on which the message also is typed. Sending, receiving, and monitoring facilities are furnished by a multiple transmitter distributor (for sending) and two typing reperforators (for receiving and monitoring) .
b. Both Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A function at 368.1 operations per minute (o. p. m.) (60 words per minute). To have Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1A function at 600 o. p. m. (100 words per minute) it is necessary to make certain mechanical changes. These changes are described in paragraph 159c. To have Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 function at 600 o. p. m. it is necessary to make both mechanical and electrical changes. These changes are described in paragraph 159. It will be noted that once the electrical changes are made to the AN/TGC-1 they need not be made again and only the mechanical changes should be performed in changing from 60 words per minute to 100 words per minute or back again. In effect, by making the electrical changes to Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1, it becomes Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 A.
c. The multiple transmitter distributor provides one number transmitter and two message transmitters arranged to provide continuous transmission. Perforated tape received at the comcenter over other teletypewriter equipment, such as Teletypewriter Sets TC-16, is inserted manually in the units of the transmitter distributor for retransmission to another comcenter or tape-relay station.
d. The two typing reperforators furnish a copy of received or transmitted messages on perforated tape on which the message also is typed. Messages received on Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and
DESCRIPTION
AN/TGC-1A may be relayed to other stations by tearing the received tape as necessary and manually feeding the separate message tapes into other tape-transmitting teletypewriter equipment. Perforated tape from both the receiving and monitoring typing reperforators may be converted to page-printecl copy by transmission through a room circuit to a page-printing teletypewriter set.
e. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A may be used singly in a small comcenter where a few teletypewriter lines terminate, or a number of the sets may be set up side-by-side to provide facilities for handling traffic in large comcenters where many teletypewriter lines terminate. These teletypewriters provide a means for relaying messages in printed reperforated tape form to the station called for in the message heading, without having to stop the tape and repunch all or any part of the message at each relay station. Because of the continuous transmission feature of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A, line time may be conserved by the use of this equipment.
f. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 a n cl AN/TGC-1 A are electrically and mechanically similar, the only differences being those incident to increasing the speed of operation. Throughout this manual the terminology AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A will be used in referring to Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 and to Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1A.
g. AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A provide facilities for operating under various circuit conditions. With appropriate wiring and switch changes, AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A may be operated neutral over one or two half-duplex (single) circuits and neutral or polar over one or two full-duplex circuits. Operation over one full duplex circuit (two external circuits, each consisting of two wires or single wire with ground return) or one half-duplex (single) circuit is designated NORMAL and operation over two full
1
823667—49----2
duplex circuits (four external circuits) or two half-duplex (single) circuits is designated SPLIT.
li. Power for the multiple transmitter distributor or both the AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A is furnished in each case by series-governed motors adapted for 110-volt a-c or d-c operation. Note, however, that the power for the typing reperforator of the AN/TGC-1 is furnished by a synchronous motor adapted for 60-cycle, 110-volt a-c operation while the typing reperforator of the AN/TGC-1 A receives its power from a series-governed motor adapted for 110 volt a-c or d-c operation. Since the synchronous motors function only on a-c, they are being replaced as a source of power for the typing reperforator for the AN/TGC-1 by series-governed motors which will permit either a-c or d-c operation. AN/TGC-1 (and AN/TGC-1 A) contains a rectifier for providing a source of d-c (signaling battery) when the external power source is a-c. The present issue of tape-winder motors is a series motor, adapted for 110-volt a-c or d-c operation. As these motors are replaced, an induction-type motor
Quantity Component Approx, weight (lb.) Width (in.) Length (in.) Height (in.)
1 Cabinet, console-type 250 24 24 65
2 Typing reperforator, with motor _ 34% 13 12 giz
1 Multiple transmitter distributor and base, with motor 90 15% 16% 5%
1 Tape winder, with motor 10 12 6 11
1 54A rectifier 35 5 153/ 6%
1 Signal indicator panel 20 5 21 1%
3. Description of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A
Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A) is housed in a metal console approximately 65 inches high, 24 inches wide, and 24 inches deep. Starting from the top and approximately in the order in which they are placed in the console, the following major items of equipment are contained in teletypewriters AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A (figs. 2, 3, and 4) : Signal indicator panel, monitor (upper) typing reperforator, motor-driven tape winder, receiving (lower) typing reperforator, rectifier, power panels, multiple transmitter distributor, number-tape reel, tape compartments, line terminal strips, equipment drawer (containing the switches, resistor panel, and relay panel), and power cabinet.
will be furnished. It operates from a 115-volt, 60-cycle a-c source.
i. This technical manual furnishes detailed information on the maintenance and operation of AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A.
j. Throughout this manual reference is made to technical manuals which provide detailed information on installation, operation, and maintenance of typing reperforators (TM 11-2223) and of test sets and teletypewriter equipment with which AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A commonly are used. The technical manuals which normally will be used as references with these teletypewriters are listed in appendix I.
2. Table of Components
Listed below are components of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A. Data are given for the equipment unpacked and ready for use. (See par. 5 for weights, dimensions, and volumes of the shipping containers used for packaging various, components for export or domestic shipment.)
a. Signal Indicator Panel. The signal indicator panel located at the top of the console contains the alarm lamp, number release key, release key, break key, tape feed-out keys, and alarm switch. The signal indicator panel is housed in a demountable panel which is electrically connected to the console by means of a plug and socket.
3. Monitor ( Upper) Typing Reperforator. T he monitor typing reperforator and its motor are located below the signal indicator panel in a compartment which is mounted on roller slides so that the compartment may be pulled forward when it is necessary to inspect the typing reperforator or the tape winder ( ■ ' . u:ui::-" -— "JV ™l“
......■*■ . wk.
r a r -» * a * *
L >:*r|1 "''"'""7'"-"1
TAPE WINDER 5 MONITOR (UPPER)
■ MJ W** » TYPING REPERFORATOR
■ I9S. "jrWs®p - ' W
RECEIVING (LOWER) W- Wl|
TYPING REPERFORATOR ■EXJMF • kJS""'
\ » • in '
TAPE CHUTE \ PECTIHER
v \ RF^ • r V~~r...[.[n -- J
.*£7«i agM
MMHP.
V2-«k» «a» gRtJ* 1 s a 1
-JI MULTIPLE |
NUMBER TAPE REEL |9 ■ ■ ' —■» ..TRANSMITTER
kJSL SI DISTRIBUTOR f
»*■ 0
• ’a' ’'w
. . IIMMI s
TAPE * ...I ’
COMPARTMENTS C ” flK .3 ’
.Rl
— POWER cabinet!
BMIb^
J LINE TERMINAL _
I strips r
j*, -I
■
/ - ^2
TL 57276S
Figure 3. Components of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A).
4
■ , ■■■■.,,. <
|X\ Z ' 111 -'in' - .I.r 4;:
« a fit je"1'"”"
jg
^TAPE WINDER ■Hi &X MONITOR (UPPER)
'" T*~---^T\ TYPING REPERFORATOR
IgiK
—MONITOR JACK BOX
NUMBER TAB HOLDER J |JYPING REPERFORATOR ■_ " f
__gpp^^ -Ji^
f MULTIPLE
‘ t A -----TRANSMITTER
Kfl > K DISTRIBUTOR
1 • k.S^B
I •* I
■ i •
ft'
EQUIPMENT DR AWE W \
___■■1 Mw I
Eyses 'fl| f i
—a" ma
I
\ \
Figure 4- Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN /TGC-1 A), arrangement of components.
is mounted in front of the tape compartment at the top and to the left, immediately below the number transmitter unit. The number-tape reel holds a previously prepared tape to be used by the number transmitter in the transmission of message numbers and can hold a tape of about 750 numbers.
i. Tape Compartments. The tape compartments, located below the multiple transmitter distributor and base, provide a receptacle for sent-
message tapes. When working SPLIT, this space may be subdivided by the partition provided so as to separate the tapes sent over each circuit. A separate narrow compartment is provided for the number tape.
7. Line Terminal Strip. The line terminal strip, located in the lower left-hand corner of the console, consists of two sections of nine terminals each. The upper eight terminals on each strip are used for the line and line battery connections. The
5
ninth terminal on the left section is bonded to the console and is the means by which the entire console may be connected to a local earth ground, as described in paragraph 24. The ninth terminal on the right section provides ground for an alarm bell common to all sets, if this feature is desired. Such alarm bell should be externally batteried with protective resistance. Since ground is carried on one of the control relay contacts, a bell should be chosen drawing not more than 100-120 milliamperes (m. a.).
k. Equipment Drawer. The equipment drawer is located in the middle of the bottom compartment of the console. It is a sheet steel drawer housing the transmitting and receiving relays, control relays, resistors, and spark killers, together with the switches necessary for adapting the teletypewriter sets to various conditions of operation. These conditioning switches, which are described in paragraphs 119 through 122, are the NORMAL SPLIT, DUPLEX SINGLE, POLAR MAKEBREAK, and OPR. NON-OPR. switches.
Z. Power Cabinet. The power cabinet, located to the right of the equipment drawer, provides facilities for power input and switches for adapting the teletypewriter sets for a-c or d-c operation.
4. Packaging Data for Export Shipment
a. Each Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A) is packed in five nailed wooden shipping containers. The running spare parts are packed in several additional smaller wooden ship
ping containers. The sizes and weights of the main boxes given below may vary from time to time because of minor differences in the packaging materials used. (Types of material currently available and differing supply channels account for the minor differences in packaging materials used.) Shipping tons for items similar to this equipment usually are figured on the basis of one shipping ton for each 40 cubic feet.
Item Outside dimensions (in.) Volume (cu. ft.) Gross weight (lb.)
Transmitter distributor and tape winder. 34/2 x 26/ x 16/_ 8. 72 192
Typing reperforator 27 x 25 x 21 8. 20 135
Typing reperforator 27 x 25 x 21 8. 20 135
Console cabinet 79/ x 38 x 31 54. 20 602
Equipment drawer, rectifier, etc. 37/ x 33/ x 27/_ 20. 00 240
Z>. The components of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) are all packaged similarly and are packaged for protection against the deteriorating effects of exposure to the elements; and all except the console cabinet are cushioned similarly against physical or mechanical damage. In each instance, the equipments are fastened solidly to the bases of the inner shipping containers and surrounded with a sealed moistureproof-vaporproof barrier of laminated plastic, metal foil, and cloth, and with an outer sealed waterproof barrier of asphaltic paper. The com
2"EXCELSIOR (minimum)
INNER NAILED WOODEN SHIPPING CONTAINER WITH SKIDDED BASE
OUTER NAILED WOODEN BOX
TL 57252S
Figure 5. Cushioning fragile equipment for oversea shipment, extended domestic shipment, or for storage exceeding 6 months.
6
TOP OF OUTER NAILED — WOODEN BOX
METAL STRAPS --------<
2 "EXCELSIOR (MINIMUM)-ON ENDS,SIDES, AND BOTTOM
METAL STRAPS---------'
ponents of the shipping containers are protected from rubbing against the barriers by layers of heavy flexible corrugated paper. A dehydrating agent, such as silica gel, is inclosed within each package to assure maintenance of a proper low humidity. Adequate cushioning against physical shock,, which may easily damage components of teletypewriter sets, is accomplished by placing each sealed and strapped inner nailed wooden shipping container within a second nailed wooden box, allowing on all sides, ends, top, and bottom sufficient room for a 2-inch thickness of excelsior packed to a density of 3 pounds per cubic foot. (See fig. 5.) The outer box does not have skids.
5. Packaging Data for Domestic Shipment
Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A) packed for domestic (other than oversea) shipment may be received in shipping containers similar to those described in paragraph 4, with the following changes, depending upon the amount of handling anticipated and the length of storage contemplated.
a. The use of a dehydrating agent, or desiccant, and a moistureproof-vaporproof barrier may be omitted.
5. The use of excelsior cushioning and the outer shipping container may be omitted.
Section II. APPLICATION
6. System Application
a. Because of the continuous transmission feature, Teletypewriters AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A are installed in comcenters or tape-relay stations to save line time. (Fig. 12 shows Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 or AN/TGC-1A, with other teletypewriter equipment, in a comcenter.) The AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A) at the local station usually is connected to an AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) at the distant station. In a local comcenter or tape-relay station, teletypewriter sets may be used singly or may be set up side-by-side and will transmit to and receive from a like number of teletypewriter sets at the distant station.
b. A typical arrangement of the AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) is shown in figure 6. Outlying-stations A, B, C, and D (teletypewriters TT-7/ FG, or similar teletypewriter equipment) send messages to station E for transmission to other stations within the net. Messages are received at station E on Teletypewriter Sets TC-16, or similar teletypewriter sets, and are retransmitted by the AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A). Messages are received at station F on the AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) and retransmitted to outlying stations G, H, and I over Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 or similar teletypewriter equipment.
c. The type of operation desired determines the application of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or
AN/TGC-1 A). Application of these teletypewriter sets for different types of operation is described in paragraphs 7 through 12 and illustrated in figures 6 through 11. In the illustrations, transmission in one direction is indicated by unbroken lines, transmission in the other direction by broken lines; arrows indicate the direction of transmission. The diagrams are prepared on a single-line basis, each line representing one circuit (a circuit is considered to be two-wire or single-wire with ground return). For the purpose of illustrating the application of teletypewriter sets, single-unit application is shown.
7. Application for Normal Duplex Make-and-Break (Neutral) Operation (fig. 6)
a. Normal duplex make-and-break operation provides simultaneous transmission and reception over two external circuits.
b. Figure 6 illustrates the application of teletypewriter sets for normal duplex make-and-break operation over two external circuits. The facilities provided by Teletypewriter Set AN/ TGC-1 permit station E to receive messages from station F and at the same time to transmit to station F. The monitoring (upper) typing reperforator of the teletypewriter sets provides a copy of all messages transmitted.
7
STATION E_____________________________________ ______________________________________STATION F___________ STATION A ______ ________________________________________ ______________________________________
_____ AN/TGC-I_____AN/TGC-I — _____________________________ STATION G
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 TYPING REPERFORATOR TYPING REPERFORATOR 4_____________________
«■----- -------- (MON) (MON) J
__________ __________ I (UPPER)___________ (UPPER)___________ I TC-16---------(TT-7/FG) STATION B_TYPING REPERFORATOR______________________TYPING REPERFORATOR________________________________________! ---------------T
-------> (REC) <------------- ' -------------> (REC) ------- (LOWER) (LOWER)
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 ------------------- । ------■ '------
<------ ।________________2’Jj,LTr-X^I5_^ST1______! I _______MULT_XMTR__DIST______ j ---------- STATIONH
STATION C ______ I NO. | [ A I [ B --------------------------1---------- ] NO. j j A I ] B
_____J I X*™ I । XMTR | XMTR | L----------------| XMTR | | XMTR | | XMTR | TC"6________'TT”'ra L---------------------------! I-------J I--------1 L___________________________J L_________I i_______l r
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 l_________________________________ _______
<------
—T-.-.. - -----------------------------------1* -----------------------------------1* STATION!
STATION D _____ NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR I NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE I OPR. POLAR I I I I
CCTWI CCTW2 CCTttl CCT«2 . OCT* I CCT<2 CCT*»I CCT»2 ______
(TT-X/FG, TC-IS (S) S) T°''6.___________ITT-~F. Where a full duplex circuit is not available, AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A may be arranged for make-and-break (neutral) operation over a half-duplex (single) circuit, as shown in figure 8. Since transmission and reception cannot be carried on simultaneously, for purposes of illustration transmission between stations D and E is shown in one direction only, although station E can transmit to station D (but not at the same time station D is transmitting to station E). Figure 8 shows distant stations A, B, and C connected to Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 on full duplex circuits. At station D the tape is transferred manually to Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1, with wiring and switches set for normal single neutral operation, and is transmitted to another AN/TGC-1, arranged for normal single neutral operation, at station E. During transmission of the message, the receiving (lower) typing reperforator at station D is locked out. During reception at station
E the monitoring (upper) typing reperforator and transmitter units are locked out; the red break lamp (on the signal indicator panel) lights to indicate the transmitter units are locked out.
10. Application for Split Duplex Make-and-Break (Neutral) Operation (fig. 9)
a. Split duplex make-and-break operation provides simultaneous transmission and reception over four external circuits.
b. Application of Teletypewriter Sets AN/ TGC-1 using split duplex make-and-break (neutral) operation is shown in figure 9. Distant stations A, B, and C transmit to a tape-relay or comcenter, such as station D, where the messages are received on Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 or similar teletypewriter equipment. The messages are retransmitted by the AN/TGC-1 over four external neutral circuits and are received by an AN/TGC-1 at a tape-relay or comcenter, such as station E, and retransmitted by Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 to distant stations F, G, and H. With wiring connections as shown in figure 25, transmission from the A transmitter (circuit No. 1) will be received on the lower typing reperforator, and transmission from the B transmitter (circuit No. 2) will be received on the upper typing reperforator. Both transmitters at station E may be transmitting to station D at the same time that both transmitters at station D are transmitting to station E. With AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A arranged for split duplex operation, no monitor copy of outgoing transmission is furnished. If a monitor copy is desired for any circuit, a model 15 teletypewriter may be used to provide such a copy, with connection to the circuit made through the monitor jack box, as described in paragraph 32.
11. Application for Split Duplex Polar Operation (fig. 10)
a. Split duplex polar operation provides simultaneous transmission and reception over four external circuits.
b. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 A arranged for split duplex polar operations are shown in figure 10. Signals from distant stations A, B, and C are transmitted, over neutral circuits, to tapeperforating teletypewriter equipment at tape-relay or comcenter, station D. The tape is transferred to a Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 A arranged
9
10
____________________STATION D__________________ STATION E_____________________ AN/TGC-IA______________________________________AN/TGC-IA
STATION A ----- ----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------- --------------- STATION F
------«. TYPING REPERFORATOR TYPING REPERFORATOR *__________________
(MON) (MON) I
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 _____(UPPER)_____ __________________________________________(UPPER)_____ i TC-16 (TT-7/FG)
* ----------------- ------------------------------------------------------ I
_______ ___________ TYPING REPERFORATOR TYPING REPERFORATOR -----
(REC) <------------1 ------------> (REC) I
_______________________________(LOWER)_________ I _____(LOWER)__________ | NATION B___________ ____________MULT_ _XMTR_DIST_ | MULT XMTR DIST____I -------------- STATIONS
- I NO. | | A B ! ' — [ NO. | ! A [I B I !
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 I ।----------------- Il I Tr-ifi /TT-7/cr»
■»---- XMTR XMTR | | XMTR I I XMTR | I XMTR I | XMTR »______
__________ _____ !-----------J 1____1 ------------•_i________________________________। l--j l___________;-_________r ____________ STATION C__________ -----------------------,* __________________# STATION H
NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR -------
-------------► fcx CCTWICCTW2 CCTttl CCT*2 CCT4TI CCTtt2 CCT4»I CCT4tt __ (TT-7/FG)----TC-16 TC-16 (TT-7/FG)
NON-OPR. MAKE-BREAK NON-OPR. MAKE-BREAK *'
---------------------------------------------- L___________________________________________________________
^WIRING CONNECTIONS FOR NORMAL
DUPLEX POLAR OPERATION SHOWN IN FIGURE 27 TL57200S
Figure 7. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-IA, application for normal duplex polar operation.
•uoyinjddo (ivutnau) ynauq-puv-dyvui di&u/is imu.iou mJ uoiivoyiddn ‘j-DOT/NV sy>$ MtuoiddCitdidj, ■§ oMthj
SOOEZSH
ZZ 380913 Nl NMOHS N0I1V8380
Civ8in3N) xv38a-aNv-3»vw soonis "IVW80N 803 SNOI103NNOO 9NI8IM-X ---------- MV3M8-3XVK UdO-HON HdO-NON ~| (93/Z-ll)-91-01--------9l_0i (93/Z-ll)
*<------ ?«100 1*100 2*100 1*100 2*100 1*100 2*100 1*100 4_______
________ _____________ HVTOd -bdO 319NIS X31dA0 llldS 1VWH0N-HVIOd 'ddO 319NIS X31dna UldS 1VW80N HN0I1V1S______________*1 -------------------------------- *1 ----------------------------------- o N0I1V1S
--------------- I I I 1 I 1 I 3 r 1 I 1 ------ ,-------*------I HJ-WX I I 81WX--I I H1WX---I I 81WX--1 । 81WX--। I H1WX---| *
(93/Z-ll) 91-01 | |i | | I I II II । 91-01 (93/Z-ll)
i- | 9 | I V | I 0N I | 0 I I V | | ON ।
* ■---------» i--------1 I---------1 I_________I I_________I I________J ”-------
L Mn. iwij ------------ I iSICI 81WX rinw isia hiwx nnw ------ ---------------
J NUIlVlb |> • ----------- -------------------------- 8 N0I1V1S
(H3M01) (83M0D
__________ (03H) <------------------- (038) ।-------801V80383d38 9NI8A1 801V80d83d38 ONIdAl----------------------------------------------------------------- (9J/Z-11)_91-01--------1-----------J (83dd0) L------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9|_0±----(93/Z-ll)
_______ (NOW) (NOW) 801V80383d38 9NldAl 801V80383d38 ONIdAl "*
3 N0I1V1S V NOHVIS
__________________1-091/NV__________________ _______________________________________1-091/NV_________________ 3 N0I1V1S___________________________________Q N0I1V1S
11
______________________STATION D____________________ _____________________________________STATION E ________________
AN/TGC-I AN/TGC-I
?IA.TI0N A ---------- ------------------------------ -------------------------------------------------------- ------------------- STATION F
--------------*. TYPING REPERFORATOR________________TYPING REPERFORATOR_________________________________________________________________ (TT-7/FG)-----TC-16 (UPPER)___________ 1 (UPPER)___________ TC-16 (TT-7/FG)
_______ TYPING REPERFORATOR_________________________TYPING REPERFORATOR----------------------------------------------------------T _______________________________________(LOWER)______ ! * (LOWER) B ______ _________________ I | ---------------------------- STATIONG
--------------*■ I I ______________________________________________. (TT-7/FG)-----TC-16 N° A B |—,| CKTN0.2 NQ A B
<------ XMTR XMTR XMTR | । XMTR XMTR XMTR - _ (TT-7/FG>
---------------------_______________________________ | I -------- _____________________________________ i !--------------------i-----------------------------------1 _______________________________________________I_CKT_NQJ--------------------_______ J___________L----{----------1------- ------------------------ _______________________________________________CKLNOJ_____------------------_ __ _______________----------------J r—T °N C| ------ ~ __________________________________1*----________________________________ 1* STATION H
NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR ----- "
fc, «T»I CCT*2 CCT*I CCT»2 . COT*! ccrV2 cct1F| 0CT«j ______>
TC-'6 * (TT’7/F6)
____________________________________________N0N ~0PR-_MAKE-BREAK NON-OPR. MAKE-BREAK _______ * WIRING CONNECTIONS FOR SPLIT______________—
DUPLEX MAKE-AND-BREAK (NEUTRAL) OPERATION SHOWN IN FIGURE 27 T,
I LOF2009
Figure 9. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 arranged for split duplex make-andFbreak (neutral) operation,
12
13
_______________________STATION D_______________________ STATION E ________________________ AN/TGC-IA______________________________________________AN/TGC-IA
STATION A _______ ________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ STATION F
-------> TYPING REPERFORATOR TYPING REPERFORATOR _______
<------------------------------------------>
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 ______(UPPER)________ I (UPPER) TC-16 (TT-7/FG)
*------- --------------------- I___________________________________________________________*-----------------------------
________ ______________ TYPING REPERFORATOR I TYPING REPERFORATOR ------
4--------------- I------------------------->
__________________________________________(LOWER)________________I I (LOWER) PTION B _______________ __________________ I । --------------------------------- STATION G
-------► I I ________________________. NO- A B I I NO.________A__________B
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 -------------1CKT Tr_lfi .
4------- XMTR XMTR XMTR | N02 XMTR XMTR XMTR ♦_______
________ _______ 1 -------------------------------- 1 ' I ।_________________--------------------------t----- -----------------T _______________ CKTNQJ —----------------------------------------------------------------L-_'________ _ckt_no. । _-------;----------;-------
RATION C ______ _________________________________________* n---------------------------------- CKT.NO ----------- --------- STATION H
NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR
------hx CCT*I CCT*2 CCT*i CCT#2 CCT^I CCT*2 CCT*I CCT*2 -------►
// \\ TC-I\ _ (TT’7/FG)
______ NON-OPR. MAKE-BREAK NON-OPR. MAKE-BREAK __________ I ■ I I L _________________I
*WIRING CONNECTIONS FOR SPLIT
DUPLEX POLAR OPERATION SHOWN IN FIGURE 27 TL57254S
Figure 10. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-IA arranged for split duplex polar operation.
----------------------------STATION D_____________________ STATION E______________________ .--------AN/TGC-I_________________________________________AN/TGC-I
aTATION A ------ ----------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------- STATION F
--------------» TYPING REPERFORATOR_________________TYPING REPERFORATOR_________________________________________________________________ (TT-7/FG)-----TC-16 (UPPER)___________ J (UPPER)___________ TC-16 (TT-7/FG)
_______ TYPING REPERFORATOR [ TYPING REPERFORATOR I -----”
। ---------------------->
________________________________________(LOWER)______ I _______________(LOWER)_____ §IATI0N B -----------___________________| STATIONS
_____ __________ ____ I _______________ _______________ NO.__________________________A__________B__________NO_____________________________________A_________R
(TT-7/FG) TC-16 | NU. A B (TT-7/FO)
♦------ XMTR XMTR XMTR I XMTR XMTR XMTR ♦______
_______ ______ ____________________________________ । I _____r
CKT NO.I 1---------------------£XT-NO 2----------------]
STATION C _____ ______________________________________* ----------------------------------- STATION H
NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR NORMAL SPLIT DUPLEX SINGLE OPR. POLAR
CCT*I COT*? CCT*I CGT*2 OCT-* I OCT*2 CCT>I CCT*2 ------►
ft TC’16 _ (TT’7/FG)
____________________HON-OPR-_MAKE-BREAK NON-OPR. MAKE-BREAK --------
* WIRING CONNECTIONS FOR
SPLIT SINGLE MAKE-AND-BREAK
(NEUTRAL) OPERATION SHOWN IN FIGURE 27 TL57255S
Figure 11. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 arranged for split single make-and-break (neutral) operation
14
for split duplex polar operation, and the messages are sent out over four external polar circuits to station E where they are received on another AN/TGC-1A. The messages are retransmitted by Teletypewriter Sets TC-16, over make-and-break (neutral) circuits, to distant stations F, G, and H. With wiring connections as shown in figure 25, transmission from the A transmitter (circuit No. 1) will be received on the lower typing reperforator, and transmission from the B transmitter (circuit No. 2) will be received on the upper typing reperforator. Both transmitters at station E may be transmitting to station D at the same time that both transmitters at station D are transmitting to station E.
12. Application for Split Single Operation (fig. 11)
a. Split single operation provides transmission or reception over two external circuits. Transmission and reception cannot be carried on simultaneously on either circuit, but circuit No. 1 may be transmitting at the same time circuit No. 2 is receiving or circuit No. 2 may be transmitting at the same time circuit No. 1 is receiving. A monitor copy of messages transmitted is furnished on circuit No. 1; if a monitor copy of transmission over circuit No. 2 is desired, a Teletypewriter TT-5/FG may be connected to circuit No. 2 by means of the monitor jack box. With split single operation, a teletypewriter set furnishes the following facilities :
(1) Transmission over circuits No. 1 and No. 2; or
(2) Reception over circuits No. 1 and No. 2; or (3) Transmission over circuit No. 1 and reception over circuit No. 2; or
(4) Transmission over circuit No. 2 and reception over circuit No. 1.
Z>. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) arranged for split single operation over a make-and-break (neutral) circuit are shown in figure 11. Since simultaneous reception and transmission are not possible with this arrangement, for purposes of illustration circuits No. 1 and No. 2 show transmission in one direction only; however, over any one circuit messages may be transmitted and received in both directions, though not simultaneously. In figure 11 distant stations A, B, and C transmit to tape-perforating teletypewriter equipment at a tape-relay or comcenter such
as station D. The tape is transferred manually to Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 and transmitted to another AN/TGC-1 at station E. At station E the tape is transferred manually to Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 and retransmitted to distant stations F, G, and H. At the same time, station E may be transmitting to station D over circuit No. 2, which messages are retransmitted by Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 to distant stations A, B, and C.
13. Typical Comcenter Lay-Out (fig. 12)
Figure 12 shows Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) installed in a large theater comcenter which uses both wire circuits and radio channels. The different types of facilities and equipment with which Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 or AN/TGC-1 A are used at such a comcenter installation also are shown in figure 12.
14- General Functioning of Equipment
a. General. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A receive messages from the line in the form of electrical impulses and record the message both in code perforations and in typewritten characters on the same paper tape. While one typing reperforator receives messages from a distant station, the other typing reperforator monitors outgoing messages being transmitted by the multiple transmitter distributor. AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A therefore provide a means for relaying messages in perforated tape form without having to repunch all or any part of the message at the relay station. The tape being perforated by the receiving typing reperforator may be torn or cut into individual message tapes and manually inserted in other tape-transmitting teletypewriter equipment at the relay station for retransmission to the station called for in the message heading. This rerouting of individual messages may take place without stopping the receiving function or interrupting the transmitting function of the Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A). While messages are being received by the teletypewriter set and are being relayed over other comcenter facilities, messages coming in to the comcenter in the form of perforated tape may be inserted manually in the multiple transmitter distributor of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) for retransmission to another AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) at the distant station.
15
TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT OFFICE
MAIN DISTRIBUTING FRAME
V-F CARRIER
TEST AND CONTROL TELEGRAPH TERMINALS
BOARD FOR OPERATION
-------------------------------------ON WIRE CIRCUITS OPEN WIRE --1 OR CABLE___k
I ------ | WIRE
(PACKAGED EQUIPMENT) LINES
-------------j
•
D-C TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT Ac V-F CARRIER -----------
----------—_________ TELEGRAPH TERMINALS
FROM RADIO FOR MULTICHANNEL
TRANSMITTER RADIOTELETYPE CIRCUITS L___JL__
__________-_________
FROM RADIO
RECEIVER * 1------------
D-C CIRCUITS TO -»-----«-----4----LOOP SWITCHBOARDS
! CODE
I ROOM OPERATING ROOM
DC
TO RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS FOR SEMIAUTOMATIC TAPE-RELAY OPERATION L00p
______________ _______________ ________________ _______________ SWITCHBOARDS!
MODEL 15 I I I I MODEL 19
I -4- L_--- TELETYPEWRITER I ________I L____I TELETYPEWRITER -----1
/ z \ —I
/ L-----TYPING REPERFORATOR / L----------TYPING REPERFORATOR _____|
I---TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR L-------TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR !
MESSAGE
CENTER TELETYPEWRITER SETS I ~~------------------------------1
AN/TGC-I OR AN/TGC-IA । TELETYPEWRITER CENTRAL
-TOSIoio TR I ™ | 1
RECE.VER TR TR ------------- I
___________ TELETYPEWRITER ____________
TD TD H SWITCHBOARD ---- I-----f
l—LJ ; Y-rr^ PPJ
III / Z-TYPING
| / REPERFORATOR I
^—TRANSMITTER ____________________________________ |_______!_!_!____________DISTRIBUTOR______|____________
I 11 III TO TELETYPEWRITER STATIONS
TRUNK TO OTHER SWITCHBOARDS Tl =,IKCe
F L 57156S
Figure 12. Typical comcenter lay-out.
16
b. Arrangement. Teletypewriter Sets AN/ TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A are so designed that all power and line connections are accessible from the front, and the consoles therefore can be set up side-by-side, back-to-back, or against the wall.
c. Power Source. The governecl-series motors of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A are adapted for 110-volt a-c or d-c operation. However, see TM 11-2223 for an explanation of the reperforator motor of AN/TGC-1. (If the tape-winder governed-series motor is replaced by a Barber-Colman induction-type motor (par. Ill), the induction-type motor operates from 115-volt a. c.)
d. Line Circuit Connections. The line terminal strip located to the left of the equipment drawer on the console is used for line and ground connections.
e. Types of Operation. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A are designed to work duplex or single and, when working duplex, transmission and reception may be either polar or make-and-break (neutral).
15. Five-Unit Start-Stop Teletypewriter Code (fig. 13)
The signaling code used to transmit messages between teletypewriter equipments consists of five selecting impulses used in various combinations of current and no-current intervals and two synchronizing impulses. These synchronizing impulses consist of one start and one stop impulse. Each group of five selecting impulses is preceded by a start (no-current) impulse and followed by a stop (current) impulse. These start and stop impulses are used to maintain synchronism between the sending and receiving teletypewriter equipments.
16. Synchronism
All reperforators and transmitter distributors equipped with the same type, of gear combination and motor can be adjusted to operate at the same average speed. The motor governor (fig. 115) controls the speed of the equipment within very close limits. The remaining small differences in speed could still cause the receiving mechanism gradually to get out of step with the transmitting mechanism except for the control exercised by the start and stop impulses in the five-unit start-stop teletypewriter code. This control is accomplished
PLATEN POSITION
LTRS FIGS, co" 'CD _ Is- 1 o ' r- 2 m IMPULSES
.x \ ~^~~SAl~:^AA~,>~~~~S^^~^Z^~^^~^r~^ _ ^s'' BLOCKS METAL
__£// STRAPS
it ^1/r<^C . .;/ 'j^^?¥i»
"V f|/^^/ JIvA ul ”■ L I 1/ s (III
11 J>
* "' » * T"'^TT13S^t3 \ MOISTURE
r£'-T~^~p T> ' \ / \?\\ \ VAPORPROOF BARRIFR
\I^) Remove nails with nail puller and remove the top of outer shipping container.
(c) Remove sufficient excelsior to permit grasping the inner box securely.
() The pallet top holding the tape winder is bolted to the pallet.
(I ^X\ X /-pallet
JlXtIL X\ /V VL / BL0CK
T^s?5^ Ihk carriage
K$X3^ / 1 bolts
---—RECTIFIER
HOOK STRAPS-------------------------------------PALLET BLOCKING
SIGNAL INDICATOR PANEL~^^--------------------PALLET
TL57303S
Figure 17. Equipment drawer, rectifier, etc., as arranged for packaging and packing for oversea shipment.
drawer is held by means of four 6%-inch carriage bolts through the upright pallet blocking and the pallet.
(o) Underneath the equipment drawer and between the pallet blocking is a rectifier contained in a sealed corrugated fiberboard box. Inside the box with the rectifier are the plugs and relays wrapped in flexible corrugated paper and taped.
(4) Console cabinet and miscellaneous parts. («) Cut the metal straps.
(Z>) Remove nails with nail puller and remove the top and one or both sides of the shipping container.
(c) Slit the taped seams of the waterproof paper bag liner.
(n\z \
I’“Si 3 L —P7 ’6-622901 ON 9NIMV80 00 |(H)I '(H»l !^‘ if^1 Qlc^ Av\ V>£ OKV AvX v£ 83MV80
L ztj3, T^22222) ((-)) HdV«93131 NOINO N831S3M NO 03SV8 Z |9] JI Si V| ci. mZ A J CkV ' !N3WdinO3
LU VOV SWVaOVIO 9NISIM NO ONIdVSddV OZ’
I- - 0) ni,n -bl-r \0/ S108WAS SV 3WVS 3H1 3aV lN3Wdl003 ra , L 1 S ra a
l_ _ 0 9a3. ^-—J ---xg/- j0 sw3ii sn0IMVA 011N30vrav I® (IQdO) S3H01IMS a 0_"_____ 0
(ZdONVId) 9.-» I-° I 1------b7 ® ® S13X9Vd8 Nl ONIdVSddV ST08WAS ’I 1 -----------
sonid siNor^c-- --sao-j=M=r | ssaon 1 •
S2H»° UU -• i!7 Pool P
Ipl JT .—\ jW o ONU^SNVdl-/; ’ pot)
0H0 j^Lb s§ |p=5c='|| ’ L UU O
oL0®--OPw p-p M ? Ir
r 'sy^r ra i,- 3c< b
' / / T “ || x czzgil S II SNIAllWSNVai-2! X^8 C2O \'a
t,M10' / / (J> *!? '' S JI 5 ,11 I 0 SS3A09 AV“I3H (b O C)
dlSAS TVNIWa31-7 / 3S03 H>O . Jtfxo
/ z । oz-a zi-a t>-a
/ saoisisga I | v. _/ \
/ 30 S3dAl SflOiaVA 9Nld3SW0N I | J () () fY
,7U1O. / om QNV ONiiNnow 30 oohi3w 1-osa AVT3a ,|’« eia ua ti
d.aiSasi-/ OMAnosa-^p xg
M3IA 3QIS-1H9I8 I I— 91-a Ol-a Z-a
8 r.-..-.-.^ ■" _________________________ — b bo b
------- -j__________________________r \ i. . zi-a e-a-i-a I J _________________________ --- ____________ _______ l , Z-03S Avisa । *
s7-~b s'-—' V“ 9NIAI393S -/1
/ \ \ \ \ 1— (zsai onv isai)
/ v-ai \ / s-ai \ / z-ai \ / i-ai \ i saiais ivNiwasi^
z-osa i-osa 9ix oix —r1________ ..--^_________
I LULU ____________| |—| [JMVdS 3X08 ‘xed-NN8 Nd r-. ld0 (1810)
I-1^^ I--2=^—k I-2b I--I------dldlS 1VNIW831
□§§o H5) S3 S3 02 \ UL
--*—I' n-1-rn \ / (ZH-LO) I----------I-----rilinfft,<^\ rUfh-/ toll ™ era 11 ^
moojV'z—W-- ___________„ r« „e „e______ ‘loop . - ‘ no.i s
3 2000 J7. & Q_/ —। (J- O Q-------towj nqi Q--------Q-----------------►J
REC “I
O|9 | Q|9 O« -SEND Q9 Q9 Q9 Q9
------------------[olio [opa-l [op2-! [op°J r6P2—*2 [oP2 ±*> [oP2 n B XTG------------send
---------------O « O^U O-2-----J OL. O-^n o—NQ2 o-% s 4 --vwto 12 0^-1 o'2----o 12 -SEND- 0^-1 o'2 o12
1 ---------------0'3 o12-] o13 o 13 o2^ o'3 o13
S4 + 250/1 .SEND"
3 V-A '“»•» +'^° 14 O!1J °“ °'4 °'4 °'4
-----------------------o IS o-----------J O ” O'5 O--------J o15 o'5 -PSUH------------------C'S OM—OJ^UREC °'‘-b c O~
y 2000/1 -----O 17 O----------J O---------------C>----------------O-----------------NOZ O-------------►> O-------
REC 2 Q is Q is Q is O i8 O 18 O 18 O 18
note: based on western union TELEGRAPH CO. DRAWING B-I02I9 TL57266S
Figure 25. Line terminal connections.
/------WIRE FORM TO EQUIPMENT IN CABINET _
/ AND LINE TERMINAL STRIP
©A ©
® n ® z jf/ TERMINAL BLOCK I
^^_-^"(TB) cable
55 56 57 58 59 60 • r \ \
® — ® ______________g ft V\ \
I® I I© I CABLE J
|©T. !©d---TERMINAL N0.I8 y _______; \Q/ I _
----TERMINAL N0.9 X.j ! Z
L L.-----[ ( J5 '-CABLE
, Tj l—FHY CLAMP ZZ /
a ■■■■ । * (w । /A /
-*------------7"--------------► / B
FRONT VIEW RIGHT-SIDE VIEW JONEsA^^^ /
PLUGX
(S2)
NOTES:
I . SYMBOLS APPEARING IN BRACKETS ADJACENT TO VARIOUS ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT ARE THE SAME AS SYMBOLS APPEARING ON WIRING DIAGRAMS.
2 BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO. DRAWING NO. 108244-3
TL57I6IS
Figure 26. Line terminal bracket assembly.
27. Line Connections for Normal Duplex Make-and-Break Operation (fig. 25)
The connections for make-and-break duplex operation to two external circuits are shown in the NORMAL DUPLEX MAKE-AND-BREAK column, figure 25. Signaling battery is not supplied by the teletypewriter set; therefore the send and receive loops must be batteried externally.
a. Send Loop. The send loop is connected to terminals 7 and 11 with strap as shown. The loop includes the tongue and marking contact of the B transmitting relay and operating winding of REC-1, the monitor relay.
6. Receive Loop. The receiving loop is connected to terminals 16 and 17 of the line terminal
strip and includes only the operating winding of REC-2, the receiving relay.
c. Switches S3 and S4. The POLAR MAKEBREAK switches (S3 and SI) are thrown to MAKE-BREAK, breaking the center-tapped resistor circuit and completing the bias circuits for the two REC relays.
28. Line Connections for Normal Single Operation (fig. 25)
The connections for single operation to one external circuit are shown in the NORMAL SINGLE column (fig. 25). The single send-re-ceive loop is connected to terminals 7 and 17, with straps as shown. The circuit includes the tongue
32
and marking contacts of the B transmitting relay and operating windings for both REC-1 and REC-2 relays.
29. Line Connections for Split Duplex Polar Operation (fig. 25)
The connections for polar duplex operation to four external circuits (SPLIT) are shown in the SPLIT DUPLEX POLAR column, figure 25.
a. Send Loop No. 1. The send loop is connected to terminals 1 and 6 with straps as shown. Signaling battery is connected to the marking and spacing contacts of the A transmitting relay, the tongue of which is connected to the line. The return line of the send loop is connected to the center •of the 3,000-ohm center-tapped resistor, the POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch (S3) being thrown to POLAR.
1). Receive Loop No. 1. The receive loop is connected to terminals 7 and 8 and includes only the operating winding of the REC-1 relay.
c. Send Loop No. 2. The send loop is connected to terminals 10 and 15 with straps as shown. Signaling battery is connected to the marking and spacing contacts of the B transmitting relay, the tongue of which is connected to the line. The return line is connected to the center of the 3,000-ohm center-tapped resistor, the POLAR MAKEBREAK switch (S4) being thrown to POLAR.
d. Receive Loop No. 2. The receive loop is connected to terminals 16 and 17 and includes only the operating winding of the REC-2 relay.
30. Line Connections for Split Duplex Make-and-Break Operation (fig. 25)
The connections for make-and-break duplex operation to four external circuits (SPLIT) are shown in the SPLIT DUPLEX MAKE-AND-BREAK column, figure 25. Signaling battery is not supplied by the teletypewriter set; therefore the send and receive loops must be batteried externally.
a. Send Loop No. 1. The send loop is connected to terminals 1 and 2 and includes only the tongue and marking contact of the A transmitting relay.
Z>. Receive Loop No. 1. The receive loop is connected to terminals 7 and 8 and includes only the operating winding of the REC-1 relay. The POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch (S3) is thrown to MAKE-BREAK.
c. Send Loop No. 2. The send loop is connected
to terminals 10 and 11 and includes only the tongue and marking contact of the B transmitting relay.
d. Receive Loop No. 2. The receive loop is connected to terminals 16 and 17 and includes only the operating winding of the REC-2 relay. The POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch (S4) is thrown to MAKE-BREAK.
31. Line Connections for Split Single Operation (fig. 25)
The connections for single operation to two external circuits (SPLIT) are shown in the SPLIT SINGLE column, figure 25.
a. Send-receive Loop No. 1. The send-receive loop is connected to terminals 1 and 8 with strap as shown. The POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch (S3) is thrown to MAKE-BREAK.
l>. Send-receive Loop No. 2. The send-receive loop is connected to terminals 10 and 17 with strap as shown. The POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch (S4) is thrown to MAKE-BREAK.
32. Connections to Other Equipment
Since Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) receives messages in the form of code perforations and typewritten characters on tape, it may be desirable to make a page-printed copy of certain messages received at the teletypewriter relay station. The monitor jack box provides an easy way to connect teletypewriter page-printing equipment into any one or all of the circuits for this purpose.
a. Normal Duplex Operation. When the teletypewriter set is arranged for normal operation to two external circuits, a Teletypewriter TT-5/FG or similar teletypewriter equipment may be connected to the teletypewriter set through the monitor jack box. A teletypewriter set then can be arranged to provide a monitor page-printed copy of the messages being received on the lower typing reperforator by plugging the red (REC) plug of Teletypewriter TT-5/EG into the lower reperforator jack of the monitor jack box; a monitor page-printed copy of the outgoing messages being transmitted over the A or B message transmitter units by plugging the red (REC) plug of Teletypewriter TT-5/FG into the XTR-A or XTR-B jack of the monitor jack box, depending on which transmitter is sending; monitor page-printed copies of both the received and transmitted messages simul
33
823667—49----4
taneously, provided three Teletypewriters TT-5/FG are available, by plugging the individual red (REC) plugs of the three teletypewriters into the monitor jack box (one in the lower reperforator jack, one in the XTR-A jack, and the other in the XTR-B jack).
b. Split Duplex Operation. When the teletypewriter set is set up for split operation to four external circuits, a Teletypewriter TT-5/FG or similar teletypewriter equipment may be connected through the monitor jack box to provide monitor page-printed copies of messages being transmitted and received.
(1) To provide a monitor page-printed copy of messages being transmitted, it is necessary to have two teletypewriters available, one for monitoring transmitting circuit No. 1 and one for monitoring transmitting circuit No. 2. To monitor both transmitting circuits simultaneously, plug the red (REC) plugs of the two page-printing teletypewriters into the XTR-A and XTR-B jacks. It is possible to use only one Teletypewriter TT-5/FG
and monitor either circuit No. 1 or circuit No. 2 depending on which circuit a monitor page-printed copy is desired.
(2) To provide a monitor page-printed copy of the messages being received, it will be necessary to have two Teletypewriters TT-5/FG available, one for monitoring receiving circuit No. 1 and one for monitoring receiving circuit No. 2. To monitor both receiving circuits simultaneously, plug the red (REC) plugs of the two teletypewriters into the upper and lower reperforator jacks. It is possible to use only one teletypewriter and monitor either receiving circuit No. 1 or No. 2, depending on which circuit a monitor page-printed copy is desired.
(3) It will be noted that it is possible therefore to provide simultaneously monitor page-printed copies of messages being transmitted and received on both circuits when four Teletypewriters TT-5/FG or similar page-printing teletypewriter equipment is available.
Section V. OPERATING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
33. Preoperational Equipment Adjustments
a. The adjustments listed below are made after connections described in section IV have been completed. All of the preoperational adjustments listed below must be completed prior to lining up the teletypewriter set with the set at the distant station.
b. Throw the main power switch to ON. The motors of the multiple transmitter distributor and the two typing reperforators should run. Throw the tape-winder switch to ON; the tape-winder motor should run.
c. When the power first is turned on, the red break lamp will light. To extinguish the light, press the RELEASE KEY button.
34. Installing Tape in Typing Reperforators
Place the roll of tape in the tape-reel container so that the tape unwinds from the bottom and toward the front of the typing reperforator. Pass the tape over the tape-tension spring roller, under the
tape guide, through the tape chute and punch block, and between the feed roll and tape-tension lever. With the reperforator signal cord removed from its jack, exert a slight pressure on the tapetension lever until the tape is fed out evenly. For a more detailed description of installing the tape in the typing reperforators, see TM 11-2223.
35. Installing Tape on Tape Winder (fig. 27)
To thread the monitor tape on the take-up reel of the tape winder, run the tape under the lower snubber and over the upper snubber, then between the two snubbers and to the left and under the lower snubber, and over the guide to the take-up reel. With the tape fed in this manner, the tape tension between the typing reperforator feed wheel and the snubbers is not great enough to cause errors. A piece of an adhesive tape (scotch tape, masking tape, adhesive tape, etc.) on the end of the monitor tape to fasten the monitor tape to the core of the take-up reel is a convenient method for starting the monitor tape on the take-up reel.
34
GUIDE
\ \ T° TAKE'UP REEL
SNUBBERS,/^
IB
FROM REPERFORATOR
TL 57556S
Figure 27. Installing tape on tape winder.
36. Setting Range Finders
The procedure for the setting of the range finder, after arrangements have been made to connect tire selector magnet in a circuit where a long series of alternate R and Y impulses may be received, is always the same, regardless of the type of equipment. Therefore with a local test circuit set up as described in paragraph 40 and an R and Y test tape, it is possible to set the range finders of the typing reperforators. For detailed information on the setting of the range finders, see TM 11-2223.
37. Installing Ribbon in Typing Reperforators
Make sure the ribbon has a hook fastened to each end and a reversing eyelet securely fastened in the ribbon at each end about 4 inches from the hook. The spool may be either metal or fiber but it must have small holes placed around the center hole to engage the ribbon-spool driving pin on the ribbonspool shaft. For a more detailed description of installing the ribbon in the typing reperforators, see TM 11-2223.
38. Checking and Adjusting Motor Speed
a. The typing reperforators of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 may be equipped with either a
synchronous motor or a series-governed motor. If synchronous motors have been supplied, the motors will not require adjustment since they are already preset. If series-governed motors are supplied, the motors will require adjustment.
b. The typing reperforators of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 A are equipped with series-governed motors and will require adjustment.
c. The motors of all teletypewriter sets whether in the same circuit or not must be set to operate at the same speed before satisfactory operation is possible. For a detailed description of checking and adjusting the motor speed, see TM 11-2223.
39. Preparing Number Tape
Before the multiple transmitter distributor may be put in operation, it will be necessary to prepare a number tape. The master tape is made up manually on tape-perforating equipment equipped with a keyboard, such as a Reperforator Transmitter TG-26-A. The number-content of the tape will depend on the traffic needs of the individual circuit, but 500 numbers will be sufficient for a day’s work on even a heavy-traffic circuit.
a. The numbers are perforated on one single long tape and the form should be as follows: carriage return, line feed, office call, channel letter, figures, serial number, space, letters, blank, blank, blank, blank. This form is repeated for each consecutive number and it is important that there be no errors in the number tape.
Caution: If errors are erased by means of the letters key, the letters-sensing mechanism in the number transmitter unit will interpret incorrectly the letters code as indicating the termination of a number.
b. Once the master tape is made up, multiple copies may be obtained by running the master tape through the A or B transmitter and obtaining copies from the monitor reperforator.
c. Reel one copy of the number tape backwards on the number tape reel so that the low-numbered end (number 1) of the number tape may be inserted in the number transmitter unit. Raise the tape lid on the number transmitter unit and insert the low-numbered end of the number tape.
d. When working SPLIT, insert another copy of the prepared number tape in the number tab holder (fig. 4) for use with the B message transmitter. The number tape inserted in the number tab holder should be reeled backwards so that the
35
low number will be available for first use. Individual numbers are torn from the number tape and inserted manually in the B message transmitter preceding each message.
40. Local Operating Test
a. To make the local operating test, proceed as follows:
(1) At the line terminal strip, strap terminals 15 to 16, and 7 to 17.
(2) Between terminals 7 and 17 add a variable resistance of about 5,000 ohms and milliammeter in series. Adjust the resistance so that the current will be between 10 and 30 m. a.
(3) Throw the NORMAL SPLIT switch (SA) to NORMAL, the DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB) to DUPLEX, the OPR. NON-OPR. switches (SI and S2) to OPR., and the POLAR MAKEBREAK switches (S3 and S4) to POLAR.
(4) Connect the line terminal strip for NORMAL DUPLEX POLAR operation as shown in figure 25.
&. Messages transmitted on the A (middle) and B (right-hand) message transmitters, with numbers interpolated by the number transmitter units, will be received on both the monitor (upper) and receiving (lower) typing reperforators.
Section VI. OPERATION
41. Starting Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A
With the source of power connected as described in paragraph 24, throw the main power switch in the power cabinet to the ON position. The typing reperforator motors and the multiple transmitter distributor motor should run. Throw the tapewinder toggle switch to the ON position. The tape-winder motor should run.
42. Normal Operation
When operating the teletypewriter sets to two external circuits, throw the NORMAL SPLIT switch to NORMAL.
a. Sending Numbered Messages.
(1) To send numbered messages from both message transmitters, proceed as follows:
(a) In the number of transmitter, install a prepared number tape as described in paragraph 39.
(6) Release the number transmitter start lever.
(c) Depress the A message transmitter start lever.
(. Circuit No. 2. Circuit No. 2 consists of the B message transmitter, the B transmitting relay, and the monitor (upper) typing reperforator under control of REC-2 relay. Circuit No. 2 uses tab numbering; the tab number holder is located adjacent to the B transmitter.
(1) Sending. To send, proceed as follows:
(a) From the prepared number tape (par.
39) in the tab number holder, tear off the number for the message.
(5) Depress the B message transmitter start lever.
(c) Feed the number tape into the B message transmitter.
(c?) Release the B message transmitter start lever.
(e) After the message number has been transmitted, depress the B message transmitter start lever.
(/) Feed the message tape into the B message transmitter.
(.
52. Setting Conditioning Switches for Split Single Operation, Circuit No. 2
a. For operating single to two external circuits for circuit No. 2, set the conditioning switches in the equipment drawer to the following positions:
Switch Position
NORMAL SPLIT___________________ SPLIT.
DUPLEX SINGLE__________________SINGLE.
POLAR MAKE-BREAK NO. 2___________MAKE-BREAK.
OPR. NON-OPR. NO. 2____________ OPR.
b. The external line connections for split single operation are explained in paragraph 31.
c. The circuit No. 2 loop is batteried externally and the current should be adjusted to 60 m. a., connecting external resistance as necessary.
d. Transmission is from the B message transmitter unit, using tab numbering. Reception is on the upper typing reperforator. The transmitter is locked during reception, with the red light on the signal indicator panel lighting when the transmitter is locked (par. 46. Normal Indications. The normal indications listed include the visible and audible signs that the operator will perceive when he checks the items. If the indications are not normal, the operator will apply the recommended corrective measures.
c. Corrective Measures. The corrective measures listed are those that the operator can make without turning the equipment in for repairs. A reference to part five indicates that the trouble cannot be corrected during operation and that trouble shooting by an experienced repairman is called for. If the set is completely inoperative or if the recommended corrective measures do not yield results, trouble shooting is necessary. However, if the tactical situation requires that communication be maintained and if the set is not completely inoperative, the operator must maintain the equipment in operation as long as it is possible to do so.
58. Equipment Performance Check List for Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC—1 or AN/TGC—1A
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
1 Power plugs. Power plugs in their respective sockets in accordance with par. 22.
2 Signal plugs. Signal plugs in their respective jacks in accordance with par. 22.
42
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
PREPARATORY 3 Jones plugs. 27- and 30-pin plugs in equipment drawer; 8-pin plug of transmitter unit and 27-pin plug of signal indicator unit in their respective sockets in accordance with par. 22.
4 Power cord. Connect to power supply. *■
5 AC-DC power switches. Operate both power switches on power panel to position required for type of power supply used.
6 Line connections. Refer to section IV and figure 25 for connections for type of operation used.
7 NORMAL SPLIT switch (SA). NORMAL SPLIT switch set as described in section VI.
8 DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB). DUPLEX SINGLE switch set as described in section VI.
PREPARATORY 9 OPR. NON-OPR. switches (SI and S2). OPR. NON-OPR. switches set as described in section VI.
10 POLAR MAKEBREAK switches (S3 and S4). POLAR MAKE-BREAK switches set as described in section VI.
11 Reperforator tape. Upper and lower typing reperforators provided with tape. Insert new roll of tape.
12 Reperforator ribbons. Upper and lower typing reperforators provided with ribbons. Typewritten characters will be clear and legible. Install new ribbons.
13 Number tape. Prepared as described in par. 39, wound on number-tape reel. Numbers are sent preceding each message. See part five.
59. Equipment Performance Check List for Normal Duplex Operation
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
1 NORMAL SPLIT switch (SA). Turn to NORMAL.
PS 2 DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB). Turn to DUPLEX.
<1 ■□D 3 OPR. NON-OPR. switches (Si and S2). Throw' to OPR.
4 POLAR MAKEBREAK switches (S3 and S4). Throw to POLAR.
43
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
START 5 Line terminal strip. Make connections from column 1, fig. 25; strap 15 to 16, 7 to 17 placing a 5,000-ohm variable resistor and a 0- to 100-m. a. milliammeter in series between 7 and 17. When main power switch is thrown to ON (item 6) milliammeter indicates line current; adjust resistor to permit line current of 10 to 30 in. a. Check line connections, section IV.
6 Main power switch. Throw main power switch to ON. Typing reperforator and multiple transmitter distributor motors run. See part five.
7 Tape-winder switch. Throw the tape-winder switch to ON. Tape-winder motor runs. See part five.
EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE 8 Number transmitter unit. a. Release number start lever NB on number transmitter unit. b. Depress start lever MB on A or B message transmitter unit. c. Insert a test tape in A or B message transmitter unit. d. Release start lever MB on A or B message transmitter unit. Number is transmitted to receiving and monitoring typing reperforators. See part five.
9 A or B message transmitter unit.
Message is received on receiving and monitoring typing reperforators. See part five.
10 Tape winder. Monitor copy being received on upper typing reperforator. Tape winds on take-up reel of tape winder. See part five.
11 NUMBER RELEASE key. Depress NUMBER RELEASE key and start lever MB of the A or B message transmitter unit. Number is not transmitted to receiving and monitoring typing reperforators. See part five.
12 No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Depress No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Tape feeds out from monitor typing reperforator. See part five.
13 TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Depress TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Tape feeds out from receiving typing reperforator. See part five.
14 ALARM OFF (Button Out) key. Depress ALARM OFF key; message is being transmitted on A or B transmitter and received on receiving typing reperforator. Alarm bell rings and white light is illuminated. See part five.
15 RELEASE KEY. a. When main power switch is first thrown to ON or when main power switch is thrown to OFF and then back to ON. b. Depress RELEASE KEY. a. Red (break) lamp is illuminated indicating transmitter units are locked out. b. Red (break) lamp is extinguished; transmitters are unlocked. See part five.
16 BREAK KEY. Depress BREAK KEY. Opens test circuit; upper and lower typing reperforators run open. See part five.
STOP 17 Stopping teletypewriter set. Throw main power switch to OFF. Lamps go out; motors stop.
44
EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE START
60. Equipment Performance Check List for Split Duplex Operation
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
1 NORMAL SPLIT switch (SA). Turn to SPLIT.
2 DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB). Turn to DUPLEX.
3 OPR. NON-OPR. switches (SI and S2). Throw to OPR.
4 P 0 L A R M A K E -BREAK switches (S3 and S4). Throw to POLAR.
5 Line terminal strip. Make connections from column 4, fig. 25; strap 6 to 7 and 1 to 8, placing a 5,000-ohm variable resistor and a 0- to 100-m. a. milliammeter in series between 1 and 8. Strap 15 to 16 and 10 to 17 placing a 5,000-ohm variable resistor and a 0- to 100-m. a. milliammeter in series between 10 and 17. When main power switch is thrown to ON (item 6 below) milliammeter indicates line current; adjust resistor to permit line current of 10 to 30 m. a. Check line con-nections, section IV.
6 Main power switch. Throw main power switch to ON. Typing reperforator and multiple transmitter distributor motors run. See part five.
7 Tape-winder switch. Throw tape-winder switch to ON. Tape-winder motor runs. See part five.
8 Number transmitter unit. a. Release number start lever NB on number transmitter unit. b. Depress start lever MB on A message transmitter unit. Number is sent from number transmitter to lower typing reperforator (circuit No. 1). See part five.
9 A message transmitter unit and lower typing reperforator. c. Insert a test tape in the A message transmitter unit. d. Release start lever MB on A message transmitter unit. Message is transmitted from A transmitter and received on lower typing reperforator (circuit No. 1). See part five.
10 B message transmitter unit and upper typing reperforator. a. Depress start lever MB on B message transmitter unit. b. Feed test tape into B message transmitter unit. c. Release start lever MB on B message transmitter unit. Message is transmitted from B transmitter and received on upper typing reperforator (circuit No. 2). See part five.
11 NUMBER RELEASE key. Depress NUMBER RELEASE key and start lever MB on the A message transmitter unit. Number is not transmitted to receiving (lower) typing reperforator (circuit No. 1). See part five.
12 No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Depress No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Tape feeds out on lower typing reperforator. See part five.
45
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
STOP EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE 13 TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Depress TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Tape feeds out on upper typing reperforator. See part five.
14 ALARM OFF (Button Out) key. Depress ALARM OFF key; receive messages on either the lower or upper typing reperforator. Alarm bell rings and white alarm lamp is illuminated when messages are received on circuit No. 1 and circuit No. 2. See part five.
15 RELEASE KEY. a. When main power switch is first thrown to ON or when main power switch is thrown to OFF and then to ON. b. Depress RELEASE KEY. a. Red (break) lamp is illuminated indicating B message transmitter is locked out b. Red (break) lamp is extinguished; B transmitter is unlocked. See part five.
16 BREAK KEY. Depress BREAK KEY. Break signal sent on circuit No. 2; upper typing reperforator runs open. See part five.
17 Stopping teletypewriter set. Throw main power switch to OFF. Lamps go out; motors stop.
61. Equipment Performance Check List for Normal Single Operation
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
1 NORMAL SPLIT switch (SA). Turn to NORMAL.
2 DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB). Turn to SINGLE.
3 OPR. NON-OPR. switches (Si and S2). Throw to OPR.
START 4 POLAR MAKE- BREAK switches (S3 and S4). Throw to MAKE-BREAK.
5 Line terminal strip. Make connections from Column 3, fig. 25. Connect terminals 7 and 17 to a sending-receiving teletypewriter set. Check line connections, section IV.
6 Main power switch. Throw main power switch to ON. Typing reperforator and transmitter motors run. See part five.
7 Tape-winder switch. Throw tape-winder switch to ON. Tape-winder motor runs. See part five.
46
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE 8 Number transmitter unit. a. Release number start lever NB on number transmitter unit. b. Depress start lever MB on A or B message transmitter unit. c. Insert a test tape in the A or B message transmitter unit. d. Release start lever MB on A or B message transmitter unit. Number sent from number transmitter unit to teletypewriter set (see item 5 above). See part five.
9 A and B transmitter units. Message is sent to teletypewriter set (item 5 above). Upon completion of first message a new number is sent followed by message from second transmitter unit. See part five.
10 Monitor (upper) typing reperforator. Messages being transmitted from A and B transmitters. Copy of outgoing messages received on monitor (upper) typing reperforator. ’See part five.
11 Tape winder. Monitor copy of outgoing message being received on upper typing reperforator. Tape winds on take-up reel of tape winder. See part five.
12 Receiving (lower) typing reperforator. Message being transmitted from teletypewriter set (item 5 above). Message is received on lower typing reperforator only. See part five.
13 A and B transmitter units. Message being transmitted from teletypewriter set (item 5 above). During reception of message, transmitter units and monitor (upper) typing reperforator are locked out. See part five.
14 Red (break) lamp. Message being transmitted from teletypewriter set (item 5 above). During reception of message red (break) lamp is illuminated. See part five.
15 RELEASE KEY. Transmitter units locked out; red (break) light illuminated; depress RELEASE KEY. Transmitter units and upper typing reperforator unlock; red light is extinguished. See part five.
16 A and B message transmitter units. Break signal being sent from teletypewriter set while A or B transmitter is transmitting. Red lamp is illuminated; transmitter is locked out. See part five.
17 NUMBER RELEASE key. Depress NUMBER RELEASE key and depress and release start lever MB on A or B message transmitter unit. Number is not transmitted to teletypewriter set (see item 5 above). See part five.
18 No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Depress No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Tape feeds out from upper typing reperforator. See part five.
19 TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Depress TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Tape feeds out from lower typing reperforator. See part five.
20 ALARM OFF (Button Out) key. Depress ALARM OFF key; receive message from teletypewriter set (item 5 above). Alarm bell rings; white light is illuminated. See part five.
21 BREAK KEY. Depress BREAK KEY. Teletypewriter set (item 5 above) and upper typing reperforator run open. See part five.
47
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
STOP 22 Stopping teletypewriter packaged unit. Throw main power switch to OFF. Lamps go out; motors stop. See part five.
62. Equipment Performance Check List for Split Single Operation
START Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures
| 1 NORMAL SPLIT switch (SA). Turn to SPLIT.
; 2 DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB). Turn to SINGLE.
3 OPR. NON-OPR. switches (SI and S2). Throw to OPR.
4 POLAR MAKEBREAK switches (S3 and S4). Throw to MAKE-BREAK.
5 Line terminal strip. Make connections from column 6, fig. 25; connect terminals 1 and 8 to a sending-receiving teletypewriter set (circuit No. 1). Connect terminals 10 and 17 to a sending-receiving teletypewriter set (circuit No. 2). Check line connections, section IV.
6 Main power switch. Throw main power switch to ON. Reperforator and multiple transmitter distributor motors run. See part five.
7 Tape-winder switch. Throw tape-winder switch to ON. Tape-winder motor runs. See part five.
EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE 8 9 Number transmitter unit. A message transmitter unit. a. Release number start lever NB on number transmitter unit. 6. Depress start lever MB on A message transmitter unit. c. Insert test tape in A message transmitter unit. d. Release start lever MB on A message transmitter unit. Number transmitted to circuit No. 1. See part five.
Message transmitted on circuit No. 1; lower typing reperforator provides a monitor copy. See part five.
10 B message transmitter unit. a. Depress start lever MB on B message transmitter unit. 5. Insert test tape in B message transmitter unit. c. Release start lever MB on B message transmitter unit. Message transmitted on circuit No. 2. See part five.
48
Item No. Item Action or condition Normal indication Corrective measures;
EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE 11 Lower typing reperforator. Receiving message on circuit No. 1. Monitors outgoing messages of A message transmitter unit (circuit No. 1). a. Reception is on lower typing reperforator. b. Lower typing reperforator furnishes copy of messages transmitted. See part five.
12 Upper typing reperforator. Receiving message on circuit No. 2. Reception is on upper typing reperforator. See part five.
13 B message transmitter unit. Message being received on upper typing reperforator. B message transmitter unit is locked out and red (break) lamp illuminated. See part five.
14 RELEASE KEY. Transmitter unit locked; red lamp lighted; depress RELEASE KEY. Red (break) lamp is extinguished and B transmitter unlocked. See part five.
15 B message transmitter unit. Transmitting message from B transmitter unit; receive break signal on circuit No. 2. Red lamp is illuminated; B message transmitter unit is locked out. See part five.
16 No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Depress No. 1 TAPE FEED-OUT key FO-1. Tape feeds out on lower typing reperforator. See part five.
17 TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Depress TAPE FEED-OUT No. 2 key FO-2. Tape feeds out on upper typing reperforator. See part five.
18 NUMBER RELEASE key. Depress NUMBER RELEASE key and start lever MB on A message transmitter unit. Number not transmitted to circuit No. 1. See part five.
19 ALARM OFF (Button Out) key. Depress ALARM OFF key; receive message on either lower or upper typing reperforator (circuit No. 1 or No. 2). Alarm bell rings and white lamp is illuminated. See part five.
20 BREAK KEY. Depress BREAK KEY. Break signal received on circuit No. 2. See part five.
STOP 21 Stopping teletypewriter set. Throw main power switch to OFF. Lamps go out; motors stop. See part five.
49
PART THREE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Section VIII. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TECHNIQUES
63. Meaning of Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is a systematic series of operations performed periodically on equipment to maintain top efficiency in performance, to minimize unwanted interruptions in service, and to eliminate major break-downs. To understand what is meant by preventive maintenance, it is necessary to distinguish preventive maintenance from trouble locating and repair. The primary function of preventive maintenance is to prevent break-downs and the need for repair. On the other hand, the primary function of trouble locating and repair is to locate and correct existing defects. Preventive maintenance is of utmost importance. The usefulness of the entire system of communication depends upon equipment being ready to operate at peak efficiency when needed.
Note. The operations in this section are first and second echelon (organization operators and repairmen) maintenance. Some operations in section XI are higher echelon maintenance.
64. Description of Preventive Maintenance Techniques
a. General.
(1) Most of the parts used in Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A) require routine preventive maintenance of one kind or another. Because maintenance techniques cannot be applied indiscriminately, definite and specific instructions are needed. This section of the manual contains this type of specific instruction and serves as a guide for personnel assigned to perform the six basic maintenance operations—FEEL, INSPECT, TIGHTEN, CLEAN, ADJUST, and LUBRICATE. Throughout this manual the lettering system for the six operations will be as follows:
F—Feel.
I—Inspect.
T—Tighten. C—Clean. A—Adjust. L—Lubricate.
(2) The first two operations establish the need for the other four. The selection of operations is based on a general knowledge of field requirements. For example, rapid changes in climatic conditions (such as heavy rains followed by blistering heat) or excessive dampness, snow, and ice tend to cause deterioration of exposed surfaces and parts. Without frequent inspection and the necessary tightening, cleaning, and lubricating, equipment becomes undependable and may break down when it is most needed.
b. Feel (F). The feel operation is used to determine if electrical connections, transformers, motors, etc., are overheated. Feeling indicates the existence of some type of defect requiring correction. The maintenance man must become familiar with the normal operating temperatures of transformers, motors, etc., in order to recognize signs of overheating.
Note. It is important that the feel operation be performed as soon as possible after the shut-down and always before any other maintenance is done.
c. Inspect (I).
(1) General. Inspection is the most important operation in the preventive maintenance program. A careless observer will overlook the evidences of minor trouble and, although these defects may not interfere with performance of the equipment, valuable time and effort can be saved if trouble is corrected before it leads to major break-downs. Make every effort to become thoroughly familiar with the indications of normal function
50
ing in order to be able to recognize defective operation of the equipment.
(2) Inspection. Inspection consists of carefully observing all parts in the equipment, noticing their color, placement, cleanliness, etc. Inspect for the following conditions :
(a) Overheating, as indicated by discoloration, blistering, or bulging of the part or surface of the container, leakage of insulating compounds, and oxidation of metal contact surfaces.
(b) Improper placement, by observing that all leads and cabling are in their original positions.
(c) Lack of cleanliness, by carefully examining all recesses in the units for accumulated dust, especially between connecting terminals. Parts, connections, and joints should be free of dust, corrosion, and other foreign matter. In tropical and high-humidity locations, look for fungus growth and mildew.
(tZ) Looseness, by testing any connection or mounting which appears to be loose or by feeling the lug or terminal screw. d. Tighten (T). Any movement of the equipment caused by its transportation, by concussion from falling shells, or by vibration from moving machinery may result in loose connections which are likely to impair the operation of the teletypewriter set. The importance of firm mountings and connections cannot be overemphasized. However, never tighten screws, bolts, and nuts unless it is known definitely that they are loose. Fittings that are tightened beyond the pressure for which they are designed will be damaged or broken. When tightening, always be certain to use the correct tool of the proper size.
e. Clean (C). When the schedule calls for a cleaning operation, it does not mean that every item which bears that identifying letter must be cleaned each time it is inspected. Clean parts only when inspection shows that it is necessary. The cleaning operation to be performed on each part is described in the paragraph pertaining to that item.
Note. Gasoline will not be used as a cleaning fluid for any purpose. Solvent, dry-cleaning, is available as a cleaning fluid through established supply channels.
/. Adjust (A). Adjustments are made only when necessary to restore normal operating conditions. Specific types of adjustment are described in the paragraph pertaining to the particular item.
g. Lubricate (L). Lubrication means the addition of oil or grease to form a film between two surfaces that slide against each other, in order to prevent mechanical wear from friction. Generally, lubrication is performed only on motors, engines, and shafts.
65. Preventive Maintenance Schedules
a. Prepare a chart showing the various teletypewriter sets in the installation, the average number of hours Of operation daily, the dates routine maintenance operations are scheduled, the dates the maintenance operations are completed, and the initials or other designation of the person completing the maintenance operations. If desired, one chart may be prepared to cover each teletypewriter set. Base the schedule upon accurate information and revise it from time to time as conditions change. The record form used may cover time intervals of 1 month, 2 months, or any other interval desired by the officer in charge of the installation. The recommended time intervals for equipment maintenance checks are—
(1) Equipment in operation 12 to 24 hours daily, inspect every 10 days.
(2) Equipment in operation 8 to 12 hours daily, inspect every 15 days.
(3) Equipment in operation 8 hours or less daily, inspect every 30 days.
b. The above time intervals for maintenance checks of equipment are based on operating conditions where the temperature is moderate and the air is relatively free from dirt, sand, and excessive amounts of dust and moisture. When equipment is being operated in localities where there are extreme temperatures, excessive moisture, dust, dirt, sand, or other adverse conditions, routine schedules for inspection will be established for whatever intervals are necessary to keep the equipment in satisfactory operating condition.
c. When 600 o. p. m. is used instead of 368 o. p. m., the scheduling of routine maintenance checks will be arranged to compensate for the additional wear involved. Normally the time between checks will be reduced to about one-third of the period used at 368 o. p. m.
51
28 29
Figure 28. Tools and materials contained in Tool Equipment TE-50,
52
66. Preventive Maintenance Tools and Materials
Note. Before starting preventive maintenance, have on hand all tools and materials needed in performing the operations listed in the preventive maintenance check list (par. 81).
a. Tools. All required tools are furnished with Tool Equipment TE-50 (fig. 28), which is especially designed for maintenance of teletypewriter equipment. The list of tools and materials contained in Tool Equipment TE-50 is as follows:
Tools and Materials Contained in Tool Equipment TE-50*
Ref. No.** Signal Corps stock No. Item Ref. No.** Signal Crops stock No. Item
1 6Q17979 CASE CS-78. 41 4T876698 STONE: carborundum.
2 6R9906 RULE: steel; 6". 42 6G184.L CARBON TETRACHLORIDE: 8-oz metal can;
3 4T2215 GAGE: tape. technical grade.
4 4T96368 GAGE: set of assembly; wire; 0.006" to 0.025". 43 6N7531 SOLDER M-31: resin core.
5 4T106163 GAGE: set of cylindrical; wire; 0.030" to 0.060". 44 6N8583 TAPE TL-83: friction; cotton; %" wd.
6 4T96395 GAGE: set of assembly; wire; 0.065" to 0.080". 45 6N8692 TAPE TL-192: rubber; %" wd.
7 4T96355 GAGE: set of assembly; flat; 0.002" to 0.010". 46 6R4513 PLIERS TL-13: side-cutting; 6".
8 4T72581 PIN: gage. 47 6R4626 PLIERS TL-126: long-chain nose.
9 4T73517 GAGE: perforation feed wheel. 48 6R4735-6 PLIERS: duck bill; 6".
10 4T73370 GAGE: armature locating. 49 6R4603 PLIERS TL-103: diagonal-cutting; 5".
11 4T95368 SCREWDRIVER: hex. 50 6R55006 WRENCH TL-111: adjustable single end; capac-
12 6R17260 SCREWDRIVER: 2" blade; %2" tip; 4J4" over-all. ity; 6" 1g.
13 6R15121 SCREWDRIVER: 1%" blade; %2" tip; 5%" over-all. 51 4T87697 WRENCH: open;
14 6R15310 SCREWDRIVER TL-21: 21/>" blade; %2" tip; 6%" 52 4T4838 WRENCH: open; %"-%s".
over-all. 53 4T95366 WRENCH: open; %"-%6".
15 6R19005-1—- SCREWDRIVER: screw-holding; 10" blade; %2" 54 4T74871 WRENCH: open; 0.385".
tip; 13%" over-all. 55 4T95367. WRENCH: open; J4"-Me".
16 6Q51014 HANDLE TL-14: file; wood; 4" over-all. 56 4T138-36 WRENCH: open;
17 6Q60229 KNIFE TL-29. 57 6Q50004 HAMMER: riveting; 4 oz.
18 4T138-55 SCALE: 8 oz. 58 6Q17979/C2.. CASE: for tuning fork.
19 47138-58 SCALE: 32 oz. 59 4T104984 TUNING FORK: 96.19 vps; Teletype No. 104984.
20 4T4841 SCALE: 121b. 60 6Q17979/C2.. CASE: for tuning fork.
21 4T75765 HOOK; spring; pull. 61 4T103628 TUNING FORK: 87.6 vps; Teletype No. 103628.
22 4T75503 HOOK: spring; push. 62 6R24617 SOLDERING IRON: TL-117: 110-v, 70- to 100-w;
23 4T77618—... CASE: for small tools. with cord and plug.
24 8A805 CHEESECLOTH: bleached; 36" wd. 63 4T138-23 WRENCH: socket; Ms".
25 4C9914.5/5L. TOOL ROLL: empty. 64 4T138-22---. SCREWDRIVER: hex.
26 6M751 PAPER: cleaning; Bell seal bond. 65 4T89954 WRENCH: socket; %".
27 6Z2000 CLOTH: emery; crocus; 9" x 11". 66 4T89955 WRENCH: socket; %e".
28 6Z7500-000... PAPER: sand, flint; No. 000; 9" x 11". 67 6Z7306.. OILER: 6 oz; }4" x 4j4" spout; 1 drop force feed con-
29 6Z2000-0 CLOTH: emery; No. 0; 9" x 11". trol.
30 6M213 BRUSH: typewriter; toothbrush style. 68 6G800. GUN:- grease; Teletype No. 88975.
31 6Z1567 BRUSH: sash tool; oval; No. 2. 69 6Z6970 MAGNET M-129: bar; steel; 6" x ?4" x M".
32 6Z7360 ORANGE STICK: WECo No. KS-6320. 70 6Q38124-6---. FILE: half-round; smooth; 6".
33 6Z7072 MIRROR: dental; WECo No. 376A; 6%" x %" over 71 6Q38033-6.... FILE: flat; second cut; 6".
all. 72 6R57400-5...- WRENCH: socket; Bristol; for No. 5 fluted setscrews.
34 4T6617 Tommy. 73 6Z4002 FLASHLIGHT TL-122: includes bulb.
35 4T102876 STONE: contact. 74 3F4470-236... TEST UNIT 1-236: 5%" x 3M" x 3J4"; includes neon
36 4T138-30 FILE: contact. lamp and target lamp.
37 4T88993 BURNISHER: contact. 75 6Z8626 TAPE: relay cleaning; J4" wd; WECo No. KS-6528.
38 4T72003 BENDER: spring. 76 6R16510 SCREWDRIVER TL-44: 8" or 8H" blade; J4" tip;
39 4T72574 TOOL: locking bail; finger holding. insulated wood handle; 13" or 13J4" over-all.
40 41’72575 TOOL: finger bending.
♦This list was compiled on 15 May 1945 and is based on War Department Supply Catalog SIG 6-TE-50, April 1945.
♦♦Reference numbers refer to figure 28
b. Materials. All materials listed below may be secured through regular supply channels.
Signal Corps Item stock No.
Orange stick (WECo code No. KS-6320)—. 6Z7360
Cheesecloth, bleached 36" wd------------- 8A805
Cloth, emery ; crocus, 9" x 11" sheets (spec
No. 42C56-Navy)_________________________ 6Z2000
Carbon tetrachloride_____________________ 6G184.1
■Oil, lubricating preservative, special, U. S.
Army spec No. 2-120______________________ 6G1007
Signal Corps Item stock No.
Grease, lubricating, special, Ordnance spec
No. AXS-637_____________________________ 6G616
Paper, cleaning, Bell seal bond, %" x 2'^"
(WECo code No. KS-7188)_________________ 6M751
Paper, sand, flint, #0000 Fed. spec No.
P-P-lll __________________________________ 6Z7500-0000
Solvent, dry-cleaning, Fed. spec No. P-S-
661a____________________________________ 6G1914
Polish, metal, paste_____________________ 6G1516
Note. Gasoline will not be used as a cleaning fluid for any purpose. Dry-cleaning solvent (SD) is available as a cleaning fluid through established supply channels.
53
67. Preventive Maintenance for Exterior of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A)
The following preventive maintenance procedures for the exterior of the teletypewriter sets are elementary operations which will be performed by the operator without detailed instructions.
a. Inspect (I). Inspect the console for the following : dirt; cracked or chipped enamel; missing or broken screws, bolts, or nuts; bent, rusted, or otherwise damaged latches on doors, rollers, and sliding surfaces of shelves; broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged windows. Rotate the tape reels to see that they move freely.
b. Tighten (T). Tighten all screws on the exterior of the cabinet; replace any that are missing. Tighten all switch mountings and knobs.
e. Clean (C). Wipe off oil, dirt, and excessive moisture with a clean, dry cloth.
d. Lubricate (L). Lubricate rollers and sliding surfaces of the shelves.
68. Cords, Cables, and Plugs
The following preventive maintenance procedures for cords, cables, and plugs are for all connections of this type used on the teletypewriter set. It includes all connections that may have been made at the factory, by the maintenance depot, or by the repairman.
a. Inspect (I). Inspect cords and cables for cracked or deteriorated insulation, frayed or cut insulation at connecting points, and improper connections which strain the wires or connections. Inspect the plugs and sockets for dirt, rust, and corrosion and for cracked or damaged shells.
1) . Tighten (T). Remove the plug shells and sockets and tighten the connections. Tighten the connections on the power cords. Check to see that the connections on the terminal blocks are secure.
c. Clean (C). Wipe grease, oil, and moisture from the cords, plugs, and sockets with a clean, dry cloth. Clean any corrosion or stains from the plugs with polish, metal, paste (Sig C stock No. 6G1516) secured through regular supply channels. Do not apply an excessive amount of polish. Be sure to remove all residue of the polish after the cleaning operation in order not to interfere with electrical contact.
69. Fuses
a. Inspect (I). Inspect the fuses and fuse holders for dirt, dust, and corrosion. Check for burned-out fuses.
1). Clean (C). Clean the fuses with a sash brush. Brush all dirt, dust, and foreign matter out of the fuse holders. If there is corrosion on the fuse or fuse holder, remove the corrosion with #0000 sandpaper or crocus cloth and wipe clean with a dry cloth.
70. Relays
a. General. Before applying preventive maintenance techniques to relays, determine whether a given relay is normal or abnormal.
(1) A relay is considered normal if— («) Exterior is free from dirt or dust.
(&) Contacts are not burned, pitted, or corroded, and do not have build-ups.
((6) Pull out the sliding shelf for the lower typing reperforator (fig. 37 (5)). Disconnect the motor and signal plugs (fig.
37 (3)) and lift the reperforator from the shelf.
(7) Disconnect the input and output plugs of the rectifier (fig. 37 (4)) and lift the rectifier from its shelf.
{8) Pull out the sliding shelf for the upper typing reperforator (fig. 37 (2)). Dis
connect the motor and signal plugs and lift the reperforator from the shelf.
(9) Remove the two screws (fig. 37 (l))that hold the signal indicator panel in place.
(10) Pull the signal indicator panel out and remove the 27-pin plug.
(11) Remove from the console all rubber-covered cables that are not permanently attached. These cables are not to be processed.
(12) Remove all screws holding the covers of the multiple transmitter distributor and take off the covers.
(13) On all cables of more than six wires on the equipment drawer, typing reperforators, and multiple transmitter distributor, cut the lacing and separate the wires to obtain sufficient penetration of varnish when applying with a brush.
(14) Remove the side panel of the equipment drawer (fig. 38 (4)) to facilitate spraying of wiring and component parts.
(15) Do not remove the relay cover in the equipment drawer (fig. 38 (1)) until the spraying process is completed. Work in the relay compartment is to be done with a brush.
(16) Remove the cover of the rectifier chassis. c. Cleaning.
(1) Clean all dirt, dust, rust, and fungus from the equipment to be processed. Clean all oil and grease from the surfaces to be varnished.
(2) When the wiring is in good electrical condition but covered with an oil film too heavy to be removed, do not apply coating material to the wiring. If possible, replace the wiring.
(3) When wiring that is faulty or oil-soaked is replaced, treat the new wiring with coating material if the wire has not been treated with a fungicidal lacquer during manufacture.
Caution: Unless cleaning is done very carefully and thoroughly, the effectiveness of the moistureproofing and fungiproofing operation will be impaired.
d. Masking.
(1) Mask all rubber-covered cables that can not be removed from the console.
(2) Be sure that the screws on the terminal strips (fig. 37 (14)) are tight.
71
Figure 37. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A, partially disassembled.
(3) Mask the ball joint of the main power switch (fig. 37 (10)) on the front of the power cabinet.
(4) Mask the two cord receptacles (fig. 37 (11) and (12)).
(5) Mask the pin sockets of the Jones plugs (fig. 37 (7) and (8)).
(6) Mask the pin socket of the plug (fig. 37 (13))-
(7) Mask the terminal strips (fig. 38 (5)) and the fuse block (fig. 38 (6)) in the equipment drawer.
(8) Mask all openings in the chassis around the relay soldering lugs in the equipment drawer (fig. 38 (2)).
72
Figure 38. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A, masking of equipment drawer.
(9) Mask the opening under the control panel in the equipment drawer (fig. 38 (3)).
(10) Mask the input and output of the rectifier cables (fig. 39 (2)) and their contacts.
(11) Mask the entire selenium stack in the rectifier (fig. 39 (1)).
(12) Mask the rubber covering of the power cable attached to the signal indicator (fig. 40 (1)).
(13) Mask the contacts of the Jones plug attached to the signal indicator (fig. 40 (2))-
(14) Mask the contacts of the six switches on the signal indicator (fig. 40 (3)).
Note. No masking is required for the typing reperforators and the multiple transmitter distributor. These components are to be treated with a brush.
e. Drying.
(1) Place the component parts of the equipment in an oven and bake for 2 to 4 hours, at 140° F.
(2) Place strip heaters or heat lamps inside the console and bake for 2 to 4 hours at 140° F. If strip heaters are used, cover the entire front opening of the console.
Caution: Do not exceed 150° F. If insulating compound in any of the component parts begins to soften, decrease the temperature and increase the drying time approximately 1 hour for each 10° F. decrease in temperature.
f. Varnishing.
(1) Quickly inspect all masking to make sure it has not become loose during the drying process.
73
Figure 39. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A, rectifier with cover removed.
Figure Ifi). Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN /TGC—1 A, masking of signal indicator.
(2) Spray three coats of moistureproofing and fungiproofing varnish (Lacquer, Fungusresistant, spec. No. 71-2202 (stock No. 6G1005.3), or equal) on all components and parts that are masked. Allow each coat to air-dry for 15 or 20 minutes before applying the next coat.
(3) With a brush, apply two coats of moistureproofing and fungiproofing varnish to soldered connections, conductors, and connections inside the plug body, terminal blocks, resistors, coils, capacitors, and wiring of the typing reperforators.
(4) With a brush, apply two coats of mois
74
tureproofing and fungiproofing varnish to soldered connections, coils, capacitors, wiring resistors, terminal blocks, spring pile-ups, connections and wiring on the inside of the plug body, and to the terminal end of the cord of the multiple transmitter distributor.
Caution: Do not allow coating material to get on electrical contacts, slip connections, magnet pole faces, armatures, or mechanisms of the typing reperforators or multiple transmitter distributor.
(5) Apply varnish immediately after the equipment is dried. If varnish is not applied immediately, moisture condenses on the equipment. Varnish applied over the moisture peels off readily after the varnish has dried.
(6) After the spraying process has been completed and the varnish has dried, apply one coat of varnish with a brush to all cabled wires.
(7) With a brush, apply two coats of varnish to all wires except rubber-covered wires. Remove the relay cover (fig. 38 (1)) and apply two brush coats of varnish to all wiring and relay coils.
Be careful not to get varnish on any moving parts or contact surfaces.
(8) Do not varnish the front of the signal indicator.
■g. Reassembly.
(1) Remove all masking tape, being careful not to peel varnish from nearby areas.
(2) After the varnish is thoroughly dry, reassemble the equipment by following the instructions for disassembly, in reverse order. I
(3) Make a complete operational check of the equipment to be sure it is in good operating condition.
(4) If the unit does not operate after reassembly, check the electrical connections for presence of varnish coating. Varnish coating on terminals and electrical contacts acts as an insulating material. Recheck the reassembly operation. Component parts may have been replaced improperly or power leads connected to the wrong terminals.
Note. The electrical characteristics of electronic equipment are subject to change over a period of approximately 10 days after the application of the varnish. Wait until this period has elapsed before making the final check.
h. Marking. Mark the letters MFP and the date of treatment near the nameplate on the top of the equipment.
Example: MFP—24July46.
92. Moistureproofing and Fungiproofing After Repairs
If, during repair, the coating of protective varnish has been punctured or broken, and if complete treatment is not needed to reseal the equipment, apply a brush coat to the affected part. Be sure the break is completely sealed.
75
PART FOUR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(Not used)
76
PART FIVE
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
Section XII. GENERAL REPAIR PROCEDURE
93. Outline of Repair and Adjustment Procedure
Service failures can be kept to a minimum by careful handling of equipment during installation, by completing preventive maintenance as specified in part three, and by thoroughly investigating and correcting all troubles which are encountered. When service faults are discovered, a definite plan of corrective maintenance procedure will reduce both the time the equipment is inoperative and the amount of work required to complete the repairs. For assistance in locating and correcting defects in various parts and circuits, an outline of the information furnished in part five follows:
a. Detailed Functioning of Equipment. Section XIII includes a complete explanation of the purpose and operation of the various components and circuits. An understanding of how the various mechanisms function will assist greatly in determining when the equipment is operating correctly and when it requires repairs and, when repairs are required, whether it will be more practical to replace the part or to make the repair.
1). Tools and Test Equipment. Sections VIII and XIV describe the tools and test equipment normally required to accurately check all of the clearances, spring tensions, speeds of rotation, and other adjustments to determine that the entire teletypewriter set is functioning properly.
c. Trouble Locating. Section XV describes methods of isolating and locating different troubles and provides step-by-step analysis procedures in the form of trouble-analysis charts.
d. Repair and Replacement. Section XVI furnishes recommended procedures for the repair and replacement of those parts and units which experience the most wear.
e. Requirements and Adjustments. Section XVII gives the test requirements and adjustment values required to make a complete check and adjustment of the entire teletypewriter set.
94. Unsatisfactory Equipment Report
a. WD AGO Form 468 (Unsatisfactory Equipment Report) for Equipment Used by the Army. WD AGO Form 468 will be filled out and forwarded through channels to the Office of the Chief Signal Officer, Washington 25, D. C., when trouble occurs more often than is normal, as determined by qualified repair personnel.
&. AF Form 54 (Unsatisfactory Report) for Equipment Used by the Air Force. AF Form 54 will be filled out and forwarded to Commanding General, Air Materiel Command, Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, Dayton, Ohio, in accordance with AF Regulation 15-54, when trouble occurs more often than is normal, as determined by qualified repair personnel.
Section XIII. DETAILED FUNCTIONING OF EQUIPMENT
95. General
a. The detailed functioning of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A may be followed by examining figures 41 through 60. These diagrams cover the theory of operation of the
transmission and control circuits of the teletypewriter set. In the individual circuit diagrams used in this section, the heavy line indicates the circuit being described; relays are shown operated or nonoperated depending on their action in the circuit being described.
77
b. The separate numbered batteries in the individual circuit diagrams (figs. 41 through 60) represent the live pole of battery marked L in the schematic diagrams (figs. 127 through 132).
c. Switch SA is a five-section rotary switch, the sections of which are designated SA1, SA2, SAS, SA4, and SA5.
d. In the following paragraphs, for the sake of brevity, relay and switch contacts are described as follows:
(1) Contact 5 of relay RB is written RB-5.
(2) Contacts 7 and 8 of relay RBK2 is written RBK2-7/8.
^3) Contacts 11 and 12 of the third section of switch SA is written as SA3-11/12.
96. Sequence of Description of Transmitter Circuits
In the following paragraphs, the detailed functioning of the circuits of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A is presented in a
sequence which shows the follow-through from the moment a transmission cycle is started until it is completed. The transmission cycle is started when the transmitter start lever is depressed and released, setting up the pretransmission circuit which energizes relays RA and RB; this is described in paragraph 97. With these relays energized, the circuit is completed for energizing the number transmitter magnet. The number transmitter circuit is described in paragraph 98 which explains how, after the message number has been transmitted, the RN relay deenergizes the RNN relay to close the circuit, shorting out the high-resistance windings of relays RA and RB, to permit operation of the A and B transmitters. The message transmitter circuits and completion of the transmission cycle are described in paragraphs 99 and 100. Paragraphs 101 through 107 describe the functioning of the transmitting relays, break key, feed-out keys FO-1 and FO-2, relays RR1 and RR2, locking-out of typing reperforators, relay RC, and relays RBK1 and RBK2.
Figure 41- Pretransmission circuit, energization of RA relay, normal operation.
78
Figure 42. Pretransmission circuit, energization of RB relay, normal operation.
97. Transmitter Circuits (figs. 41,42, and 43)
When transmitter start lever MB is depressed, a message tape is inserted in the A or B message transmitter unit, transmitter start lever MB is released, and tape-out contacts MC, in series with the A transmitter magnet, close mechanically.
a. Normal Operation (figs. 41 and 42). With switch SA in the NORMAL position, when transmitter start lever MB is depressed and released, tape-out contacts MC close mechanically, completing the circuit (heavy line, fig. 41) from battery 1 through relay RA and the A transmitter magnet, in series. The 1,300-ohm resistance in the lower winding of relay RA in series with a 2,000-ohm resistor limits the current in this circuit so that the current is great enough to operate relay RA but not great enough to operate the A transmitter magnet. The operation of RA disables, at contacts RA-24/23, the energizing circuit for relay RB. Therefore if a second tape is inserted in the B transmitter unit, no action takes place until after
the release of RA which allows contacts RA-24/23 to close and the circuit for relay RB to be completed. The circuit for energizing relay RB is similar to that for energizing relay RA and is shown in heavy line in figure 42.
b. Split Operation (fig. 43). When switch SA is thrown to the SPLIT position, it connects the winding of relay RA directly to the 800-ohm battery tap resistance through SA3-2/3, and at the same time switches the winding of relay RB to a second 800-ohm battery tap resistance through SA3-5/6. Therefore RA and RB may be operated independently of each other.
c. Single Operation (fig. 43). When switch SB is thrown to the SINGLE position (changing SB2-1/3 to SB2-2/3), it removes the short across contacts RR2-22/21. Therefore, if switches SA and SB are in the SPLIT and SINGLE positions respectively, transmitter control relay RB cannot be energized while feed-out control relay RR2 remains operated. (In fig. 43, relay RR2 is shown in the nonoperated condition.)
79
TL 5728IS
Figure 43. Pretransmission circuit, energization of RA and RB relays, split operation.
98. Number Transmitter Circuit (figs. 44 and 45)
The operation of relay RA or RB as described in paragraph 97 completes the circuit, through RA-6/7 or RB-6/7, for energizing the number transmitter magnet.
a. NormalOperation. Figure 44 shows the circuit for energizing the number transmitter magnet when switch SA is in the NORMAL position. (In figure 44 the circuit common to relays RA and RB is shown in heavy line, and relays RA and RB are shown in the nonoperated condition.) With relay RA operated, the circuit is from battery 2 through SB2-3/1, SA5-7/9, RA-6/7, through relay RN and the number transmitter magnet, in parallel, to ground. With relay RB operated, the circuit is from battery 2, through SB2-3/1, SA5-7/9, SA4-4/6, RB-6/7, SA5-10/12, through relay RN and the number transmitter magnet, in parallel, to ground. The resistances of the two branches are proportioned so that sufficient current flows to
operate the number transmitter magnet but not sufficient to operate relay RN. The number transmitter magnet therefore operates and releases the transmitter clutch, sending out the next number. At the end of the number an unshift (letters) signal occurs, which is mechanically sensed causing momentary opening of contacts NC. The opening of contacts NC breaks the number transmitter magnet circuit and raises the current in the RN branch of the circuit to a value sufficient to operate relay RN. The operation of RN opens contacts RN-2/1 (and RN-3/4: see paragraph 99), preventing reenergization of the number transmitter magnet even though contacts NC again close. (Fig. 42 shows relay RN in the nonoperated condition.)
b. Split Operation (fig. 45). When switch SA is thrown to SPLIT, it removes contacts RB-6/7 (fig. 45) from the number transmitter circuit by changing contacts SA4-4/6 and SA5-10/12 to contacts SA4-5/6 and SA5-11/12; contacts RB-6/7 therefore no longer control the operation of the
80
81
SB2 __ U
So V 3 1,000 XL 5
2 _L X ’ O 6
_________SA4
800 A , j? PbbAq ‘ -4-
i—a/w—— i 122'WK, sA5 * r j> cu2 7
42 r-1 200 XL _ 7 10
RR2 RA RB
b g s s
NO. RELS KEY
rl i r- ■■ ■ O O------O--. 2
NO. XTR 12IOXL T <>
X i—F~i RN
< L~P 1 3,000 XL
NB-*-'*‘lNCf U _ AAA ~ < — 7"&
1 O S I-AW - -’ 550 XL
> i -r-^-------o - n rnn
X ’ .oo. “ 4 2,000X1* —-O r
<> 1,000 XL £3
..____j /wUU
__ 4 —
TL 57282S
Figure 44- Number transmitter circuit, normal operation.
SB2 |"
I I o "Y 3 1.000 XL 5
X 2 \ _________
3 Y ■ '_______SA4
■ •Wi/bX-U
7 7' , A/v. . . - ’
— 2 r—i 2 0 0 XL t—। [—
RR2 RA „ RB
4- g H
NO. RELS KEY y I -----------d b . -o 2
NO XTR UlOJL. -1--41
> 3,000JL n JRN
NB— *1 NCf-^ --AAA-U) 550X1-
•) q— ~O > I I r~“i
1,000 JL.
_____J jVW-U
--- 4ZL
U TL 57283 S
Figure 45. Number transmitter circuit, split operation.
number transmitter circuit. Switch SA also switches contact SA5-7/9 to contact SA5-8/9, which connects the energizing circuit for the number transmitter circuit directly to the 1,000-ohm battery tap resistance.
c. Single Operation (fig. 45). When switch SB is thrown to SINGLE (changing SB2-1/3 to SB2-2/3) the short across contacts RR2-22/21 is removed. If switches SA and SB are in the NORMAL and SINGLE positions, respectively, the number transmitter unit cannot be operated while feed-out control relay RR2 remains operated (par. 104). (In fig. 44, relay RR2 is shown in the nonoperated condition.)
99. Message Transmitter Circuits
A henever relay RN is operated it releases relay RNN (fig. 45 at contacts RN-3/4). (Fig. 45 shows relay RNN in the operated condition.)
a. Normal Operation (figs. 46 and 47). With relay RA operated, the release of RNN shorts out (through RNN-1/2) the high-resistance (1,300 ohms) winding of relay RA together with the 2,000 ohms series resistor (heavy line, fig. 46). Shorting out 3,300-ohms resistance raises the current in the circuit to a value sufficient to operate the A transmitter magnet. The high current, through the low resistance winding of relay RA, is sufficient to hold RA in the operated position. The A transmitter magnet operates and releases the transmitter clutch, sending out the message. With relay RB operated, a similar circuit (heavy line, fig. 47) for the B transmitter magnet may be traced, contacts RNN-3/4 performing the operation of shorting out the high-resistance winding of relay RB.
b. Split Operation (heavy lines, fig. 48). When switch SA is thrown to the SPLIT position, contacts RNN-3/4 are not connected to the cir-
Figure 46. Message transmitter circuit (A transmitter), normal operation.
82
----------------------------------------------------------------------- SB2 I 2 ,---------------------------------------------—o o
800-riS _L 23 J „23 —I
A —i 24 «JLX—■ ---------------o-J °2^ 2 I I
A6-J51---------------—T o 25 RR 5_________I XbW'v-------j
n 140Aflo4 2 ® S A 3 nJS, SA3~99 n 2 -
RNN b_X%>-JsA3 X <:^S>JSA3 22 RR2 2V
w --------O- _ >R A I -----XX > 4 -=Lr
. “ 2 1,30011 ‘ oAAAq 7 ('oAAV-i S
o—--------- □2,ooon i,3oojig2,ooon.
FL — L' ;rxe
0—3^0---------------------------SA5 J3-1
IO°*I2
SA4[V6-------
4
Jo SA2
10*^
7^
8
--------*--0—
6 ....
RBK2
210-0.1 avtd
tXlAXTR rf~~iSXTR
MB^l L ft TXL < i o—X (|Q—
-f MC 4- MC TL 57285 S
Figure Itl. Message transmitter circuit (B transmitter'), normal operation.
cuit of relay RB and contacts RB-6/7 perform the operation of shorting out the high-resistance winding of RB. Thus, as soon as relay RB is operated, it shorts out its own high-resistance winding and starts the B transmitter (circuit No. 2) independently of the operation of relay RNN (circuit No. 1).
100. Completion of Transmission Cycle
a. Normal Operation. At the end of the message, as the tape runs out, the tape-out sensing pin (par. 115<7(1)) rises, causing contacts MC (fig. 41) to open. The opening of MC causes release of the A (or B) transmitter magnet and relay RA (or RB). The release of RA or RB breaks the
energizing circuit to RN (fig. 44). The release of RN reenergizes RNN, restoring the teletypewriter set circuits to the pretransmission state of rest in readiness for transmission of the next message (fig. 41). If a second message is inserted in the idle transmitter, the reoperation of RN will immediately complete the transmitting circuit for the A or B transmitter magnet, commencing a new cycle of operation.
1). Split Operation. When switch SA is thrown to SPLIT, relay RB is no longer associated with relay RN (fig. 48). The release of RB therefore completes the operating cycle for circuit No. 2 and a new tape may be inserted in the B message transmitter unit.
83
--------------------f-------------------------- SB2
_____ I 2
I----T —ci °
' r>
800nS jl 23 I J? 3*—]
6rX, ' r~ A3^24 2, 800.0.
d2—* 51 1 I 5 1 1_a a. a .. .
In,,., l40-O-n_jZ>2 8 SA3 n RB g^vvy7L
RNN <"X-°X ca7 j—cXA0 (-O—o SA3 22 D 2 —
, _______SHRA ?-----SA3 6 —L.
I 2 l,300n.( oAMl 7 ("ZvvVi “
O-—♦ °-'1 S2,000.fL ^OOOEggjOOO-Q.
3 ' II f A6
n_3—° ---------------------SAbSj
10° 12
SA4r5%-------
o 6 4
|-X^2 o 12 10
8 ... .....°—3 5^
6 ---------------------
RBK2
210.0. A E
c£:jaxtr rT~nBxtr MB Al h FTL no MG - MC TL 57287S
Figure 48. Message transmitter circuit, split operation.
101. Detailed Functioning of A and B Transmitting Relays (fig. 49)
The A and B transmitting relays have biasing windings, 2-7, through each of which flows a fixed current of such polarity as to move the relay tongues to their spacing contacts. The operating windings 3-6, of these relays are under control of the transmitting contacts of the transmitter units and when the transmitter contacts are dosed are fed with current of such strength and polarity that the pull of the current in the bias windings is overcome and the relay tongues move to their marking contacts.
a. Normal Operation (fig. 49). With switch SA in the NORMAL position, all three transmitter units control the B transmitting relay. The circuit (heavy line, fig. 49) may be traced from positive battery through the 3-6 winding of the B transmitting relay, break key, monitor jack MJ-4, transmitting contacts of all three transmitter units in series, to negative battery. Operation of any one of the transmitter units, or of a spare
transmitter or keyboard plugged into monitor jack MJ-3 or MJ-4, causes the B transmitting relay to operate and to repeat the signals to the line.
&. Split Operation (figs. 50 and 51). Throwing switch SA to SPLIT (heavy line, fig. 50) places the B transmitting relay under control of the B message transmitter unit and places the A transmitting relay under control of the transmitting contacts of the A message transmitter unit and the number transmitter unit.
(1) Circuit No. 1. -Circuit No. 1 (heavy line,, fig. 50) is from positive battery through winding 3-6 of the A transmitting relay, SA1-2/3, monitor jack MJ-3, transmitting contacts of the A message transmitter unit, and the number transmitter unit, to negative battery. The A transmitting relay will repeat signals from the A or number transmitter or from a spare transmitter or keyboard plugged into monitor jack MJ-3.
(2) Circuit No. 2. Circuit No. 2 (heavy line, fig. 51) is from positive battery, through
84
winding 3-6 of the B transmitting relay, break key, monitor jack MJ-4, transmitting contacts of the B message transmitter, SA1-6/5, to negative battery. The B
transmitting relay will repeat signals from the B message transmitter unit or from a spare transmitter or keyboard plugged into monitor jack MJ-4.
85
ri'i'i'i^-----------
| A XTG RELAY
NO. XTR vWV f —— ——
‘XwWZ--. -------------g__, 3 1,000 JL
rd MJ-3 '' V-' '--------
> 2,000117 <—O-AAAA/-----<'
p-l gj 2 2,000-0.
A xtr tm~n1 I /2
3 i”I 1,000 n.
■ .......... CL°5 I
6X-J
I 4
e xtr mxn ho mj-4 BREAK KEY F £ 8 XTG RELAY
—2°i—n---------------------------St0»3 i’i°°f-
_^AAA c-L-^AAX------------
2'OOOJ17g2X^oiH
TL57288S
Figure 49. Circuit for normal operation, A and B transmitting relays.
Hhl'l'l'l1----------
_____1,000-0.____________________, a XTG RELAY
"NO- XTR Z\AA O J~~l, - 1.000.0.
p-r~B mj-3 —
> | 2 000-0.7 <--O—A/vW--<'
p—। gj 2 2,000.0.
xtr smr______________M_________z
3 ° 1,000 n.
----------------vw\ »
6 O--
। 4
B XTR x AAA si r-n MJ-4
(Z BREAK KEY
J* ? B XTG RELAY
-—Z a-----------H----------------tn,»
<__o—AAAA/--------
2,000-0-7 p 2 2,000-0-
TL 57289 S
Figure 50. Circuit for split operation, A transmitting relay.
H'l'iX----------
a a°?"J? 1 A XTG RELAY
— ----------r.. 3 ,.000r-i
-Cl MJ-3 a/X/X/^qJz-^XX-------’ •
> 2,000-0- 7 < —O-AAX < >
-q [pj 2 2,000-0-
a xtr rrrm sal>2 —°
'■XX----------6 6-----CX
3 ° 1,000 n
. ! 0^5 '
6 o—
b xtr ’ ’ ’ rn __. .. . .
M-M-O— J-4T1 MJ-4
G— BREAK KEY
l?l £ B XTG RELAY
—-P5!---------iA-------------Sw x00-0-
<-k>-^VWV------
|-AWV-<>-> AAA A 2’000J17gt^^
TL 57290 S
Figure 51. Circuit for split operation, B transmitting relay.
102. Detailed Functioning of Break Key
a. Normal Operation. The BREAK KEY is in series with operating-winding 3-6 of the B transmitting relay (fig. 49). Operation of the BREAK KEY opens the circuit to operating-winding 3-6, causing the B transmitting relay tongue to move to spacing and to send a spacing impulse to the line for as long as the break key is held depressed.
1) . Split Operation. In split operation the BREAK KEY is not associated with the A transmitting relay and therefore it is impossible to send a break signal on circuit No. 1 (fig. 50) by operation of the BREAK KEY. (A break signal may be sent on circuit No. 1 by inserting a dummy plug in jack MJ-3.) It is possible to send a break signal on circuit No. 2 (fig. 51).
103. Detailed Functioning of Feed-Out Key FO-1 and Relay RRl
a. Normal Operation (fig. 52). With switch SA in the NORMAL position, receiving relay REC-1 is the monitor relay and controls the monitor (upper) typing reperforator which is plugged into jack PJ-1. The circuit (heavy line, fig. 52A) may be traced from battery 5, through jacks MJ-1
and PJ-1, to marking contact 4 of receiving relay REC-1, to ground. Signals through the windings of REC-1 will be recorded by the monitor (upper) typing reperforator.
(1) Any time the monitor typing reperforator is idle, tape may be fed out by depressing feed-out key FO-1. Depressing FO-1 completes the circuit (heavy line, fig. 52B) as follows: from battery 5, through SA1-9, FO-1, and RR1-1/2, to ground. The application of ground deprives the typing reperforator magnet of sufficient battery to operate, releasing the reperforator magnet and allowing the typing reperforator to feed out blanks.
(2) If, while key FO-1 is held depressed, receiving relay REC-1 moves its tongue to spacing, a circuit (heavy line, fig. 52C) is completed for energizing relay RR1. This circuit may be traced from battery 6, through contacts 3 and 4 of FO-1, through winding of RR1 and spacing contact 5 of REC-1, to ground.
(3) RRl operates, dosing its holding circuit (heavy line, fig. 52D) at RRl-3, opening
86
its energizing circuit at RR1-4/5, and breaking the feed-out ground at RR1-2/1, thus placing the reperforator magnet again under control of receiving relay REC-1. RR1 is thus held operated until key FO-1 is released.
(4) The 1,500-ohm resistor between battery 7 and spacing contact 5 of REC-1 provides a constant load on the spacing contact. This is necessary to prevent sudden changes of load from causing voltage variations in the rectifier output.
b. Split Operation (fig. 53). With switch SA at SPLIT, receiving relay REC-1 becomes the re-
ceiving relay for circuit No. 1 and operates the receiving (lower) typing reperforator instead of the monitor (upper) typing reperforator which is now controlled by relay REC-2 (fig. 56). When thrown to SPLIT, switch SA removes jacks MJ-1 and PJ-1 from between battery 5 and the marking contact of REC-1 and replaces them by jacks MJ-2 and PJ-2 (heavy line, fig. 53). The receiving (lower) typing reperforator is plugged into PJ-2. The operation of feed-out key FO-1 in split operation is the same as in normal operation except that it feeds out the receiving (lower) typing reperforator instead of the monitor (upper) typing reperforator.
(MON)
MJ-I PJ-I (M0N)
<1 HO |-1 r-O1 'rO
15000. X 1^*] I XA' REC 1 SAI 41 A SAI REC-I
—i/W % 1 —4 u
v 10 —---3 I /i 5 - h>—6------61--o' ___x I ? ZL
J=r MJ-2 PJ-2 g ♦ ? Y 3 ’ T , ° 5-----2,0000
J=6 ,-tz * X aX 4
T _cnz_j> ^r6 f-Hfl 1
4 - I c X -X2 T | 0
TL 5729IS
Figure 52. Circuit for feed-out key FO-1, relay RR1, and relay REC-1, normal operation.
87
(MON)
MJ—I PJ-I
SAI fel 1*1 SAI REC-I
1,500X1 r-ot c ,
I—WVV-X 8 <5^-6 d-J ir\>—... -
5 — 7°----O O-----O'----o 12 4 p...... >
T 10 ' —°----■*__J J -i-
i MJ-2 PJ-2 L ♦
rd rO I
> £ ----If-W
[* 1 '-AAAA/---1
<*>4 1,500X1 - 7
——6 -------Jl----
S—I FO-I
JMl nRRI
----£j<56--------o—>550X1
<2 000X1 51
? . ________________
_ ?—— 4
Z6
__________TL57292S
Figure 53. Circuit for relays REC-1 and RR1, split operation.
104. Detailed Functioning of Feed-out Key FO-2 and Relay RR2
a. Normal Duplex Operation (fig. 54). With switch SA at NORMAL, receiving relay REC-2 controls the receiving (lower) typing reperforator. The circuit (heavy line, fig. 54) is from battery 8, through jacks MJ-2 and PJ-2, to marking contact 4 of receiving relay REC-2, to ground. Signals through the winding of relay REC-2 will be recorded by the receiving (lower) typing reperforator.
(1) The feed-out circuit is similar to that described in paragraph 103a (1), ground being applied to SA2-3 through RR2-23/24.
(2) With the tongue of receiving relay REC-2 moved to spacing, the energizing circuit for RR2 is similar to that for RR1 (par. 103a (2)) : from battery 9, through contacts 3 and 4 of FO-2, through winding of RR2 and spacing contact 5 of relay REC-2, to ground.
(3) RR2 operates, closing its holding circuit
at RR2-26, opening its energizing circuit at RR2-27/28, and breaking the feed-out ground at RR2-24/23, thus placing the reperforator magnet again under control of receiving relay REC-2. RR2 is held operated until feed-out key FO-2 is released. •
(4) The 1,500-ohm resistor between battery 10 and spacing contact 5 of REC-2 provides a constant load on the spacing contact. This is necessary to prevent.sudden changes of load from causing voltage variations in the rectifier output.
b. Normal Single Operation (fig. 55). With switch SA in the NORMAL position and switch SB in the SINGLE position, battery 9 is applied permanently to the winding of RR2 over contacts SB1-8/9 (heavy lines, fig. 55).
(1) The energizing circuit (heavy line, fig. 55A) for RR2 is from battery 9, through contacts SRI-8/9, winding of RR2, SB 1-12/11, RB-2/1, RA-1/2, spacing contact 5 of REC-2, to ground. If RA and RB are not operated (transmitters
88
(MON)
MJ-| PJ-I
I*— Pl REC-2
r
SA2 Jz- -J SA2 52
1,50011 3 Q---<5 i---I-----5q 4 P in-------
i----VA—x 7 0-----n 1 / v
-L Ajl (REC) 4 Cr 6 5 -n-- d O
9J z2 t=iPvvv-
+, ----IHAV-
(f < f 1 ' /oX SA4 1 (o
----Z L-------- »2°—
i
---------£~* i 3—Z
— "------I—1 --------;=n 2 n n
> \ I4OX-^RR2
S 2,00011 9 Jz S S
S RELS* f-Jl,300Jl
J_ KEY k —O—i
T9 y |SBI
- 281 IO<4 O----——-------------------
4 -----\2"
— 27 Pl 500JL
24 f-----O-O O---WA/----1
| O t- 25 BREAK 4r,.
-±r 1 LAMP (RED) y"
--------------------------~ TL 57 293 S
Figure 5Jh Circuit for feed-oxit key FO-2, relay RR2, and relay REC-2, normal duplex operation.
idle), regardless of whether or not FO-2 is depressed, RB2 is energized as soon as the tongue of REC-2 moves to its spacing contact; that is, on receipt of the first start impulse.
(2) The feed-out circuit is routed as described in a (1) above and is disabled by operation of RR2.
(3) RR2, when operated, closes its holding circuit (heavy line, fig. 55B) through RR2-28/26 and RELEASE KEY to ground.
(4) Operation of RR2 closes contacts RR2-24/25 completing the circuit (heavy line, fig. 55B) from battery 11 through the break (red) lamp to ground, causing the break lamp to light. Operation of RR2
blocks all transmitters. Transmission remains blocked and the break lamp remains lighted until the RELEASE KEY is depressed.
c. Split Operation (fig. 56). Throwing switch SA to the SPLIT position removes jacks MJ-2 and PJ-2 from between battery 8 and the marking contact of REC-2 and places jacks MJ-1 and PJ-1 between battery 8 and the marking contact of REC-2. The monitor (upper) typing reperforator therefore is placed under control of receiving relay REC-2 and becomes a receiving typing reperforator for circuit No. 2. With switch SA at SPLIT and switch SB at SINGLE, switch SA also shorts out contacts RA-2/1, so that operation of RR2 (circuit No. 2) is independent of the operation of RA (circuit No. 1).
823667—49----7
89
o ► o
H1, i—hl*—p । «
CD H
K co
OW I-------d-
CJ tX A
tf> V 9 —
7j oj y
S J I
or XX XN H L
i im n> > d §s
It t s\- ] *
1'---- ° s—6 2 2
. ~ ETk *.
, --------4 w q '—^ m
rL -Fir m
. A__________ W^3 i \J
~, J Li
i te} i -. XL
____j _________j « rx ci Ljh y !■ .
1 | 1 pbl-AAAHilHi'
;~p. ■ JSp
ci L
° X
Hili-{i*
CD
O OJ<
H1' H»IH’’ p [—
CD
□r d
ocu r---- . >-
i n> s H s<
11X5 - s
T T ° m l x
< IO V) S
o tn d-1 I x* —’ । f q
v------I 2
■■ ■ ■ 1 CM 00 ”*
I________ iMswi
~ J? ?------- o J s„
..i - X]*
=U U dLu
w I - 1^x1
< CM o p —T L_____________
7 I
■t
HilHi*
CD
Figure 55. Circuit for relay RR2, normal single operation.
90
(MON)
MJ-I PJ- I
> > n
4 4| REC-2
SA2 z-J SA2 _ S2
1,50011 3 I- L—J, I -X 4 *P---
■--VW—♦ o---------------------------------x i / -
A. ol (REC) 4 0 6 5____J -0 o O
eX j£j x/X
£—I £. ---IHVW-
.fT .n> " =7 li»
---X A X l-------- ~___________3^—। 3 O
I
taF°2
—.SBI o----o—fZ ? i_s_
x n irr2 ran rb r
> x i4on.<--------6 B
S2.000.fL 9 Jz s s
< RELS — , 1,300X1
J- KEY 1 —O->
T9 j y |sbi
— 281 IOQ O--------------------
—X——\'1
— 27 Pl 500XL
24 --O O O---AA/V 1
| O- p- 2 5 BREAK -b .
-±- 1 LAMP (RED) / '
---------------------‘ — TL572 95S
Figure 56. Circuit for relay REC-2, split operation.
105. Locking-Out of Typing Reperforators
a. Normal Single Operation (fig. 57). With switch SA at NORMAL and switch SB at SINGLE, the line signals, whether sent or received, operate both receiving relays REC-1 and REC-2.
(1) To prevent the received copy from being recorded on the monitor (upper) typing reperforator, the monitor typing reperforator is held idle during reception. This circuit (heavy line, fig. 57) for the monitor typing reperforator is from battery 5, through SA 1-9/7, jacks- MJ-1 and PJ-1 and monitor reperforator magnet, through SAI-10/12, SB 1-5/6, RA-3/4, SA3-10/12, RB-3/4, and RR2-5/6, to ground. Steady current passes through the monitor typing reperforator, holding it nonoperative, or in the idle condition. As soon as reception starts, REC-2 moves its tongue to spacing and RR2 is operated, as described in paragraph 104Z>. Operation of RR2 applies ground through RR2-4, SA2-9/7, SB1-6/5, SAI-12/10, jacks PJ-1 and MJ-1,
SAI-7/9, to ground, maintaining the steady current through the monitor (upper) typing reperforator regardless of the operation of relay REC-1. Therefore so long as reception is in progress the monitor typing reperforator is held idle. When transmission is in progress, RR2 is not operated and the locking circuit is broken at RA-3 or RB-3, whichever is operated. Therefore the monitor typing reperforator is free to record the outgoing message.
(2) A similar circuit is provided to prevent the sent copy from being recorded on the receiving (lower) typing reperforator. The circuit (heavy dotted line, fig. 57) is from battery 8, through SA2-3/1, jacks MJ-2 and PJ-2 and the receiving reperforator magnet, through SA2M:/6, SB2-5/6, RB-5/4 (RB will be operated during transmission), and RR2-5/6 to ground. Steady current passes through the receiving (lower) reperforator magnet holding the receiving (lower) typing reperforator nonoperative regardless of operation
91
SB I 4 0 O ------------------------------------
SA2 t__n5 C1—r „5 • 4^ ! (REC)
l_____ Y ’ ; mj-2 pj-2
n- r|- 1 i f 1
“ } I,5000 J>2 F II 5A?A2
I f~ -WAr-ZZ ——2) <5—-—yr t » TO R EC - 2
8-=r SA2 4 I
JL 1
• — 1
SB2 I
p^. I
1-------------------dg TL 57297S
Figure 58. Reperforator lock-out circuit, split single operation.
92
106. Call-in Circuit
When Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) is to be left unattended the alarm switch (ALARM OFF (Button Out)) may be
thrown on. This puts battery 12 on the windings of call-in relay RC.
a. Normal Operation (fig. 59). With switch SA in the NORMAL position, only the lower winding of RC is operative. When relay REC--2
ALARM SWITCH
TO COMMON ALARM
ALARM SWITCH
TL57298S
TO COMMON ALARM
Figure 59. Call-in (alarm) circuit, normal operation.
93
moves its tongue to spacing, the energizing circuit (heavy line, fig. 59A) for relay RC is from battery 12, through lower winding of RC, contacts RC-9/8, spacing contact 5 of REC-2, S2-1/2, to ground. RC operates and locks itself through its contact RC-7 (fig. 59B). RC completes circuits to an alarm lamp (white), through contacts RC-3/4, to a warning bell, through contacts RC-1/2, and to an external circuit for a common alarm, through contacts RC-5/6. RC is released by throwing off the alarm switch.
Z>. Split Operation. When switch SA is thrown to SPLIT, the lower winding of RC remains connected to spacing contact 5 of REC-2 and the upper winding of RC is connected to spacing contact 5 of REC-1 through SA5-2/3. Thus the alarm is responsive to signals on either circuit No. 1 or circuit No. 2.
107. Break Circuit, Relays RBK1 and RBK2 (fig- 60)
a. Relay RBK1. Relay RBKl normally is held operated. The circuit (heavy line, fig. 60A) is from battery 10 through winding of RBKl to ground. When REC-2 moves its tongue to spacing, the winding of RBKl is shorted out, but since RBKl is a slow-release relay, it does not release during normal operation of REC-2. If, however, a long spacing impulse is received, as when a break signal is received (par. 102), relay RBKl is released. Note that since relays RR2 and RC also are connected to spacing contact 5 of REC-2, as described in paragraphs 104 and 106, small leak currents flow through the windings of these relays and through RBK-1. These currents are too small to operate either relay RC or relay RR2 and do not affect the release of RBKl.
Z>. Relay RBK2.
(1) Relay RBK2 normally is held operated by relay RBKl; the circuit (heavy line, fig. 60B) is from battery 13, through RBK2 winding, RBK2-3/4, RBK1-2/1, to ground. Upon release of RBKl, relay RBK2, which also is a slow-release relay, is released. Release of RBK2 lights the break lamp (fig. 60) and stops the A or B transmitter unit (fig. 41), disabling the A or B transmitter circuit at RBK2-5/6 and RBK2-7/8. When RBK2 is released it breaks its own energizing circuit. Once released RBK2 cannot be reenergized by
RBKl and may be energized only by depressing the RELEASE KEY, which applies ground directly to the winding of RBK2.
(2) The break feature is not required in duplex operation. When switch SB is thrown to DUPLEX, ground is applied through SB2-7/9 to RBK2-4, holding RBK2 operated regardless of the release of RBKl.
(3) By throwing switch S2 to NON-OPR. (par. 121), ground also may be applied through S2-2/3 to RBK2-4, holding RBK2 operated.
(4) With switch SA thrown to SPLIT, contacts RBK2-7/8 are shorted out through SA2-12/11. Thus, when operating SPLIT, the release of RBK2 stops only the B transmitter unit, circuit No. 2, and does not affect circuit No. 1.
108. Detailed Functioning of Components
The following paragraphs describe in detail the functioning of individual components of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A.
109. Detailed Functioning of Signal Indicator Panel
The signal indicator panel is located at the top of the console and housed in a demountable box which is connected electrically to the main console by means of a plug and socket. See figures 23 and 118 for assembly and wiring diagrams of the signal indicator panel.
a. Number Release Key. Depressing the NUMBER RELEASE key opens the number transmitter magnet circuit (fig. 44). Therefore, if the N1 MBER RELEASE key is depressed when a tape is put in the A or B message transmitter unit and is held depressed until after transmitter start lever MB is released, relay RN will be energized immediately after RA or RB operates and no number will be transmitted.
&. Alarm Lamp (White). The white alarm lamp (par. 106, fig. 59) lights when a long break signal is received from a distant station.
c. Alarm Off (Button Out) Switch. The ALARM OFE (Button Out) switch operates (par. 106, fig. 59) by making or breaking battery connection to the windings of call-in relay RC. With the ALARM OFF switch in the ON position, bat-
94
vde-’hicli ding
Figure 60. Break circuit, relays RBKl and RBK2.
95
tery is supplied to the windings of relay RC, operating the white alarm lamp and the alarm bell, when a break signal is received from a distant station through receiving relay REC-2 (or relay REC-1 when switch SA5 is in the SPLIT position).
cl. No. 1 Tape Feed-Out No. 2 (Feed-Out Keys FO-1 and FO-2). Feed-out keys FO-1 and FO-2 are for the purpose of feeding tape out of the two typing reperforators when no messages are being received. Feed-out control relays RRl and RR2 work with keys FO-1 and FO-2, respectively, for this purpose. Depressing feed-out key FO-1 applies ground to switch SA1-9 through contacts RR1-1/2 (fig. 52) ; depressing feed-out key FO-2 applies ground to switch SA2-3 through contacts RR2-23/24 (fig. 54). The applied ground deprives the typing reperforator magnet of sufficient battery to operate, releasing the reperforator magnet and allowing the typing reperforator to feed out blanks.
e. Release Key. The RELEASE KEY has a dual function—releasing feed-out control relay RR2 (fig. 55) or reoperating break relay RBK2 (fig. 60) to release the message transmitter units for operation.
/. Break Lamp. The break lamp, a red lamp operated by relay RR2 (fig. 55) or RBK2 (fig. 60), indicates that the transmitter units have been locked out by either of the two relays and must be released for transmission.
g. Break Key. The BREAK KEY is for the purpose of sending a break signal to the distant station. Depressing the BREAK KEY for approximately 3 to 5 seconds moves receiving relay REC-1 or REC-2 of the distant Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 or AN/TGC-1A to its spacing contact, releasing relay RBK1 and operating the break lamp.
110. Detailed Functioning of Monitor (Upper) Typing Reperforator
For information on the detailed functioning of the monitor (upper) typing reperforator, see TM fl-2223.
111. Detailed Functioning of Tape Winder
The tape winder consists of an a-c d-c-series motor, reduction gear, clutch, 10-inch reel, and illuminating lamp, mounted on a base. The tape winder provides the means by which the tape from the
monitor (upper) typing reperforator is wound automatically for possible future use.
Note. As the present issues of tape-winder motors (Sig C stock No. 3H8000-64) are replaced, they will be replaced by Barber-Colman Motor No. PYAZ-4433-1 (induction type). The Barber-Colman motor is an airplane-type motor and the entire unit is replaced when trouble occurs.
112. Detailed Functioning of Receiving (Lower) Typing Reperforator
For information on the detailed functioning of the receiving (lower) typing reperforator, see TM 11-2223.
113. Detailed Functioning of 54A Rectifier
The 54A rectifier is a dry disk selenium rectifier, with input transformer and output filter. It operates from a 110- to 120-volt, 50- to 60-cycle a-c supply. The rectifier output is approximately 600-m. a., 110-v. d-c. The transformer primary has taps to accommodate to reasonable variations of line voltage. See figures 21 and 121 for assembly and wiring diagrams.
114. Detailed Functioning of Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
a. The multiple transmitter distributor (fig. 61) is a transmitting mechanism which, when used in combination with typing reperforators, provides combined sending and receiving facilities for tape message relaying. A complete multiple transmitter distributor set consists of three transmitter distributor units and a motor unit mounted on a base which is equipped with cross shaft, gears, and terminal strips (figs. 65 and 66). Two of these transmitter distributor units are message transmitters (fig. 62) and the third is a number transmitter (fig. 64). The function of the number transmitter is to insert automatically into the signal Hue successive numbers, from a number tape, which will identify each message. The number transmitter is like the message transmitter except that the number transmitter is equipped with a letter-sensing mechanism which makes the number transmitter responsive to the letters code combination in the number tape, causing stopping of the number transmitter and starting of the message transmitter through external electrical control circuits (par. 98).
b. The multiple transmitter distributor (message or number transmitter units) is arranged to
96
Figure 61. Multiple transmitter distributor and base.
handle either perforated or chadless tape received from other stations on reperforators or prepared locally on keyboard perforators.
115. Functioning of Message Transmitter Units (MXD8)
The message transmitter unit (fig. 62) consists essentially of the following mechanisms : a 7.42-unit code transmitting-cam cylinder with associated transmitting contacts, tape-feed and tape-sensing mechanisms, a hinged tape lid, an automatic tape-out control feature, a manual-control mechanism, a magnet-operated clutch, a driven gear, and a transmitting contacts filter (figs. 62 and 63).
a. Transmitting-Cam Cylinder. The transmitting-cam cylinder normally is held stationary because the clutch members on the transmitting shaft are held disengaged by the clutch throw-out lever (figs. 63 and 82). When the clutch magnets are energized, the clutch members engage and rotation of the transmitting-cam cylinder starts the cycle of operation.
b. Selector-lever Bail. The transfer of the code combination in the perforated tape to the con
tact levers which control the transmitting contacts is accomplished by the selector-lever bail (fig. 62), its cam, selector-lever pins, and selector levers. The selector-lever bail extension roller (fig. 83) rises from the indent'on its cam and causes the selector-lever bail to move away from the selector levers. The selector-lever springs pull the selector levers up toward the tape. The selector-lever pins which encounter perforated holes in their path advance through the perforations, but the pins which do not encounter perforations as they come in contact with the tape are blocked by the tape and are prevented from advancing further.
c. Selector Levers. Each selector lever is positioned, through the medium of the perforations in the tape, to correspond with each signal impulse to be transmitted. Each selector lever controls the motion of a contact lever either by allowing the contact lever to close its contact when the cams revolve or by restricting the motion of the contact lever. If the selector-lever pin does not enter a perforation in the tape, corresponding to a spacing impulse, the lower end of the selector lever engages the associated contact lever and prevents it from rising into an indent of the cam, as the cam
823667—49----8
97
TL 57I76S :
rotates, thus holding the circuit open for that impulse. If the selector-lever pin enters a perforation in the tape, corresponding to a marking impulse, it does not interfere with the movement of the contact lever. Then, as the cam revolves, the contact lever rides on the cam periphery and drops into an indent, thereby allowing its contact to close and send out a marking impulse. As the cams rotate, the impulses, either marking or spacing, are transmitted in succession.
d. Start-stop Cam. The start-stop cam controls a contact lever which in turn actuates the start-stop contacts (fig. 63). These contacts are opened at the beginning of each revolution of the cam cylinder to transmit the start impulse (spacing) and remain open during the transmission of the five impulses. After the fifth impulse has been transmitted, the start-stop contacts again close, sending the stop impulse (marking) to the line.
e. Selector-Lever Bail Extension. After the fifth impulse has been transmitted, the selectorlever bail extension (fig. 62) drops into the indent
in its cam, causing the selector-lever bail to retract all the selector levers from their sensing positions. At this moment the feed-pawl arm roller drops into the indent in its cam and the feed pawl (fig. 62) engages the feed-wheel ratchet, stepping it forward, thereby advancing the tape one character space over the selector-lever pins. A feedwheel detent (fig. 62) establishes the relative setting of the feed wheel.
/. Clutch Magnets. The transmitting-cam cylinder rotates continuously so long as the clutch magnets are energized. An interruption of the clutch magnet circuit causes the clutch throw-out lever to engage the cammed surface of the driven member of the clutch (due to the action of the dutch throw-out lever spring) and, as the transmitting shaft rotates, the driven clutch member is cammed out of mesh with the driving member.
g. Tape-Out Contacts. Within the message transmitter there are two provisions for interrupting the clutch magnet circuit. The clutch magnets are connected in series with a set of automatically
FEED-WHEEL DETENT
■ SELECTOR
LEVER BAIL
FEED WHEEL
SELECTOR LEVERS
FEED PAWL
MANUALLY-OPERATED CLUTCH MAGNET CONTACTS .
■ TL 5 72603*
TAPE-OUT CONTACT-
LEVER LATCH
AAtAAA
Figure 62. Message transmitter unit.
98
■ CLUTCH
TRANSMITTING CONTACTS FILTER
TAPE-LID
LATCH
contact levers
CLUTCH THROW-OUT LEVER SPRING
START-STOP CONTACTS
TRANSMITTING CAM CYLINDER
TAPE-OUT CONTACT LEVER
TRANSMITTING CONTACTS
TL 57173S
Figure 63. Transmitter-unit mechanisms.
CLUTCH THROWOUT LEVER
CLUTCH MAGNETS
operated contacts (MC, NC) and a set of manually operated contacts (MB, NB) (fig. 62). The opening of either set of contacts stops the message transmitter (par. 97).
(1) Automatic contacts. The automatic contacts are a function of the tape-out feature. The message transmitter has a tape-out sensing lever which operates in unison with the other five selector levers. The associated sensing pin (fig. 85B) is in line with and adjacent to the sensing pin for the first impulse. The tape-out sensing lever has a larger sensing area and a portion of its senses along the edge of the tape during the transmission of each character. When the end of the tape has passed through the message transmitter the tape-out sensing lever rises. Under this condition the lower end of the
tape-out sensing lever does not interfere with the movement of its associated tape-out operating lever and this lever, in turn, is permitted to ride on its cam periphery (fig. 86). When the tape-out operating lever drops into the cam indent, a pin on the tape-out operating lever engages the tape-out contact lever, thus rotating the tape-out contact lever about its pivot until at one end of the tape-out contact lever the automatic contacts are opened, and on the other end the lever is latched by the tape-out contact lever latch. This interruption of the clutch magnet circuit by the opening of the automatic contacts stops the transmitter unit and renders it inoperative.
(2) Manual contacts (figs. 62 and 63). The manually operated contacts are controlled
99
FEED-PAWL ARM ROLLER
RELEASE BAR
by depressing the release bar. The bar may be depressed momentarily or it may be latched in the depressed position with a slight forward pressure. Operation of the release bar accomplishes three functions : opens the manual contacts to stop the transmitter; unlatches the tape-out contact thereby closing the tape-out contact ; and disengages the feed-wheel detent and the feed pawl which permits the feed wheel to spin freely to aid in the insertion or alinement of tape over the feed pins. When the release bar is released, the manual contacts dose and the transmitter operates.
h. Hinged Tape Lid (fig. 63). The message transmitter is equipped with a hinged tape lid which permits the use of perforated or chadless tape without altering its adjustments. Tape is inserted directly under the latched lid after depress
ing the release bar. For inserting tape loops, the lid may be unlatched.
116. Functioning of Number Transmitter Unit (MXD9) (fig. 64)
The functions of the number and message transmitters are identical with the exception of the let-ters-sensing mechanism (fig. 90) described below.
a. The letters-sensing mechanism is used to stop the number transmitter and to start one of the message transmitters when the letters code combination is sensed in the tape.
1) . During every operating cycle, when the selector-lever pins are sensing the code combination in the tape, a letters operating lever senses the ends of the five selector levers. If one or more selector levers are in the spacing position, the letters operating lever is prevented from continuing its travel. If the code combination is letters (all marking
?SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL
SELECTOR LEVERS
FEED WHEEL
FEED-WHEEL
DETENT
LETTERS OPERATING LEVER
MANUALLY-OPERATED CLUTCH MAGNET CONTACTS
FEED PAWL
TAPE-OUT CONTACTLEVER LATCH
Figure GJf. Number transmitter unit.
100
’1. 5n?4s]
impulses), the letters operating lever is not blocked by any of the selector levers and therefore is rotated through a larger angle. The letters operating lever has two extensions, one of which rides on a cam and permits the letters operating lever to sense the selector levers, while the other engages the tape-out contact lever when a letters code combination is sensed in the tape and consequently opens the tape-out contacts. These contacts are opened momentarily since the tape-out contact lever latch is disabled in the number transmitter. The momentary opening of these contacts causes the number transmitter to stop, and starts one of the message transmitters by means of an external electrical control circuit (pars. 98 and 99).
117. Multiple Transmitter Distributor Base
a. The multiple transmitter distributor base has facilities for mounting a motor unit and three transmitter distributor units. The number trans
mitter is mounted on the left side, and the two message transmitters are mounted in the middle and on the right side (figs. 65 and 66). A series-governed motor is used for operation on 115-volt, 50- or 60-cycle a-c or 115-volt d-c. The motor is removable as a complete unit and is equipped with a governor filter (fig. 110).
1). The motor power is transmitted to individual transmitter distributor units through a cross shaft (fig. 65). Each transmitter distributor unit has an individual terminal strip to facilitate disconnecting the transmitter cable to remove the individual units. Underneath the base are the governor circuit elements, a terminal block for external power connections, and three sets of spark protectors for the automatic and manual contacts on the three transmitter units. A two-conductor power cord and an eight-conductor cable, which terminate in plugs, provide facilities for external connections.
TERMINAL STRIPS MOTOR UNIT
z \
/ \ jT X.
r ^RjfcfcS^L’ 1
jLifcSMIWBrifc-^. - i’*^Z^3t**s5lfx>k
ft J?^zZ '£^^^7'-'
^gPlSafjSBsC mmB 'J ■ SKHKi <^hI jSjHffiwfc'^r‘*??‘J-*
■ 2 1 ~ • \
hMSIW terminal strTps!
VW.
' ■ • • • ”- V
i‘-‘ ' ' ■ ’ . 1TL 57I72S|
Figure 66. Multiple transmitter distributor base, rear view.
c. A complement of covers provides dust protection. Although the various sections of the covers are removable, a hinged lid is provided in the motor cover which may be opened easily to provide a view of the speed target and access to the speed-adj listing members. A guard is provided on the cover in front of the number transmitter through which the number tape will pass and be protected from damage from external sources. A tape chute directs the used tape from the message transmitter on the right. The front of the base is equipped with a cardholder (see fig- 61).
118. Detailed Functioning of Power Cabinet
The power cabinet comprises a male plug and base for the power input, main power switch, fuses for all circuits, AC-DC switch for adapting the set to a-c or d-c power supply, and the 10-ohm and 300-ohin series resistors which are shorted out for a-c operation of the transmitter and typing reperforator motors (par. 24b (1)). A power outlet also is provided into which the next adjacent Teletype
writer Set AN/TGC-1 may be plugged. See figures 20 and 125 for assembly and wiring diagrams.
119. NORMAL SPLIT Switch SA
The NORMAL SPLIT switch. SA. makes all changes necessary in switching from one-circuit to two-circuit operation. Switch SA is a five-section rotary switch housed in the equipment drawer.
120. DUPLEX SINGLE Switch SB
The DUPLEX SINGLE switch, SB. makes all changes necessary in switching from duplex to single operation. Switch SB is a two-section rotary switch housed in the equipment drawer. When the teletypewriter set is on SPLIT operation, switch SB operates only on circuit No. 2. Circuit No. 1 may be operated duplex or single regardless of the position of switch SB.
121. OPR. NON-OPR. Switches SI and S2
The OPR. NON-OPR. switches. SI and S2, remove ground from the tongues of receiving relays
102
REC-1 and REC-2 respectively. When the teletypewriter set operates SPLIT, if one of the circuits is disconnected, line relay REC-1 (or REC-2) might lie on its spacing contact, interfering with the proper operation of the alarm and/or break circuits. To avoid this, switch Si for circuit No. 1 breaks the ground connection from the tongue of relay REC-1, disabling the alarm for that circuit. Similarly, switch S2 breaks the ground connection from the tongue of relay REC-2, disabling the alarm; at the same time S2 puts ground on the winding of relay RBK2, disabling the break feature.
122. POLAR MAKE-BREAK Switches S3 and S4
The POLAR MAKE-BREAK switches, S3 and SI, adapt the teletypewriter set to polar or make-and-break operation. In the POLAR position, the center-tapped resistors are batteried to provide a return point for the polar signals from the transmitting relays. In the MAKE-BREAK position, the center-tapped resistors are disconnected and the bias windings of relays REC-1 and REC-2 are batteried.
123. Transmitting and Receiving Relays
There are four No. 255A relays in the equipment drawer; two are used as transmitting relays. When working NORMAL, the B transmitting relay is operated by all transmitters, the A transmitting relay being idle. When operating SPLIT, the A transmitting relay is operated by the num
ber and A transmitter units and sends to circuit No. 1, while the B transmitting relay is operated by the B transmitter and sends to circuit No. 2. The other two No. 255A relays are used for receiving. In NORMAL operation, relay REC-1 controls the monitor (upper) typing reperforator, while REC-2 controls the receiving (lower) typing reperforator. When operating SPLIT, the controls are reversed—REC-1 controls the receiving (lower) typing reperforator, which receives from circuit No. 1; REC-2 controls the monitor (upper) typing reperforator, which receives from circuit No. 2.
124. RA, RB, RN, and RNN Relays
Relays RA, RB, RN, and RNN together form a group for controlling the operation of the transmitter units. The sequence of operations is described in paragraphs 97 through 100.
125. RR1 and RR2 Relays
Relays RR1 and RR2 are the feed-out control relays, RR1 being associated with feed-out key FO-1 and with receiving relay REC-1, relay RR2 being associated with feed-out key FO-2 and with relay REC-2. Their functions are described in paragraphs 103 and 104.
126. RBKl, RBK2, and RC Relays
Relays RBKl and RBK2 are the break relays. Relay RC is the call-in relay. The functions of these three relays are described in paragraph 107.
Section XIV. TEST EQUIPMENT
127. Test Unit
Test Unit 1-176 or equivalent is satisfactory for testing current flow in, and continuity, insulation, or resistance of, the electrical circuits in Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A). The following paragraphs give a brief description and the purpose of the test sets most frequently used by teletypewriter repairmen.
128. Test Unit 1-176 (fig. 67)
Test Unit 1-176 is designed to measure resistance, alternating current, direct current, and voltage
over a wide range of values. See TM 11-2626 for a complete description of this test unit.
129. Test Set TS-2/TG
Test Set TS-2/TG (fig. 68) is a portable motor-driven unit arranged to transmit normal or distorted signals for testing teletypewriter circuits and for checking the efficiency of start-stop selector units on teletypewriters. It sets up two types of distortion, marking or spacing bias, and marking or spacing end distortion. Any one of the four test signals, R, Y, SPACE, or a test message, may
103
Figure 67. Test Unit 1-176.
104
r
c''-
TEST LEADS
5000 V TEST LEADS
Figure 68. Test Set TS-2/TG, with chest cover open.
105
MOTOR SIGNAL CHARACTER
SWITCH KNOB
F BIAS-ENO
' DISTORTION KNOB Tl53023S
DISTORTION MEASURING FACE
SCALE PLATE
’ \ / \ / \ /
81A S - E N D 01S T
KEY
V A R K -.: E R 0 - S PA C E 7. FjEJSS^^
key -mmIn^y7 *4
" ~ - - '^ •' IBlwSBll DISTORTION
xresj|firar~ ■
STROBOSCOPE '\V L~' . L£\. Except in cases of extreme emergency all repairs to teletypewriter sets will be completed by personnel thoroughly trained in teletypewriter maintenance. It is as important to know ivhat not to do as what to do when making teletypewriter
115
equipment repairs. Equipment operating with minor faults may fail completely as a result of efforts by inexperienced personnel to correct what apparently are simple defects.
c. Inspecting, cleaning, and lubricating while making repairs will be performed in accordance with procedures described in part three and additional instructions in this section. All adjustments will be completed in accordance with the detailed requirements and adjustments in section XVII
d. Instructions for repairs and replacements are arranged by assembly or unit.
147. Signal Indicator Panel
a. Disassembly. Remove the two screws that hold the signal indicator panel to the main console. Slip the signal indicator panel forward.
b. Repairs. In general, the only repairs that will be necessary on the signal indicator panel are the replacing of switches, keys, and lamps or soldering broken wires to the switches, keys, and lamps.
c. Reassembly. Mount the signal indicator panel to the main console by means of the two screws provided.
148. Monitor ( Upper) Typing Reperforator and Motor
For repair information on the monitor (upper) typing reperforator, see TM 11-2223.
149. Tape Winder
a. Disassembly.
(1) Remove the two nuts and bolts that fasten the unit to the shelf and place the unit on the bench.
(2) Remove the tape reel.
(3) Remove the top cover plate of the 1-to-l gear box by unscrewing the four screws which secure it to the case.
(4) Remove the bearing end cap plate by unscrewing the three retaining screws.
(5) Loosen the setscrew in the half of the coupling on the end of the clutch shaft. Hold the clutch shaft from turning by means of a screw driver placed in the slotted end of the shaft, and remove the coupling with a twisting motion if it does not readily slide off. Remove the com
plete clutch shaft assembly from the gear case, taking care not to lose the thrust washers.
(6) Disassemble the clutch shaft assembly by loosening the setscrew in the collar. The clutch assembly with the exception of the tension nut will then slide free of the shaft.
(7) Remove the tape-reel shaft by loosening-the setscrews in the gear hub and the collar; then slide the shaft out the reel end of the casing.
b. Repairs. Repairs for the tape winder will consist of replacing broken or worn parts.
c. Reassembly. Reassemble in the reverse order that the tape winder was disassembled.
150. Tape-Winder Motor Unit
a. Disassembly. Disassemble the tape-winder motor as described in paragraph 85c (1) through (5).
b. Repairs. Repairs for the tape-winder motor will consist of resurfacing the motor armature and replacing motor brushes, armature bearings, and other worn parts. Remove the motor brushes only when necessary. Clean the brushes and the inside of the brush holders with a cloth moistened with dry-cleaning solvent (SD). During this operation check the condition of the carbon brushes.
Note. Scratch an identifying mark on the upper surface of each carbon brush upon its removal in order to facilitate replacing the brush into its proper brush holder after cleaning. Replace brushes only when it is evident that they’ will not last until the next scheduled routine.
c. Reassembly. Reassemble the tape-winder motor in the reverse order that it was disassembled.
151. Receiving (Lower) Typing Reperforator and Motor
For repair information on the receiving (lower) typing reperforator, see TM 11-2223.
152. 54A Rectifier
a. Disassembly.
(1) Remove the rectifier cover by unscrewing the screws holding it to the rectifier chassis.
(2) Unsolder the connections to the transformer, inductor, and capacitors; take
116
note of their positions so that they may be resoldered to the correct terminals.
(3) Remove the four screws and the nipple screw that holds the rectifier cords to the chassis and remove the cords.
(4) Remove the transformer by unscrewing the four screws that hold it to the bottom of the rectifier chassis.
(5) Remove the selenium stack by unscrewing the two screws that hold the selenium stack bracket to the bottom of the chassis and by removing the nut which holds the other end of the selenium stack to the rear of the chassis.
(6) Remove the inductor by unscrewing the four screws that hold it to the bottom of the chassis.
{7) Remove the two capacitors by removing the four screws which hold the capacitors in place.
Z>. Repairs. Repairs on the rectifier will consist of soldering broken leads to the transformer, inductor, and capacitors or the replacement of parts.
c. Reassembly. Reassembly of the 54A rectifier is in the reverse order that it was disassembled.
153. Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
a Disconnect power and line cords from the console unit and place the multiple transmitter distributor on a bench or other suitable place.
&. Remove the card-holder bracket from the front of the unit by loosening the two knurled nuts.
c. Remove the motor cover and the distributor cover and side plates (do not remove the screws that secure the top plates of the individual transmitter distributors) by unscrewing the retaining screws.
d. Remove the motor unit from the base casting by disconnecting the three wires from the motor unit at the terminal block, and remove the governor adjusting bracket. Remove the four screws which mount the two motor plates to the base casting and remove the motor unit by lowering through the base casting. For further disassembly of the motor, see TM 11-2223.
e. Remove the individual transmitter units by removing the mounting screws that secure the unit to the base. Loosen the screws on the terminal strip and disconnect the individual transmitter
unit leads, taking note of their positions. Remove the two front screws and just loosen the rear screw. Slide the transmitter unit toward the front to clear the rear mounting screw.
f. Remove the cam felt oil-wick mounting bracket by unscrewing the mounting-bracket screw on the side of the unit.
g. Disconnect the tape-out operating-lever spring and the selector-lever bail spring. Remove the two screws that fasten the contact bracket to the bottom plate. Access to these screws is from the under side of the bottom plate. Swing the contact bracket and assembly free, taking care not to put stress on the connecting wires.
h. Remove the bottom plate by removing the top-plate screw that secures the post to which the filter assembly is fastened. Disconnect the feedpawl spring, release-bar spring, and the armature spring. Turn the unit bottom-side up and remove the screws which fasten the side frames to the bottom plate. Remove the screw that fastens the post to the bottom plate (do not remove the screw which fastens the post to which the filter is attached). Carefully ease top and bottom sections apart. All of tlie wiring will be located on the bottom section and most of the mechanical parts will be located on the top section.
i. The transmitting shaft of the individual transmitter units is located in the top section. To dismantle the transmitting shaft, remove the driving clutch screw and pull the transmitting shaft out by the gear end. Be careful that parts are not lost as the individual parts will fall off as the shaft passes through and releases them. It is a good practice to place the individual parts on a sheet of paper as the shaft is removed, to prevent loss of parts and excess loss of time in reassembling the shaft.
154. Repairing Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
a. Repairs for the multiple transmitter distributor consist mainly of replacing broken and worn parts.
1). For detailed information on the repair of the motor unit on the multiple transmitter distributor base, see TM 11-2223.
c. Through actual experience it has been found that the greatest amount of trouble will be found in those parts which are actuated when the transmitter start lever (MB) is depressed.
117
155. Reassembly of Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
Reassemble the multiple transmitter distributor and base in the reverse order that it was disassembled.
156. Cleaning and Adjusting 255A Type Relays
a. General. If a relay is found to be causing trouble or if preventive maintenance operations show that the relay should be cleaned or readjusted (par. 70), remove it from its operating position for repair. After inspecting and cleaning, readjust the relay according to paragraph 157 if Test Set I-193-A is not available. If Test Set I-193-A is available, follow the instructions in TM 11-2513.
1). Inspection of Relay Contacts. Inspect the relay contacts in a good light.
(1) If the contacts appear black or burned or have a sooty deposit, replace the relay with a spare (if a spare is available). As described in c below, clean and readjust the relay taken from the equipment and check the adjustment as described in paragraph 157.
(2) If on examinat ion the contacts do not appear black or burned, make a further check for contact build-ups by holding the armature lightly against one contact and checking to determine that the 0.003-inch blade of the No. 74D gage will pass easily between the armature and the other contact. Repeat for the other contact gap. If the 0.003-inch blade passes easily through the contact gap, check that the contact gap is not too wide by holding the armature lightly against one contact and checking to determine that the 0.005-inch blade of the No. 74D gage will not pass through the gap easily. Repeat for the other contact. If a gap wider than 0.005 inch is found, the relay requires cleaning and readjusting in accordance with c below.
c. Cleaning. When inspection indicates need for cleaning a 255A type relay, back off the contact screws sufficiently to permit a No. KS-2663 file to enter easily between the contact and armature. Insert an orange stick between the contact springs.
To avoid damage to the springs, avoid inserting the stick far enough to bend the springs. Insert a No. KS-2663 file parallel to the axis of the armature. The use of the orange stick and the file or burnisher is shown in figure 73. The file should be used in the same manner as the burnisher shown in figure 73.
(1) File the armature contact, being careful to move the file in and out parallel to the axis of the armature. The contacts of the armature are of moderately soft alloy. Therefore it is necessary to avoid excessive filing so that no more material will be removed from the contacts than is absolutely necessary. Move the file several strokes and then examine the contacts to determine if the pit has been removed, before again applying the file. After filing, burnish the contacts with burnisher No. 265C as shown in figure 73. Do not handle the burnisher with the fingers. Before using the burnisher blade, be sure to clean it with a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with solvent (SD). Move the blade of the burnisher in and out parallel to the axis of the armature.
«»TICK
CT SCREW
3LE CONTACT 3S
>HER BLADE
TL52597
Figure 73. Use of orange stick, file, or burnisher.
(2) Clean the pole-piece surfaces. With the fingers loosen the knurled tension nuts on
118
the pole screws of the 255A type relay. Insert the blade of a screw driver (No. KS-6854) in the pole-screw slot and turn the screw driver counterclockwise to back off each pole screw as far as it will go. Remove any foreign matter on each pole screw by pressing friction tape lightly against the pole screw. The friction tape may be applied conveniently if it is wrapped around the flattened end of an orange stick. Use the same piece of friction tape only once and do not rub the pole screws with the friction tape.
(3) Clean the relay cover. Invert the relay cover and tap the closed end to loosen dirt. Wipe the cover with a dry, lint-free cloth-
157. Readjustment of 255A Type Relays
Turn both contact screws with the No. 340 tool in the direction which moves the contact screws away from the armature; loosen the knurled tension nuts with the fingers and back off the pole screw on each side as far as each pole screw will go.
a. Remove the armature and check that the armature is straight.
b. The tips of the flexible contact springs should be approximately flat, should bear upon each other at the top and bottom edges, and should make at least a line contact for at least 25 percent of the distance across the %6-inch width. Gage by eye. If the tips of the flexible contact springs do not rest against each other properly, back off the contact screws with the No. 340 tool and adjust the tips of the springs as required, using the No. 363 spring adjuster.
c. Reset the contact screws to meet contact travel requirements. To adjust the contact travel, loosen the locknuts or clamping screws, if provided, and back off the pole-piece screws as far as possible. Use the 3-inch cabinet screw driver to loosen the clamping screws and the No. 340 tool on the locknuts and pole-piece screws. Back off each contact screw with the No. 340 tool so that the screw does not touch the armature. Advance one contact screw until it just touches the armature and then back it off one-half the specified total contact travel. One-twelfth of a turn of the contact screw (approximately one-third the distance between hole centers in the head of the contact screw) corresponds to approximately 0.002-
inch contact travel. Repeat this operation with the other contact screw. Check that with the armature in its normal mechanical position it does not make contact with either contact screw but stands approximately midway between the contact points. With the No. 74D gage, check that the total contact travel is within the specified limits. Then set the pole-piece screws.
d. Pole-piece screws will be sufficiently tight in the pole piece to insure their holding any adjusted position unless locknuts or clamping screws are provided, in which case the locknuts or clamping screws will be sufficiently tight to hold the pole-piece screws in any adjusted position. Gage by feel. Do not tighten clamping screws with excessive pressure of the screw driver after adjustment of pole-piece screws as this may destroy the adjustment.
158. Cleaning and Adjusting Relays RA, RB, RRl, RR2, RC, RN, RNN, RBK1, RBK2
a. General. It is essential that relay parts and contacts be kept clean, since failure of a circuit often may be traced to particles of dirt or lint between contacts or to dirty parts of a relay. Covers are provided to reduce, as far as possible, the entry and accumulation of foreign matter to the working parts of relays. It is important that relay covers be kept in place except when necessary to remove them for maintenance purposes. When covers are replaced on relays, replace them correctly so that they will fit snugly to prevent the entry of any foreign matter.
b. Testing Contacts. If there is evidence that a relay contact is not properly closed, this condition may be checked by bridging a current-flow test set, Test Set 1-181, across the springs of the contact through which current is flowing. Ab-sence of clicks or fluttering in the test receiver is evidence of a satisfactory contact. If the contact is unsatisfactory and on inspection it is found to be in mechanical adjustment, burnish the contact as described in c below. For detailed information on Test Set 1-181, see TM 11-2036.
c. Contact Burnishing. When necessary to clean the contacts, burnish them with a clean No. 266 blade of the No. 265C contact burnisher. Meticulous cleanliness of the burnishing tools and of the thickness gages is very important when cleaning and adjusting relays. Wipe off the blade of
119
the contact burnisher and the thickness gages with a clean, dry cloth before placing them against each contact and frequently wipe them with a clean cloth dampened with solvent (SD).
(1) In burnishing normally open contacts, place the blade of the burnisher between the contacts and operate the relay manually to give a slight pressure against the blade of the burnisher. At the same time move the blade back and forth. The desired result usually is obtained by rubbing the burnisher between the contacts two or three times. In the case of normally closed contacts, the tensions of the springs themselves usually will furnish sufficient pressure against the burnisher. On springs having heavy tension, lift one of the springs away when inserting the burnisher.
(2) To burnish contacts, back off the contact screws an equal amount and far enough to permit the flat blade of the No. 2G5C contact burnisher to enter easily between the armature and the contact. This will facilitate burnishing the contacts on the armature and contact screws at the proper angle. Insert a clean blade of the contact burnisher horizontally between the armature and the stationary contact. Hold the armature or flexible contact against the contact burnisher and proceed to burnish the contacts. While rubbing the burnisher back and forth take care to hold it parallel to the armature. Continue the operation until the contacts on both sides of the armature are clean as determined by visual inspection. Do not produce a convex surface on the stationary contact.
159. Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC—1A, Modifications
a. As explained in paragraph 16. the main difference between Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A is that the AN/TGC-1A contains an electrical circuit which will permit its operation at 600 opm if the proper mechanical changes are made. Without these mechanical
changes being made, the AN/TGC-1 A will operate at 368.1 opm. To have the AN/TGC-1 operate at 600 opm, both the electrical and mechanical changes must be made.
1). The electrical changes which must be made to the AN/TGC-1 are illustrated in figure 74. The modification is made electrically by the addition of one 2-mf (microfarad) capacitor across 1,500-ohm resistor R10 in battery supply 5 and one 2-mf capacitor across 1,500-ohm resistor RD in battery supply 8. The physical location of the capacitors is illustrated in figure 75.
CIO
—K— 2MF bAl
Rl° o °fl
I-----pvvw----------z.________
1,50011 X--------(O)
- 5
_L
C9 ---H--- 2MF
R9 r
।-----pvvX—"
1,500X1
~ 8
— LEGEND TL52976S-A
• TERMINAL OF 27-PIN PLUG P-l
/^TERMINAL 0F30-PIN
PLUG p-2
Figure 74- Circuit modifications required to change Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 to Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 A operating at 600 opm.
c. The mechanical changes which must be made in modifying either the AN/TGC-1 or the AN/ TGC-1A are illustrated in figures 76 through 79. The parts added or deleted in the teletypewriter set so that it will operate at 600 opm, and the approximate sequence of removal and addition of parts, are given in the following lists. For example, when the 6893 backstop bracket is removed there will be some play and therefore the 7002 washer is added; the 74059 screw is removed and is replaced by the 74896 screw; and so on.
120
(1) Typing reperforator.
Delete— Add—
Part No. Part Part No. Part
6893 Backstop bracket 7002 Washer.
74059 Screw 74986 98479 103341 Screw. Guard. Backstop bracket.
6841 Main-bail cam 101436 Main-bail cam.
6993 Spring 110878 Clutch spring.
72884 Disk 11686 Friction disk.
97297 Handle 3438 Washer.
2669 6'884 Lockwasher _ _ _' i Bracket. 3598 76099 78028 204372 3DB2.602 Nut. Washer. Screw. Selector-magnet support. 2-mf capacitor (2 required; see b above).
8508 Armature >. 204382 204384 204644 204645 Armature. Armature bracket. Selector spring mounting bracket. Selector spring extension arm.
71974 Pinion 110881 Pinion.
73106 Gear , 110882 Gear.
(2) Multiple transmitter distributor and base.
Delete— Add—
Part No. Part Part No. Part
2836 Spring 111342 Armature spring.
1026 Screw- _ _ ______
1164 Screw_ ■» _ _ _ _
2191 Lockwasher
99115 Bracket .. _ _ _
99116 Retainer
99117 Lubricator felt __
55090 Spring- 76379 Feed-pawl spring.
72563 Felt washer.
5740 Screw.
34-11 Nut.
2504 Insulator.
112048 Stiffener (short).
2503 Cover plate 112497 Cover plate.
2529 Bushing, bakelite _ 112498 Screw.
6811 Screw _ ___ ___ 112499 Bushing.
204370 Stiffener (long).
109359 Bushing.
110650 Pinion . _ ... 111264 Pinion.
110651 Gear 111265 Gear.
823667—49----9
121
f MfK W
/ ij c T k a>4 £
H g9 '|X. XH /KXv: c'°' ? Oh
^X. -*-EQUIPMENT DRAWER
^XU TL52977S-A
Figure 75. Physical location of capacitors added in modifying teletypewriter set circuit for 600 opm.
74986 SCREW--------------------------------.
2191 LOCKWASHER--------------------------, /
98479 GUARD---- - - - ------, //
7002 WASHER-----------------,X/ // r~ ,______________
nHltu Uta j
G972 BACKSTOP ASSEM -------J]||p
7002 WASHER--------------------------' ' 98479 GUARD
103341 BACKSTOP BRACKET--------
I ‘' 71 i .v-v ?
TL 52978S
Figure 76. Type-bar backstop parts.
122
------6811 SCREW
| 82493 WASHER
iCO?---------78028 SCREW
N ^^6706 MAGNET BRACKET
djZl 8500 SELECTOR MOUNTING PLATE
3438 WASHER £ ,1 j j |£ZZZZ_—78826 CLAMP PLATE
• 6810 SCREW (76099 WASHER
-------7-———. \ 5 21 91 LOCKWASHER
// ) X1
// VX Lc ^3598 NUT
77} y '204372 SELECTOR-MAGNET
77 r----------------------------SUPPORT
te
97296 SCREW
TL 52979S
Figure 77. Selector-magnet support parts.
BRACKET
204384 ARMATURE
204382 ARMATURE
BRACKET
204644 SELECTOR-SPRING MOUNTING
Selector-unit parts.
Figure 78.
204645 SELECTOR-SPRING EXTENSION ARM
TL 52980S
[ ] _________ f 204370 STIFFENER (LONG)
(112048 II (SHORTj
/X 3 ±0 ’ ---— 5740 SCREW
/ X x-----------------------34-11 NUT
□ _____________ f 112498 SCREW
II Pj : 112499 BUSHING
\ \-------------------112497 COVER PLATE
'-------------------2504 INSULATOR
r-1----J t
TL 5298IS
Figure 79. Contact parts (multiple transmitter distributor).
d. Diehl motors were used in tape-winder units of early models of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1 A. Barber-Colman motors are used in tape-winder units of later models of the teletypewriter sets. The Barber-Colman motors are type PYAZ 443 and are rated at 110 volts, 60 cycles, 20 r. p. m. counterclockwise. Barber-Colman motors can be used to replace the original Diehl motors. A specially designed bracket is furnished with each replacement motor. The position of the motor in the tape-winder unit is shown by the reference symbol FUE-51-2 in figure 81.
(1) Wiring change. The j umper from solder lug 10 to solder lug 12 on gang switch GS-2 (fig. 125) is eliminated in sets in which Barber-Colman motors are installed. The tape winder, therefore, is disconnected when the gang switch is positioned for d-c operation.
(2) Receptacle designation. The upper section of power receptacle DPR-1 (fig. 125) is stamped TAPE WINDER to indicate more clearly the proper section to be used with the tape winder.
160. Changes in Operating Procedure
When d-c power is used, position the tape chute of the upper reperforator to deflect the tape to the front and into the tape trough. Hand wind the tape as required.
123
Section XVII. REQUIREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
161. Introduction to Test Requirements and Adjustment Procedures
The data in this section include requirements and adjustment's for Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A). Reference is made to specific equipment manuals on individual components, when applicable, for detailed information on test requirements and adjustment procedures forthose components.
162. Requirements and Adjustments for Monitor (Upper) Typing Reperforator
For detailed information on test requirements and adjustment procedure, see TM 11-2223.
163. Requirements and Adjustments for Tape-winder Unit
a. Motor Mounting Bracket (fig. 81).
(1) Requirement. The motor mounting bracket should be in such position that the drive shaft is approximately in line with the clutch shaft.
(2) Adjustment. To adjust, position by means of the motor-bracket mounting screws.
l>. Tape-Reel Shaft (fig. 80).
(1) Requirement. Position the tape-reel shaft so that the end opposite that on which the tape reel fits will be flush with or will not extend from the gear-case box more than 0.030 inch. There should be some end play, not over 0.004 inch.
(2) Adjustment. To adjust, position the tape-reel shaft collars.
c. Tape-Reel Shaft Gear (fig. 81).
(1) Requirement. The center of the tapereel shaft gear should line up with the center of the clutch shaft.
(2) Adjustment. To adjust, loosen the setscrew in the gear hub and move the gear to the required position; retighten setscrew.
d. Clutch Spring Tension (fig. 81).
(1) Requirement. With the tape reel in place on the tape-reel shaft and the motor
running, hook a 32-ounce scale over one of the holding screws on the reel flange. It will require a pull of 16 to 20 ounces to hold the reel stationary.
(2) Adjustment. To adjust the clutch tension, hold the outer end of the clutch shaft steady by means of a screw dri ver inserted in the slot and loosen or tighten the clutch-shaft stop nut on the shaft inside the 1—to—1 gearbox.
164. Requirements and Adjustments for Receiving (Lower) Typing Reperforator
For detailed information on test requirements and adjustment procedure, see TM 11-2223.
165. Reguirements and Adjustments for Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
a. General. The information below is arranged in the sequence which would be followed if a complete readjustment of the multiple transmitter distributor were undertaken. In following such procedure, parts or assemblies which are removed to facilitate adjustment will not be replaced until all other adjustments which would be facilitated by the removal of these parts are made. If one adjustment is changed, related adjustments will be checked because a change in one adjustment may affect related adjustments. These facts will be kept in mind when a single adjustment is to be made.
l>. Index. When a complete test and adjustment is not involved, refer to the index to locate the desired information.
166. Details of Reguirements and Adjustment Procedures
The information in each paragraph is arranged under two headings—requirements and adjustments.
a. Requirements. Measurements, spring tensions, settings, etc., that have been found to give the best results are furnished under this heading. Some requirements have a very small working margin. Owing to slight differences in various multiple transmitter distributors of the same model, some multiple transmitter distributors
124
PAPER CORE FROM ROLL OF PERFORATOR TAPE
C2357 CORE
6 X '/32 X '/32" LOCKWASHER 6-40 X ’/2 F.H. I. MACH SCREW
C2359 NUT
C35O7 REEL FLANGE
8 X %4 X '/32 LOCKWASHER 8-32 HEX I.NUT
C353O
LAMP BRACKET
C35O5
BRACKET
C3506
SLEEVE ROLLER
C3362
MTG FLANGE
5
8-32 X IV8 F.H.I, MACH SCREW
10 X 3/64" X 3/64" LOCKWASHER 10-32 X'/2" F. H I MACH SCREW
2364
CABLE CLAMP
SC37
TAPE-REEL SHAFT LOCKING COLLARS
END PLAY, NOT OVER 0.004-
SOME
Fl -503 SLEEVE BEARING
SNUBBER
C3504 BRACKET
SNUBBER-
C3494
2364 CABLE CLAMP---------
IOX3/64" X 3/64" LOCKWASHER 10-32 X
l/2" F. H.l. MACH SCREW
TAPE REEL (ASSEM)
C3499
SHAFT HOUSING
GEAR HUB
C2358 HUB
C3507 REEL FLANGE
6 X '/32 X '/32 LOCKWASHER 6-40 X '/4" F.H. I. MACH SCREW
C35I5 GEAR
6-3 2 X % F.H. I. MACH SCREW 6 X '/32 X '/32 LOCKWASHER
C35I4 GEAR HUB
193296 LAMPHOLDER
----------------194120 LAMP
6-32 X '/4 F H. I- MACH SCREW — 6 X '/32 X !/32‘ LOCKWASHER
---------C3500 BEARING CAP C3495 TAPE REEL SHAFT (ASSEM)
--------GEAR CASE BOX --------Fl 503 SLEEVE BEARING
SHAFT SHALL NOT EXTEND MORE THAN 0,030"
6 X '/32 X */32" LOCKWASHER 6-40 X ’/2 F H. I. MACH SCREW
(ASSEM) j-T GEAR)J
C3497 DRIVEN GEAR ( (TAPE REEL SHAFT __ .,
-------2-5 0 TERMINAL STRIP
AH a H 20992 TOGGLE SWITCH
6 X '/32 x’/32" LOCKWASHER
6-32 X '/4 F, H. I. MACH SCREW
C3502 SWITCH COVER
X ^g4 LOCKWASHER
'4 -28 HEX IRON NUT ‘/4-28 X3/4"HEX HEAD CAP SCREW
TL 5755IS
Figure SO. Tape-winder unit, front view.
function better when clearances are adjusted to recommend minimum values, while other transmitter distributors function better with clearances adjusted to maximum values. The same is true for spring tension, air gaps, etc. Therefore, the requirements given for clearances, spring tensions, etc., will be applied as necessary to give the best operation for the particular multiple transmitter distributor being adjusted.
Adjustments. Each adjustment is described
in the text and for further clarity often is indicated in the illustrations. The adjustments vary in nature—replacing an old spring with a new one; bending a leaf spring with a spring bender; repositioning an eccentric screw; inserting shims between parts; etc. As a starting point when making adjustments, set the clearances etc., midway between minimum and maximum values until it can be determined if more critical adjustment is required.
125
126
C35I6 SLEEVE BEARING------------------
C 3498 DRIVING GEAR (ASSEM)—
^H2448 R SPIRAL GEAR------------------
72883 FUNCTION WASHER -------------- |„
, ,-----6-40X-5-' F.H.I. MACH SCREW
6-4OX4" F.H.I. MACH SCREW--------. /
\ / /------ GX—gX^g" LOCKWASHER
C35I2 CLUTCH SPRING -----------, \
\ I / /O-C3509 DRIVING SHAFT
42-TE -064 STOP NUT----------- \ \ J/ /
C35II EXTRUDED WASHER--------------------------03513 SHAFT COLLAR
C35I0 CLUTCH DISK---------------/
-----------------------------------------C3496 CLUTCH SHAFT (ASSEM) ---/ II V----------------------------------------------------------------CLUTCH-SHAFT STOP NUT
6 X 32 X 32 LOCKWASHER |
6 -32 X-L" F.H.I MACH SCREW -" CLUTCH-SHAFT GEAR
4 > -----—-----------------------------CLUTCH-SHAFT
C35O5 BRACKET---------------------~ ' COVER PLATE
193296 LAMP HOLDER—x --------’---------------------- 3°4’7 SLEEVE BEARING
\ |--------------------------- I COUPLING (/"AND -^")
Fl - 300 SLEEVE (OILITE) BEARING -------------------------- C3535 MOTOR MOUNTING BRACKET
\ N. --------------------------DRIVE SHAFT
\ X. /-------------FUE 51-2 TAPE-WINDER MOTOR
CLUTCH - SHAFT OUTER END^^^ X. /
C35OO BEARING CAP __ Z~ g 4 / MOTOR BRACKET MOUNTING SCREWS
. , . i 1 / \ / ___________(IOX^X^"LOCKWASHER)
6X55X 55" LOCKWASHER > C.X- V/ \
32 —£777 1 — / (10-32X^ F.H.I. MACH SCREW)
3,, --------------------z—‘•CTW iilllllliHIOeLp E-je I fa> I I _ / 2
6-32 Xg- F.H.I. MACH SCREWJ Z \
TAPE - REEL SHAFT GEAR---------------f---
THRUST WASHER(/x/x4 ")-----------------Li—L.-----Ed H Q X J/
I I ( \ (O M XL—---------------J ! -------------- IF-24FILTER
TAPE REEL SHAFT ----------------|--\———Z\-------/ HI Zll| ~Q ~1
2 -0 X /" R.HDRIVE SCREW-------------A \ -------J/l
X 11lU
C3506 SLEEVE ROLLER ____________X jM *= /■ I
8 X XLOCKWASHER^ /OTp——-------------------------------------------------------- 5381 BUSHING INSULATOR
8-32X1^-" F.H.I. MACH SCREW] / 7 31 TERMINAL LUG
\ / / /XZ / / / X --------------- 7057 PLUG CAP
C3362 MTG FLANGE-------------->—' / / /=*^ \ \ Z -
C353I NAMEPLATE -----' / / I \
AH AND H 20992 SPST TOGGLE SWITCH ------------------' / Till---------- \
6-32x/'F.H.I. MACH SCREW] / / III \ "SJ" TIREX.2COND POWER CORK
6 X32 X32 LOCKWASHERj C 3499 SHAFT HOUSING ——-' / / I \______________________
! / / ----------- 3101 B0X CONNECTOR
6-32X1/" F.H.I. MACH SCREW -—-----------------------------J / I__
/ --------------------------- 3661 SPACER BUSHING
2-50 TERMINAL STRIP —— ----------------------------1
Tl 57E52S
Figure 81. Tape-winder unit, righ t side view.
167. Preparation for Checking and Adjusting
a. GeneRzYl. Before proceeding to adjust any part, read the description of the adjustment carefully. After the adjustment is completed, be sure to tighten any screws or nuts which may have been loosened. If a part that is mounted on shims is to be dismantled, the number of shims used at each of its mounting screws will be noted so that the same shim pile-up may be replaced when the part is remounted.
&. Spring Tension. Spring tension values given in this manual were derived from measurements made with teletypewriter spring scales which are calibrated for use in a vertical pull position. When the scales are used in any other position, the reading is an indicated value. To get proper spring value readings, use spring scales included in the teletypewriter Tool Equipment TE-50 (fig. 28).
c. Fixed Pivots. Solid black circles on illustrations indicate fixed pivots.
168. Multiple Transmitter Distributor Units
The requirements and adjustments for the two message transmitters are the same as those for the number transmitter. The requirements and adjustments described in the following paragraphs are the same for each of the three transmitter units.
169. Transmitting-Cam Cylinder End Play (fig. 82)
a. Requirement. The transmitting-cam cylinder should have some end play, not over 0.002 inch.
b. Adjustment. Add or remove shims between the transmitting-cam cylinder and the side-frame
bearing as required. Further refine this adjustment by positioning the clutch driving member on the transmitting shaft.
170. Clutch Spring Compression (fig. 82)
a. Requirement. With the clutch teeth engaged, insert a 32-ounce scale through the hole in the side frame, hook the scale over the clutch driven member projection, and pull directly in line with the shaft. It should require 9 to 12 ounces to separate the clutch teeth.
b. Adjustment. Replace the clutch spring with a new spring.
171. Clutch (fig. 82)
a. Requirement. There should be a 0.005- to 0.015-inch clearance between the clutch teeth when the clutch is fully disengaged.
b. Adjustment. Position the clutch throw-out lever by adding or removing shims between the shoulder on the throw-out lever post and the side frame.
172. Stop-Magnet Bracket (fig. 82)
a. Requirement. With the magnet armature held against the magnet cores, there should be 0.004- to 0.012-inch clearance between the clutch throw-out lever and the high point of the cam on the clutch driven member.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the stop-magnet bracket mounting screws and position the bracket. Tighten the mounting screws.
173. Armature Spring Tension (fig. 82)
a. Requirement. With the clutch throw-out lever on the low part of the clutch driven member,
SELECTOR*LEVER COMB
CLUTCH SPRING
SIDE FRAME--------------
O 005* TO 0 015* -------
CLUTCH DRIVING MEMBER —
CLUTCH DRIVEN MEMBER----
SHIM S------------------
POST--------------------
CLUTCH THROW-OUT LEVER STOP-MAGNET BRACKET-----
ARMATURE SPRING---------
---------------SHIMS
-SIDE-FRAME BEARING-
SOME END PLAY, NOT OVER 0.002
[TRANSMITTING-| CAM CYLINDER
Figure 82. Transmitting-cam cylinder.
SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL CLAMPING SCREW
9 TO 12 OZS
STOP MAGNET
ARMATURE
TL 55583S
127
unhook the armature spring from the spring post and hook an 8-ounce scale in the spring eye. It should require 2 to Sy2 ounces to extend the spring to its operating position length.
Adjustment. Replace the armature spring with a new spring.
174. Transmitting Contact Gap (fig. 83)
a. Requirement. With any contact lever on the high part of its cam, the contact gap should be 0.020 to 0.025 inch, with the exception of the startstop contacts where the gap should be 0.015 to 0.025 inch.
176. Comb-Shaft Retainers (fig. 85)
a. Requirement. The comb shaft should be clamped by the retainers so that it rests at the bottom of the shaft slot.
Note. Before making this adjustment make certain that tlie side of the retainer in which the end of the slot is closest to the hole is at the right.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the retainer clamp screw on each end of the comb and position each retainer in such direction that the eccentric slot in the retainer takes up the clearance between the shaft and the bottom of the shaft slot. Tighten the clamp screws.
3/4 to 1-1/4 ozs------------
SHI MS----------------------
SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL---------
TRANSMITTING CAM------------
CONTACT LEVER---------------
SEE TEXT -------------------
TRANSMITTING CONTACT)___
SPRINGS
AT LEAST 5 OZS--------------
SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL SPRING
— SELECTOR-LEVER PIN SELECTOR-LEVER GUIDE
MOUNTING SCREWS
TOP PLATE
SHIMS
SELECTOR LEVER SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL EXTENSION ROLLER
O.OO2" TO O.OI2"
O.O5O" TO 0.090*
SELECTOR LEVER BAIL EXTENSION
TL55584S
Figure 83. Selector-lever mechanism.
b. Adjustment. Bend the shorter contact spring.
175. Transmitting-Contact Spring Pressure (fig. 84)
a. Requirement. With any contact lever on the low part of its cam, it should require a pressure of 4f4 t° S/a ounces to open the associated contact when the push end of an 8-ounce scale is applied to the longer contact spring just above the contact point.
b. Adjustment. Bend the longer contact spring. Recheck the contact gap adjustment.
177. Tape-Out Contact-Lever Latch (fig.
86A)
a. Requirement. With the tape-out operating lever resting on the low part of its cam, there should be from 0.010- to 0.020-inch clearance between the latching surface of the tape-out contactlever latch and the tape-out contact lever.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the tape-out contactlever latch mounting-screw nut and position the mounting screw in the elongated hole of the bracket. Tighten the nut.
_______M
4-1/2 TO 5-1/2 OZS TO]_ | ~ / \
OPEN CONTACTS J F / / V—-----------------SELECTOR CAM
CONTACT LEVER----------------------------------------------------,NDENT °F CAM
TL55585S
Figure 84. Transmitting contacts.
128
178. Tape-Out Contact-Lever Latch Spring Tension (fig. 86A)
a. Requirement. With the tape-out operating lever resting on the low part of its cam and an 8-ounce scale hooked over the contact-lever latch at the bottom of the notch, it should require 14 to 1 ounce to start the latch moving.
b. Adjustment. Replace the tape-out contact lever latch spring with a new spring.
179. Tape-Out Contact Gap (fig. 86A)
Note. Before making this adjustment on transmitter distributor units having a mechanism for momentarily opening the tape-out contact on the letters code combina
tion, disable the tape-out contact-lever latch lock-out screw (fig. 86A) by moving it upward.
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in its stop position (clutch teeth disengaged) and with the tape-out contact lever in its latched position, the contact gap should be 0.020 inch to 0.025 inch.
b. Adjustment. Bend the shorter contact spring.
180. Tape-Out Contact Spring Pressure (fig.
86B)
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in its stop position (clutch teeth dissen-
823667—49----10
129
FINS------------------------------------1 -----------------------FEED-WHEEL PINS
TAPE L|D__________________________.Z/lXl -5] r-----------------------0.010"TO 0.015"
ON AELLSTsPdES06 CLEARANCEj---------------------------------------SELECTOR-LEVER PIN
I Q A
COMB SHAFT----------------------__________________/.........TAPE-LID BEARING BRACKET
COMB-SHAFT RETAINER---------1—, \
S> \ /
CLAMP SCREW________________ZE HHIfHHHHHiHiH*/ F____________[TAPE-LID BRACKET
CLAMP SCREW ITHRFIrHRRRIrI^ / I [MOUNTING SCREWS
MINIMUM END PLAY----------1-^---------< /7k
FEED WHEEL------------------—------\ —---------------TOP PLATE
TAPE LID */ |W f ________________________________(BEARING-BRACKET
1 \ ' J 77 [MOUNTING SCREWS
TAPE-LID LATCH SPRING-------XZLj------UL—\ll UJ
TAPE-GUIDE SLOT------------------• • -------------------TAPE-LID PIVOT SCREW
RELEASE BAR-----------------—---—----__ —-----------—--------TAPE-OUT SENSING PIN
Cy — I)
----------------EZ-------------- B
TL 55586S
Figure 85. Top-plate mechanism.
TAPE-OUT SENS ING-LEVER SPRING--- --------------------------r—TAPE-OUT OPERATING LEVER
SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL----------
_______________________[TAPE-OUT CONTACT
TAPE-OUT SENSING LEVER---1 [ I |l-EVER
c_.. n I /•) I zZ ,/x .1 „ 10 T014 025
1/2 TO 1-1/2 OZS--i Z - =7/}/ UQj “
0.010" TO 0.020"----—-1 C3. (•Hl V ------------------2TO3OZS
1/4 TO I OZ-- i | X’w ZaUi Zd®'
TAPE-OUT CONTACT-1 =~ rTArMr „11T _„QAT1A1„
LEVER LATCH J y ---jj X-------—---------—-----------[lEVER^CAM0^^1 NG”
BRACKET----- * I I
LATCH SPRING—2;---I I / '
a - . / i .
TAPE-OUT CONTACT-LEVERj S . /
LATCH LOCKOUT SCREW J \ A / B
MOUNTING SCREW ft NUT------A ZTAPE_0UT OPERATING-LEVER SPRING
TL55587S
Figure 86. Tape-out mechanism.
gaged) and with the tape-out contact lever in its unlatched position, it should require a pressure of 2 to 3 ounces to open the contact when the push end of an 8-ounce scale is applied to the contact spring just above the contact point.
b. Adjustment. Bend the longer contact spring. Recheck the tape-out contact gap adjustment (par. 179).
181. Tape-Out Operating-Lever Spring Tension (fig. 86B)
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in its stop position (clutch teeth disengaged) and with the tape-out operating lever resting on the high part of its cam, hook the end of a 32-ounce scale over the top of the tape-out operating lever. It should require a pull of 10 to Id ounces to start the lever moving away from the cam.
b. Adjustment. Replace the tape-out operating-lever spring with' a new spring.
182. Release-Bar Contacts (fig. 87)
a. Contact Gap (Between Heavy Short and Long Contact Springs).
(1) Requirement. With the release bar fully depressed, there should be a gap of 0.020 to 0.025 inch between the contact on the heavy short contact spring and the contact of the long contact spring (fig. 87A).
(2) Adjustment. Bend the short heavy contact spring.
b. Spring Tension (Long Contact Spring).
(1) Requirement. With the release bar in the unoperated position (up), it should require a tension of 2% to 3^ ounces to open the contacts when an 8-ounce scale
is hooked over the long contact spring just above the contact point and pulled horizontally (fig. 87B).
(2) Adjustment. Bend the long contact spring. Recheck the contact gap adjustment (« above).
c. Contact Gap (Between Short Thin and Long Contact Spring) .
(1) Requirement. With the release bar unoperated, there should be a gap of 0.010 to 0.015 inch between the contact of the short thin contact spring and the contact of the long contact spring (fig. 87B).
(2) Adjustment. Bend the short thin contact spring stiffener.
d. Spring Tension (Short Thin Contact Spring) .
(1) Requirement. With an 8-ounce scale hooked over the short thin contact spring at the contact point, it should require 2% to 3y2 ounces just to start moving the spring away from the spring stiffener (fig. 87B).
(2) Adjustment. Bend the short thin contact spring.
183. Release-Bar Spring Tension (fig. 87B)
a. Requirement. Apply the push end of an 8-ounce scale to the top of the release bar and push vertically downward. It should require 1^ to 3 ounces to start the release bar moving.
b. Adjustment. Replace the release-bar spring with a new spring.
184. Selector-Lever Comb (fig. 83)
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in its stop position, there should be a
RELEASE BAR
1-1/2 TO 3 OZS
LONG CONTACT SPRING--------
0 XJ20" TO 0 .025 ---------
HEAVY SHORT CONTACT SPRING
2-1/2 TO 3-1/2 OZS
2-1/2 TO 3-1/2 OZS
Figure 87. Release-bar mechanism.
-O.OIO" TO 0 .015" SHORT THIN CONTACT SPRING --------SPRING STIFFENER
TL 55588S
B
130
clearance of 0.002 to 0.012 inch between the lower ends of the selector levers and the horizontal extensions of the contact levers.
b. Adjustment. Add or remove shims under the selector-lever comb on each of the side frames.
185. Top Plate (fig. 83)
a. Requirement. With the selector-lever pins just flush with the top surface of the tape-guide slot in the top plate, the lower ends of the live selector levers should overlap their contact levers by 0.050 to 0.090 inch.
b. Adjustment. Rotate the transmitting-cam cylinder until the selector-lever pins are flush with the top surface of the tape-guide slot, and shim the top plate at its four corners to obtain the proper overlap. Before tightening the mounting screws, position the top plate so that the selector-lever pins are alined approximately on the center line of the slotted hole in the top plate, and so that the clearance is not less than 0.006 inch between the pins (tape-out pin included) and the edges of the slotted hole.
186. Feed Wheel (figs. 85 and 88)
a. Feed Pins.
(1) Requirement. The feed pins on the tape feed wheel should extend 0.035 to 0.045 inch above the top surface of the channel in the top plate.
(2) Adjustment. Insert shims between the feed-wheel brackets and the bottom surface of the top plate.
b. Mounting Screws.
(1) Requirement. The mounting screws should engage the top plate with the maximum number of threads without protruding through the surface.
(2) Adjustment. Insert unused shims between the brackets and the clamp plates.
c. Feed Wheel.
(1) Requirement. Position the tape feed wheel so that when a piece of perforated tape (with perforations properly centered) is engaged by the feed wheel there will be an equal amount of clearance between the sides of the tape-guide slot in the top plate and the edges of the perforated tape.
(2) Adjustment. Adjust the feed wheel by the pilot screws. When adjusted, the tape feed wheel should have some end play, not more than 0.002 inch. Recheck the adjustment in a above.
Note. If necessary, the accessibility of the right pilot screw may be improved by removing the hexagonal post on which the transmitter filter is mounted, and rotating the post and filter to the right.
187. Selector-Lever Bail (fig. 83)
Note. Before making this adjustment on transmitter distributor units having a mechanism for momentarily opening the tape-out contact on the letters code combination, move the letters operating lever (fig. 90) toward the front of the transmitter by means of its mounting stud and the slotted hole in the bracket. This is done so that the vertical projection of the letters operating, lever will not interfere with the free movement of the selector levers.
a. Requirement. With the selector-cam sleeve in its stop position (clutch fully disengaged) and with the selector-lever bail extension roller resting on the low part of its cam, the highest selectorlever pin should not project above the top surface of the tape-guide slot in the top plate and should not be below the top surface by more than 0.010 inch.
b. Adjustment. Insert a screw driver through a hole in the side frame, loosen the selector-lever bail clamping screw (fig. 82), and position the selector-lever bail with relation to its extension. Tighten the clamping screw.
FEED-WHEEL PILOT SCREW
FEED-WHEEL DETENT-----
16 TO 20 OZS ---------
DETENT SPRING---------
DETENT ECCENTRIC------
FEED PAWL-------------
FEED-PAWL SPRING------
FEED-PAWL LEVER-------
Figure 88. Feed-wheel mechanism.
TOP PLATE
FEED-WHEEL RATCHET
CLAMP SCREW FEED ROLLER
FEED-PAWL ARM
--------24 TO 28 OZS FEED-PAWL ARM SPRING
1/2 TO 2 OZS
TL55589S
131
188. Selector-Lever Bail Spring Tension (fig.
83)
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in its stop position and with the selectorlever bail extension roller resting on the low part of its cam, place the push end of an 8-ounce scale against the selector-lever bail extension directly above the spring and push in line with the spring. It should require at least 5 ounces to start the selector-lever bail moving.
&. Adjustment. Replace the selector-lever bail spring with a new spring.
189. Selector-Lever Spring Tension (fig. 83)
a. Requirement. With the selector-lever pins in their uppermost position, apply the push end of an 8-ounce scale to the top of the selector-lever pin and push vertically downward. It should require % to 1^4 ounces to start the pin moving.
b. Adjustment. Replace the selector-lever spring with a new spring.
190. Tape-Out Sensing-Lever Spring Tension (fig. 86A)
a. Requirement. With the tape-out sensing pin in its uppermost position, apply the push end of an 8-ounce scale horizontally at the bend of the tape-out sensing lever just below the selector-lever bail. It should require % to 1% ounces to start the tape-out sensing lever moving.
b. Adjustment. Replace the tape-out sensinglever spring with a new spring.
191. Feed-Wheel Detent (fig. 88)
a. Requirement. A ith a piece of tape perforated with the letters code combination (checked for 10 holes to the inch) in the transmitter, and with the cam sleeve rotated until the selector-lever pins are in the uppermost position, the pins should be approximately midway between the hinged edge and the trailing edge of the holes in the chadless tape. For perforated tape the pins should be centered in the perforations.
b. Adjustment. Hold the feed pawl away from the ratchet and position the detent eccentric, keeping the high part of the eccentric toward the rear of the unit.
192. Selector-Lever Guide (fig. 83)
a. Requirement. When a piece of tape, perforated with the letters code combination and properly centered (having No. 1 and No. 5 code holes equidistant from the edges), is placed in the transmitter and the cam sleeve rotated until the selectorlever pins are in their uppermost position, the pins should be approximately in line with the center line through each hole in the perforated tape.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the mounting screws of the selector-lever guide and position the guide. Tighten the mounting screws.
193. Feed-Wheel Detent Spring Tension (fig.
88)
a. Requirement. With the detent resting between two teeth on the feed-wheel ratchet, hook a 32-ounce scale over the roller of the detent and pull parallel to the top plate. It should require 16 to 20 ounces to start the detent moving.
b. Adjustment. Replace the feed-wheel detent spring with a new spring.
194. Feed-Pawl Lever (fig. 88)
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in the stop position, there should be a clearance of 0.010 to 0.020 inch between the feed pawl and the face of the second tooth below the horizontal center of the feed-wheel ratchet.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the clamp screw and position the feed-pawl lever with respect to the feed-pawl arm. Tighten the clamp screw.
195. Feed-Pawl Arm Spring Tension (fig. 88)
a. Requirement. With transmitting-cam cylinder in the stop position and with the feed roller resting on the low part of its cam, unhook the feedpawl spring from the feed pawl. With a 32-ounce scale hooked over the feed-pawl arm in line with the spring hole and pulled at right angles to the feed-pawl arm, it should require 24 to 28 ounces to start the feed-pawl arm moving. Rehook the feed-pawl spring.
b. Adjustment. Replace the feed-pawl arm spring with a new spring.
196. Feed-Pawl Spring Tension (fig. 88)
a. Requirement. With the transmitting-cam cylinder in the stop position, hook an 8-ounce scale
132
over the lower part of the feed pawl, near the spring hole, and pull at right angles to the feed pawl. It should require y2 t° 2 ounces to start the feed pawl moving away from the ratchet wheel.
b. Adjustment. Replace the feed-pawl spring
with a new spring.
197. Tape-Lid Pivot Screws (fig. 85B)
a. Requirement. The tape lid should be located centrally with respect to the tape-lid bearing bracket and should be free to pivot, without binding, with a minimum amount of end play at the bearings.
b. Adjustment. Adjust the two tape-lid pivot screws to meet the above requirements. Tighten the two locknuts.
198. Tape-Lid Vertical Adjustment (fig.
85B)
a. Requirement. The tape lid should rest flatly along both edges of the tape-guide slot in the top plate.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the two tape-lid bearing bracket mounting screws and position the tape lid to meet the above requirement. Tighten the mounting screws.
Caution: In making this adjustment, make sure that the lowest section of the tape lid is within the tape-guide slot of the top plate.
199. Tape-Lid Horizontal Adjustment (fig.
85A)
a. Requirements. The horizontal adjustment of the tape lid should meet the following requirements :
(1) The feed-wheel pins should line up centrally between the fins of the feed-wheel pin slot in the tape lid.
(2) With the selector-lever pins in the upper position, there should be at least 0.006-inch clearance between the selector-lever pins (tape-out sensing pin included) and any part of the tape lid.
(3) The selector-lever pins should be inside their slots and 0.010 to 0.015 inch from the end of the tape fins.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the tape-lid bracket mounting screws (fig. 85B) and position the tape lid to meet all three requirements (a above). Tighten the mounting screws.
200. Tape-Lid Latch Spring (fig. 89)
a. Requirement. The tape-lid latch spring should be adjusted vertically so that the tape lid latches firmly.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the tape-lid latch spring mounting screws, position the spring up or down to meet the requirement, and tighten the mounting screws.
201. Tape-Lid Latch Spring Tension (fig. 89)
a. Requirement. With the tape lid latched, apply a 32-ounce scale at right angles to the uppermost bent section of the latch spring and push downward. It should require 12 to 16 ounces to just start deflecting the spring.
b. Adjustment. Gradually bend the spring approximately midway between its upper mounting hole and the top plate.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------12 TO 16 OZS TAPE LID-------------------------
TOP PLATE---------------------iTilV^1 ‘ ' <■
V------------------------------TAPE-LID LATCH SPRING
MOUNTING SCREWS-----------------’
POST----------------------------— [b---------------------------------BRACKET
BASE PLATE---------------------- --------------------------- TL5715IS
Figure 89. Tape-lid mechanism.
133
202. Letters Operating-Lever Horizontal Extension (fig. 86A)
a. Requirement. Move the tape-out contactlever latch lock-out screw upward so that the lockout screw is ineffective. Set up the letters code combination and rotate the cam sleeve manually until the letters operating lever (fig. 90) is resting on the low part of its cam. With the letters operating lever in this position, there should be 0.010- to 0.020-inch clearance between the latching surface of the tape-out contact-lever latch and the tape-out contact lever.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the horizontal extension clamping screw (fig. 90) and position the letters operating-lever horizontal extension with respect to the tape-out contact lever. Tighten the extension clamping screw.
Note. After completing the letters operating-lever horizontal extension adjustment, make the tape-out contact-lever latch ineffective by positioning the lock-out screw downward so as to provide a clearance of at least 0.010 inch between the end of the tape-out contact lever and the tape-out contact-lever latch.
203. Letters Operating-Lever Horizontal Extension Spring Tension (fig. 90)
a. Requirement. With the letters operating lever resting on the high part of its cam, hook a 32-ounce scale over the vertical arm of the letters operating lever as close as possible to the selector lever and pull at right angles to the letters operating lever. It should require 10 to 14 ounces to start the letters operating lever moving.
b. Adjustment. Replace with a new letters operating-lever horizontal extension spring.
204. Release-bar Latch
a. Requirement.
(1) With the release bar fully depressed there should be some clearance, not more than 0.010 inch, between the release-bar latch and the latching edge of the release bar.
(2) When the release bar is latched and the release-bar slot is fully engaging the release-bar latch there should be some clearance, not more than 0.010 inch, between the slot in the release bar and the top plate.
b. Adjustment.
(1) To meet the requirement in a(l) above, bend the release-bar latch.
(2) To meet the requirement in a(2) above, loosen the release-bar latch mounting screws and position the latch in its mounting holes.
205. Multiple Transmitter Distributor Base
The requirements and adjustments for the multiple distributor base are described in the following-paragraphs. These adjustments should be made with the motor unit removed from the base casting. To remove the motor unit, disconnect the three wires from the motor unit at the terminal block, and remove the governor-adjusting bracket. Remove the four screws which mount the two motor plates to the base casting, and remove the motor unit by lowering it through the base casting.
EXTENSION CLAMPING SCREW
O.OIO" TO 0.025
SELECTOR LEVER
LETTERS OPERATING LEVER
LETTERS OPERATING-LEVER EXTENSION
Figure 90. Letters operating-lever mechanism.
10 TO 14 OZS
STUD
STUD NUT
LETTERS OPERATING-LEVER BRACKET
TL 57I52S
134
206. Main-Shaft Bearings Alinement (fig.
91)
a. Requirement. The main shaft should turn freely in its bearings. Check throughout one complete revolution of the main shaft.
5. Adjustment. Loosen the mounting screws of the two main-shaft bearings. Aline the bearings so that the shaft turns freely. If necessary, add or remove shims between either bearing and its base on the base casting. Tighten the mounting screws of both bearings.
209. Governor Speed-Adjusting Wheel Friction-Washer Spring Tension (fig. 92)
a. Requirement. With the governor-adjusting bracket, the brush spring plate, and the governor cover removed, turn the adjusting wheel so that the tension on the governor contacts is 13 to 14 ounces. Measure this tension by hooking a 32-ounce scale over the contact-spring arm next to the contact and pulling parallel to the speed-adjusting spring. To measure the pressure of the speed-adjusting wheel friction washer, insert a bank pin in
GOVERNOR CONTACTS
CONTACT SPRING
SPEED-ADJUSTING SPRING
13 TO
FRICTION WASHER
BANK PIN
14 OZS
GOVERNOR SHELL
16 TO 24 OZS TO START THE ADJUSTING WHEEL MOVING
Figure 92. Governor speed-adjusting wheel friction-washer requirements.
ADJUSTING WHEEL
TL57I70S
207. Main-Shaft End Play (fig. 91)
a. Requirement. The main shaft should have some end play, not over 0.004 inch.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the two collar setscrews and position the collar on the main shaft. Tighten the setscrews.
208. Motor Pinion (fig. 91)
a. Requirement. The motor pinion should line up with the motor gear on the main shaft.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the four motor mounting screws and position the motor on its mounting brackets. Tighten the mounting screws.
the leather rim (radially), hook a 32-ounce scale over the pin at the periphery of the adjusting wheel, and pull at right angles to the radius. It should require 16 to 24 ounces to start the wheel moving.
b. Adjustment. Remove the friction washer and bend the large projections to obtain the desired tension.
210. Inner and Outer Disk Contact Springs (fig. 93)
a. Requirements. With the governor-adjusting bracket, the brush spring plate, and the gover-
135
.1/M1„T1A1Z. _____________(SOME END PLAY „
MOUNTING SCREW \ZF [NOT OVER 0.004
x R ! -tM-y-------------“-------SH1M s
SHIMS-------------------------- PF?EZS ? PrC---------------------------------- SETSCREW
MAIN SHAFT------------< - - ■ _XZ Z1-1 -------------COLLAR
I I ________________________________________!
TL57I53S
Figure 91. Main-shaft bearings alinement.
!/«•---------------------- D SOCKET WRENCH
iW
■■ H /
\ D / NUT
INNER DISK CONTACT SPRING.
if TOg J” J/. j-U T„
GOVERNOR COVER —--- U2LJV\
[J [ j X------OUTER DISK CONTACT SPRING
< ■Us TL5356ISA
Figure 93. Governor inner and outer disk contact spring requirements-
nor cover removed, the inner and outer disk contact springs should meet the following requirements:
(1) The distance from the inner surface of the governor cover to the highest point of the contact springs should be 25/32 to 27/32 inch.
(2) Place a D socket wrench over the nut, located in the center of the governor cover, which is used to hold the contact springs in place. With a suitable scale, measure the radial distance from the vertical surface of the wrench to the point where the scale touches the curved surface of the inner disk contact spring. The distance should be 17/32 to 19/32 inch.
(3) In a similar manner, measure the distance from the wrench to the point of contact on the outer disk contact spring. This distance should be 7/16 to % inch.
b. Adjustment. Bend the inner and outer disk contact springs to meet the three requirements in a above. Replace the brush spring plate and the governor cover.
211. Governor Brush Spring Plate Bracket (fig. 94A)
a. Requirements.
(1) A line established by the center of the outer disk and the center of one of the brushes should pass through some portion of the other brush (fig. 94A).
(2) The surface of the brush spring plate bracket on which the brush spring plate is mounted should be in line with the outer surface of that part of the governor cover on which the target is mounted (fig. 94B).
(3) The bracket should be parallel to the edge of the motor base plate.
b. Adjustment. Position the brush spring plate bracket by means of its enlarged mounting holes to meet the three requirements (a above).
212. Governor Brush Spring Pressure (fig.
94B)
a. Requirements.
(1) Inner disk brush spring. Hook an 8-ounce scale over the inner disk brush spring, just to the right of the carbon contact brush as viewed from the rear of the motor, and pull horizontally away from the motor. It should require 4% to 5% ounces to start the brush moving away from the disk.
(2) Outer disk brush spring. Apply an 8-ounce push scale against the outer brush spring, just to the right of the carbon contact brush as viewed from the rear of the motor, and push horizontally toward the motor. It should require 4f4 to 5% ounces to start the brush moving away from the disk.
b. Adjustments.
(1) Remove and bend the inner disk brush spring.
(2) Remove and bend the outer disk brush spring.
Note. When the springs are replaced and the spring pressure obtained, see that the contact brushes lie flat against their respective disks and that the outer edges of the brushes are either flush with or not more than 3/64 inch inside the outer edges of the disks.
213. Governor-Adjusting Bracket (fig. 94B)
a. Requirement. With the governor-adjusting bracket in place, clearance between the speed-ad
136
justing wheel and the speed-adjusting surface of the bracket should be 0.020 to 0.060 inch.
b. Adjustment. Bend the governor-adjusting bracket.
'Note. Remove the governor-adjusting bracket after completing the governor-adjusting bracket adjustment.
214. Speed-Adjusting Lever Stop Plate (fig.
94B)
a. Requirement. There should be 0.006- to 0.050-inch clearance between the adjusting-lever wearing strip and the governor when the adjusting lever is held against the stop plate.
b. Adjustment. Position the adjusting-lever stop plate by means of its elongated mounting holes.
215. Governor Shims (fig. 94B)
a. Requirement. With the governor speed-ad-justing lever in its unoperated position, there should be at least 0.006-inch clearance between the adjusting-lever wearing strip and the speed-adjusting wheel when the wheel is opposite the wearing strip, the wearing strip is tight against the casting, and all the end thrust of the motor armature
is taken up in a direction to make this clearance a minimum.
b. Adjustment. Adjust by means of shims placed on the armature shaft between the governor hub and the end-frame casting of the motor. (If the wearing strip is not absolutely tight against the casting, bend it until it is.)
216. Motor-Gear Clearance
a. Requirement. Remount the motor unit on the base casting, replace the governor-adjusting bracket, and reconnect the three motor wires. There should be a barely perceptible amount of backlash between the motor pinion and the motor gear. Check this backlash throughout one complete revolution of the motor gear.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the four mounting screws which clamp the two motor plates to the base casting, and add or remove shims between the motor plates and their bosses on the base casting. Tighten the mounting screws.
217. Gear Guard
a. Requirement. There should be some clearance, not more than %2 inch, at the closest point
TARGET
CONTACT BRUSHES
OUTER DISK
BRUSH SPRING
GOVERNOR-ADJUSTING BRACKET
SEE TEXT FOR ALIGNMENT OF BRUSHES
GOVERNOR COVER
STOP PLATE
MOTOR
SHIMS
GOVERNOR SHELL
BRUSH SPRING PLATE BRACKET MOUNTING SCREW BASE PLATE
3 B
WEARING STRIP
GOVERNOR COVER
CARBON CONTACT
BRUSH )
INNER DISK
BRUSH SPRING
•BRUSH SPRING PLATE—/
-J A I
MOUNTING SCREWS CT
Figure 94- Governor-adjusting bracket and brush spring requirements.
0.020" TO 0.060"
GOVERNOR-ADJUSTING BRACKET
AT LEAST 0.006"
SPEED-ADJUSTING LEVER
OUTER DISK
BRUSH SPRING
PLATE BRACKET
CARBON CONTACT BRUSH
4| TO 5^ OZS TO START BRUSH MOVING AWAY
TL57I75S
137
between the gear guard and the motor gear throughout one complete revolution of the motor gear.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the gear guard mount-C5 C5
ing screws and position the gear guard. Tighten the mounting screws.
218. Distributor-Unit Position
a. Requirement. Each unit should be positioned on the base so as to provide a minimum amount of backlash, without binding, between the driven gear on the unit and the driving gear on the main shaft. Check this backlash throughout one complete revolution of the gear.
b. Adjustment. Loosen the three mounting screws and position the unit. Tighten the mounting screws.
Note. When the right-hand unit is mounted and adjusted, there should be at least %-inch clearance between the soldered connection on one of its connection lugs and the gear guard. Bind the connection lug away from the gear guard, if necessary, but do not short across the adjacent connection.
219. Requirements and Adjustments for 255A Type Relays
a. Preparation.
(1) Relay and cover. Remove the relay cover and blow out any accumulated dust. Wipe the relay and cover with a clean, soft cloth.
(2) Contacts.
(a) Back out contact screws to permit entrance of contact file. Remove pits and build-ups on the contacts with contact file.
(b) When cleaning the armature contacts, support the armature at its midposition by means of the opposite contact screw to avoid bending the armature or contact springs.
Caution: Use light pressure when filing the armature contacts.
(c) After using contact file, remove any loose particles and polish the contacts with a burnisher.
(3) Armature, pole-piece screws, and relay terminals.
(«) Remove any particles adhering to the armature or pole-piece screws by pressing a fresh piece of friction tape,
wrapped around a piece of thin stiff nonmagnetic metal, against the particles. Do not rub the tape against the armature or pole-piece screws as this rubbing will leave a residue which will collect further particles.
(Z>) Make sure that the pole-piece screws and relay terminals are clean.
b. Requirements.
(1) Armature.
(a) The armature should not touch the inside of the spool.
(&) The contacts should aline so that the centers of the contacts will not be out of alinement by more than 25 percent of the contact diameter.
(2) Armature contact springs alinement. The armature contact springs should be parallel to the armature. The tips of the armature contact springs should rest against each other, approximately flat across their width, with a pressure of 1 to 2U> ounces measured on one spring at the contact with the other spring held so that it cannot follow its mate. If necessary, back off the contact screws.
(3) Contact screw. In its normal nonoperated position, the clearance between the armature and either contact screw should be approximately equal and when the armature is held against one contact screw there should be 0.003-inch to 0.005-inch clearance between the armature and the other contact screw.
(I) Pole-piece screws.
(«) When the armature is held first against one contact screw and then against the other, the armature stop pins should not touch the pole-piece screws.
(&) The armature should be centered in the magnetic field between the pole-piece screws; that is, the armature either should float in the gap between the contact screws or it should stay against either contact with approximately the same pressure when moved against either contact by hand.
c. Adjustments.
(1) Armature.
(a) Loosen the screws holding the spool heads to the relay frame, and position the spool to meet the requirement given
138
in & (1) (a) above. Tighten the screws.
(&) Loosen the armature clamping screws and position the armature both vertically and horizontally to meet the requirement given in & (1) (&) above. Tighten the screws.
Note. To aid in aligning the armature contacts, the contact screw brackets may be positioned by means of the enlarged mounting holes in the relay frame.
(2) Armature contact springs alinement. Bend the armature contact spring toward or away from the other armature contact spring as required to meet the requirements in & (2) above and as close as practicable to the point where the contact spring is riveted to the armature. Reset the contact screws.
(3) Contact screw. Back off the pole-piece screws as far as possible and position the contact screw to meet the requirement given in & (3) above.
Note. The contact screws should be sufficiently tight in their brackets to hold any adjusted position. If necessary, remove the contact screw from the bracket and force the two portions of the split end of the bracket closer together to meet this requirement.
(4) Pole-piece screws.
(a) Back off both pole-piece screws and check the contact screw adjustment. Readjust if necessary.
(&) Advance the right pole-piece screw until, with its locknut (or knurled tension knob) tight, the right pole-piece screw pushes the armature far enough to just touch the left-hand contact screw. Back off the right pole-piece screw approximately one-fourth turn from this position until the requirement given in b (4) (a) above is met. Tighten the locknut.
(c) Advance the left pole-piece screw until the requirement given in b (4) (&)
above is met. Tighten the locknut. If tightening the locknut disturbs the adjustment, reposition the left pole-piece screw to meet the requirement and retighten the locknut.
Note. When adjusting the pole-piece screws on relays with knurled tension nuts, the nuts should be tightened sufficiently to hold the pole-piece screws in the adjusted position.
220. Test Requirements and Adjustments for Control Relays (fig. 95)
a. To measure contact adjustments, insert gage in armature gap and operate the relay with at least twice the specified operating current. Use Test Set 1-181 to measure the current flow. Relay requirements, in chart form, are shown in figure 95. Make contacts should just close with specified gage and not close when a gage 0.001 inch thicker is used. Break contacts should just break with specified gage and not break when a gage 0.001 inch thicker is used. If contacts check not more than 0.001 inch above or below specified values, they need not be readjusted. If operate and nonoperate currents check within 10 percent of specified values, relay spring tensions need not be readjusted.
b. All control relays may be tested without removing them from the equipment drawer and relays RN, RC, RRl, RR2, RNN, and RA may be tested with the switches and other relays in any position. Relays RB, RBK1, and RBK2 may be tested for the requirements in figure 95, as follows:
(1) Relay RB—open contacts 1-2 and 3-4 of relay RNN (paper between the contacts may be used).
(2) Relay RBK1—place the DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB) in the SINGLE position.
(3) Relay RBK2—place the DUPLEX SINGLE switch (SB) in the SINGLE position and the POLAR MAKEBREAK switches (S3 and S4) in the MAKE-BREAK position.
139
. , M3IA „nc,<, "1 M3IA *3IA V 00£'l
OOM 2ON Z^n z^T^W90M Z0N
UOO£‘l ( V OOO’Z ( V0G2‘2 U°V!
\ **7rOOM ION X*~*-1- -^ 90M TON V*" r —90M ION Kj^Z_t~^90M I'ON
---OVI------------------------OF I--------------—OVI---------------------------------O-------------------------------O ---O£i------------------------O£l-------------------------0£l------------------------O-------------------------------O ---0 21-------------—0 21----------------------- 0 21--------------- O---------------------------------------O —o 11---------------. —o 11---------------------—o 1।-----------------------—o---------------------------------------o
---o 01----------------------—OOI--------------- —O 01---------------—o---------------------------------------o n—o 6---------------—0 6-------------------—0 6--------------—o---------------------------------------o
T V 91 „
II—o g-------------- ,—o 9---------------------------------O 9--------------rr—082 — O
2 ONiaas onv sanivwav t__ 6 91 ___ J_________Q z 9__________01 ___o L______________Il________OZg p______________________-___ O
N33M138 AV3d 338lld39a3a V ° f 6
MO33V 01 lN3W!SnrOV d01SX9V8 *'£ r—0 9--------------- I—0 9-------------- 0 9 ————— — 092 90 T-j
ONIONIM 30 3VNIW831 30ISNI»'2 *—O g----------------—Q g-------------------------O 9--------------r—092------------------------------------- SO—
*3109 N0I193S ______________ __________________________----------------------------------------------------------------------„O-----
-0M1 V 30 0N3 3aniVWdV 3H1 I 9 f 9 t £1
ONV 3109 3dAl-9iaiN39N09 V 30 ---O£----------------——O £---------------------------------O £-------------- O£2 “ £O 1
ONIONIM 30ISNI 3H1 SI ONIONIM TON 3 __q,__________________________q?__________________________q2-------------------------033-----------------------------3 0—r-
:S310N f 9 | / 01 8 !__ 9 V g |__ VI 81_____________81_______£ I _____J
® 1 ~ vw O 1 * VW 1 01 VW 1 VW VW *
dOlS do VW dOlS ________ dO VW dOlS -------- dO VW dOlS -------- dO VW dO VW -------- dOlS
- X9V8 S3IW NON d0 -X0V8 S3IW NON d0 -M9V8 S3IW NON dO -X9VS S3IW non dO NON dO S3IW -M9V8
dV9 1 dVO I dVO I X./' dVO 3 3 dVO X. X
wav on oom 'wav on oom L*X *wav on oom 'wav on oom on oom wav
goop dvo ovnoissa giooo dvo ovnoissa giooo dvo 3vnois3a £ooo dvo ovnoissa 3arnvwav 9NI0V3 S3VNIWd31 9NI9V3 ____2£IZI ON AV33a 62961 ’ON AV33H 920202 ON AV33H IVZ2O2 ON AV338
m3ia iNOaa m3ia avia oa noiivnoisso 2xaa noiivnoisso ixaa noiivnoisso 2aa noiivnoisso
19 AV 3d 30IS ■■ ■ | ,11111 T X X /'’’“J O
HS30 831133—_--J ZU \ /■ ZX /■—n- 2V980I2I M3IA M3IA M3IA M3IA *U*OO£‘l
J Z W ) 1(0 ( 0[|ng3nr; o r; avsa avsa avsa avsaL9aM Z-ON
7tX! n f—' \ __a q nunnnn (I uogg ( uooo'z ( . -uogg ttovi
TTI .b F=- J---111 U'ju'J OOM I ON V*" 1- -^OOM I ON X*** k OHM I OM X. VZj~ 90M ION
Iltp-'-Z I £91611--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 1 । 1 1 —[--------
soNiaas —On----------------- ~ ' Ovl °
M3aos ovnoissa-^ ,— gamvwav —°£l----------------- °£l 021
3aoo X-, / r—av9 ovnoissa —O zi---------------—O2i------------------------—O zi-----------------------—O---------------------------------------O
oa ganivwav---x H Z 1 „
♦ t t —On-----------------—on-------------------------—Ou-------------------------—O---------------------------------------O
xvw„t>ooo ; - l-=pvn ----------1---1------
I I H T —ooi----------------—ooi-----------------------—ooi------------------------—o----------------------------------------o
I E av9 samvwav ___n________________ __o___________________________o.________________—O---------------------------------------O
303ld 333H—XtL 6 6
I ---O 0------------------------O 8-------------------------O 8---------------—O---------------------------------------o
ONIMdS I‘ON--\ I O £ O Z O Z G q. q O i
\ I L-------------dois movq aamvwav ~_______________________ qn___________L
IH IrXTTir --------------r^9~--------------------~°9----------------------------__________________________________________9cJ~
W [I-°5~T- 9-£l • 05________ “05_______________________________f~FSZ 9__________________sj____________9 *
r I T 017 6 1 ° P oi 1 ° v oi vi ~l 0(73 oi oi J t
1 —-o £----------------1—Og------------------------1—O £-----------------------1—O£2------------------------------------£O—
I -I o 7---------------T—O Z-----------------------1—o Z-----------------------I 022------------------------------------2 0 T
r I I £1 go I * II L I II 2 1 I II 91 91________11 ___*
” I O 1 ~ vw ° 1 vw" ° 1 Z vw 013 vw” VW * 1
I * dOlS * dO VW dOlS do VW dOlS ___-___ do VW dOlS ------ dO VW dO VW --------- dOlS
I I ;•—,1 -M9V9 NON dO -X9V8 NON dO -M0V8 cn|W NON dO -M9V8 S3iw N0N d0 N0N d0 S3IW -X0V8
“ vjJJl V \ / , "L/ dV9 , avO 3 3 dVO
Mr XX, -rtav ON OOM Xx, -wav on oom z\ wav on oom wav on oom on oom wav
I 11 03xi3 avo ovnoissa giooo dvo ovnoissa osxid avo ovnoissa £000 avo ovnoisfa
1 13 g28H ON AV338 ______V82IO2 ON AV33a ________11681 ON AV33a 081202 ON AV338
laa noiivnoisso nnb noiivnoisso Na noiivnois30 aa ao va NOiivNOisgg
Figure 95. Relay requirements,
140
APPENDIX I
REFERENCES, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GLOSSARY
Note. For availability of items listed, check FM 21-6 and DA Supply Catalog SIG 1. Also see FM 21-6 for applicable technical bulletins, supply bulletins, modification work orders, and changes.
1. Parts List
SIG 3, list of Items for Troop Issue.
SIG 4-1, Allowances of Expendable Supplies.
SIG 4-2, Allowances of Expendable Supplies for Schools, Training Centers and Boards.
SIG 5, Stock List of AU Items.
SIG 7, Organizational Spare Parts.
SIG 7 and 8, Organizational and Higher Echelon Spare Parts.
SIG 8, Higher Echelon Spart Parts.
SIG 10, Fixed Plant Maintenance List.
SB 11-10, Signal Corps Kit and Materials for Moisture-resistant Treatment.
2. Technical Manuals on Auxiliary Equipment and Test Equipment
TM 11-352, Printer TG-7-A and Teletypewriters TG-7-B and TG-37-B.
TM 11-355, Telegraph Terminal CF-2A (Carrier).
TM 11-355B, Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-B (Carrier).
TM 11-356, Radio Teletype Terminal Equipment AN/FGC-1 or AN/FGC-1X.
TM 11-358, Telegraph Central Office Set TC-3.
TM 11-486, Electrical Communication Systems Engineering.
TM 11-2036, Test Set 1-181.
TM 11-2201, Reperforator Teletypewriter Sets TC-16 and TC-17.
TM 11-2208, Test Set TS-2/TG.
TM 11-2209, Teletypewriter Set 131B2.
TM 11-2217, Distortion Test Set TS-383/GG (Teletype Signal Testing Equipment).
TM 11-2223, Typing and Nontyping Reperforators, Teletype Model 14.
TM 11-2513, Test Set I-193-A.
TM 11-2626, Test Unit 1-176.
3. Packaging and Packing Instructions
a. Joint Army-Navy Packaging Specifications
JAN-D-169, Desiccants, Activated.
JAN-P-75, Tubes, Radio and Electron.
JAN-P-100, General Specification.
JAN-P-106, Boxes, Wood, Nailed.
JAN-P-116, Preservation, Methods of.
JAN-P-125, Barrier-material, Waterproof.
JAN-P-131, Barrier-material, Moistureproof-vaporproof, Flexible.
b. U. S. Army Specification
100-2E (and Signal Corps Supplement thereto), Marking Shipments by Contractors.
c. Signal Corps Instructions
720-7, Standard Pack.
726-15, Interior Marking.
4. Decontamination
TM 3-220 Decontamination.
5. Demolition
FM 5-25, Explosives and Demolitions.
6. Camouflage
FM 5-20, Camouflage, Basic Principles.
7. Other Technical Publications
TB SIG 13, Moistureproofing and Fungiproofing Signal Corps Equipment.
TB SIG 25, Preventive Maintenance of P o w e r Cords.
TM 1-455, Electrical Fundamentals.
TM 11-462, Signal Corps Reference Data.
TM 11-680, Teletypewriter Circuits and Equipment (Fundamentals).
141
8. Forms Abbreviations (or code designation) Term or quantity
WD AGO Form 468 (Unsatisfactory Equipment Report)'. AF Form 54 (Unsatisfactory Report). PJ1 and 2 .. typing reperforator jacks. RA control relay in A trans- mitter circuit. RB control relay in B trans-
9. Abbreviations mitter circuit.
Abbreviations (or code designation') Term or quantity ac alternating current (n). a-c alternating-current (a), af audio frequency, arm armature. BK break, cap capacitor, cct, ckt circuit, de direct current (n). d-c direct-current (a). DPDT double-pole, double-throw switch. DPST double-pole, single-throw switch, dwg drawing. F fuse. FB fuse block. FO-1 tape feed-out key No. 1. FO-2 tape feed-out key No. 2. fig figure, ga gage. L live side of battery, ltrs letters. LTS line terminal strip, ma milliampere. MB message transmitter start lever. MC message transmitter tape-out contacts. mf microfarad, mils millimeters. MON monitor. MJ-1 to 4 monitor jacks. NB number transmitter start lever. NC number transmitter auto- matic contacts. No., Nos number, numbers, opm — operations per minute, oz, ozs ounce, ounces. OPR, NON-OPR__ operate-non-operate switch par paragraph. RBK-1 break relay. RBK-2—«. break relay. RC call-in relay, rec receive. REC-1 receiving relay. REC-2 receiving relay, rect rectifier, ref reference, rels release, reperf reperforator, res resistor, ret return. RN control relay for number transmitter and relay RNN. RNN control relay in A and B transmitter circuits. RR1__- feed-out control relay. RR2 feed-out control relay. Sig C Signal Corps. SA NORMAL SPLIT switch. SB DUPLEX SINGLE switch. SI OPR. NON-OPR. switch, ckt No. 1. S2 OPR. NON-OPR. switch, ckt No. 2. S3 POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch, ckt No. 1. S4 POLAR MAKE-BREAK switch, ckt No. 2. SPST single-pole, single-throw switch, sw switch, spec specification. TD transmitter distributor, term terminal. TR typing reperforator, v volt, v-f voice-frequency (a), wdg winding, wh white, xmtg, xtg transmitting, xmtr, xtr transmitter.
142
10. Glossary
The following glossary contains an explanation of the technical terms used in this manual.
Battery. The term battery normally is used when referring to a group of dry cells or storage cells. In teletypewriter communication it is common usage to refer to any d-c source used in the production of teletypewriter signals as battery.
Bias. The effect on the length of telegraph signals produced by the electrical characteristics of the line and equipment. If the received signal is longer than the signal sent, the distortion is called marking bias; if the received signal is shorter than the signal sent, the distortion is called spacing bias.
Capacitor. A device for inserting the property of capacitance into a circuit; two or more conductors separated by a dielectric.
Cross-fire. The condition in which telegraph signals on one circuit cause interference in other telegraph or telephone circuits.
Fuse. A wire, bar, or strip of fusible metal inserted as a safety device in an electric circuit. When the current increases beyond the rated strength of the fuse, the metal melts and thus the circuit is broken.
Fusetron. A fuse equipped with an overload feature. A fusetron will take a starting load up to 50 percent in excess of the rated value for a short period before blowing. The fusetron has a base connection similar to that of a fuse.
Governor. An automatic attachment to a motor, or the like, for controlling the speed of rotation.
Ground. The contact of a conductor with the earth; also the earth when used as a return conductor.
Jack. A receptacle which, in combination with a plug, provides a device by means of which connections readily can be made in electrical circuits.
Key. A hand-operated device for the rapid opening and closing of a circuit or circuits.
Make-and-break {neutral) operation. The term make-and-break (neutral) operation refers to the system whereby marking signals are formed by current impulses of one polarity, either positive or
negative, and spacing signals are formed by reducing the current to zero or nearly zero.
Mark impulse. In make-and-break (neutral operation, the term mark impulse refers to the closed circuit signal, and the term space impulse refers to the open circuit signal. In other than make-and-break (neutral) operation, the term mark impulse is applied to the circuit condition which produces the same result in the terminal equipment that a mark impulse produces in make-and-break (neutral) operation. Similarly, in other than make-and-break (neutral) operation, the term space impulse is applied to the circuit condition which produces the same result in the terminal equipment that a space impulse produces in make-and-break (neutral) operation.
Normal duplex operation. The term normal duplex operation refers to simultaneous transmission and reception over two external circuits.
Normal single operation. The term normal single operation refers to transmission or reception over one external circuit but not simultaneously.
Operations per minute. The term operations per minute (o. p. m.) refers to the number of perforations punched and characters printed per minute. The equipment goes through one complete cycle of operation for each code perforation and character printed.
Plug. In combination with a jack, a device by which connections can be made readily in electrical circuits.
Polar operation. The term polar operation refers to the system whereby marking signals are formed by current impulses of one polarity and spacing impulses by current impulses of equal magnitude but opposite polarity.
Rectifier. A device for changing alternating current to pulsating direct current.
Bpace impulse. (See mark impulse.)
Split duplex operation. The term split duplex operation refers to simultaneous transmission and reception over four external circuits.
Split single operation. The term split single operation refers to transmission or reception over two external circuits but not simultaneously.
143
APPENDIX II
PARTS IDENTIFICATION LISTS AND TABLES OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
1. Requisitioning Parts
The listing of an item in this technical manual is not sufficient basis for requisitioning the item. Requisitions must cite an authorized basis, such as T/O & E; TE; TA; T/BA; SIG 6; SIG 7 & 8; SIG 7, 8 & 10; SIG 10; list of allowances of expendable material, or other authorized supply basis. For an index of available catalog pamphlets, in the Signal portion of the Department of the Army Supply Catalog, see the latest issue of SIG 1.
2. Alphabetical Index to Parts Identification Illustrations for Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
The following is an alphabetical index to the parts identification illustrations for the multiple transmitter distributor and base, component of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1 A) :
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Adjusting lever 7661 114
Adjusting wheel. 6324 115
Armature 6710 114
Armature: electromagnet 93463 98
Bail extensions _ 97515 99
Ball bearing. 5061 114
Bar 97584 108
Base: green wrinkle . _ 110654 107, 108
Base plate 97500 98, 103
Bearing _ . 97568 107
Bearing (assem) 6330 115
Block 6319 115
Bolt: %e-24 x 4 4871 108
Bracket 80337 115
Bracket 97541 98
Bracket 97543 98
Bracket _ . _.. . 94546 98
Bracket. . _ 97548 104
Bracket 97554 105
Bracket. 97569 108
Bracket 99115 98
Bracket 99355 110
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Bracket 99356 110
Bracket 110778 105
Bracket 110781 105
Bracket 110834 109
Bracket 110956 113
Bracket: right 97556 105
Brush cap 77911 110
Brush holder cap 70873 114
Brush holder ring 71998 114
Brush holder: (with insulator)— 70872 114
Brush spring plate 80340 115
Brush (with spring): electrical contact; carbon 8094 114
Bushing 76532 105
Bushing 83954 104
Bushing 90539 104
Bushing 97516 99
Bushing: bakelite 2529 103
Bushing: bakelite 78398 115
Bushing: bakelite 78438 115
Bushing: bakelite 95935 110
Bushing: rubber— . .. 126-123 114
Bushing; spacer 92685 98
Cable 110767 111 ,
Cable (assem) 110768 112
Cable bracket 99205 107
Cable clamp 8253 108
Cable clamp 80708 99
Cable clamp .. 99373 107
Cable distributor 110792 98
Cable: governor circuit 110979 115
Cable: motor unit 110978 115
Cam sleeve (assem) 101766 102
Capacitor: 1 mf 78011 108
Capacitor: 0.1-0.1-0.01 mf. 94679 108
Capacitor: 0.1 mf 95938 110
Capacitor: 0.01 mf 95937 110
Card holder 110955 113
Card-holder bracket (assem) 110957 113
Center contact governor. 80352 115
(assem). Clamp 6318 115
Clamp plate 41732 104, 115
Clamp plate 97559 105
Clamping plate 80335 115
Clamping rod 73595 114
144
Name ofpart Part No. Fig. No. Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Clip 99357 110 Governor shell 78439 115
Clutch lever _ 97529 98 Guide 97561 105
Clutch lever post stud 86209 106 Guide bushing 97583 98
Code plate: (blank) _ . 106380 107 Guide: punch 99283 105
Collar 83740 107 Hub _ 97579 107
Comb 97512 99 Inner disk brush spring:
Contact (assem) 97547 104 (with brush) 78400 115
Contact bracket 97530 103 Inner disk contact spring 78497 . 115
Contact brush 78403 115 Insulation: (for one 73239
Contact lever 7318 103 field coil) 73242 114
Contact lever 97537 103 Insulator 3094 108
Contact point 72835 115 Insulator 41733 104, 115
Contact screw 6320 115 Insulator 70724 108
Contact spring 41720 104 Insulator 78437 115
Contact spring 84666 104 Insulator. 80336 115
Contact spring 84705 104 Insulator bushing: bakelite 86868 115
Contact spring (assem) 6314 115 Insulator: plate 2504 103
Contact spring: long 97533 103 Latch 102937 105
Contact spring: short 97534 103 Latch: lever 97545 98
Contact stop: long 97535 103 Letters operating lever
Contact stop: short 97536 103 (assem) 97544 106
Contact terminal 80334 115 Lever 110842 106
Container 99354 110 Locking wedge 73243 114
Cord 110769 112 Lockwasher 2191 98, 99, 100, 102,
Cover: front 110676 113 103, 104, 105,
Cover: left 110678 113 106, 107, 108,
Cover: left rear 110679 113 114, 115.
Cover plate. 2503 103 Lockwasher 2669 98, 107, 114,
Cover plate 110772 113 115
Cover: right 110677 113 Lockwasher 3640 98, 100, 101,
Cover top 110952 113 104. 105, 106,
Cover: top (with tape 110681 113 108, 113
chute). Lockwasher . 90791 99
Detent lever 97557 105 Lockwasher 104451 114
Detent spring 110777 98. 105 Lubricator: felt 99117 98
Drive screw. 75646 107 Magnet coil: 105 ohms M-177 98
Driven clutch 7391 102 Motor cover (assem) 110680 113
Driving clutch. _ . 7389 102 Motor-governor filter (as-
End shield: (with 70771 sem) 99250 110
oiler) 73237 114 Motor, series: ^25-hp, 110-v,
Extension 110841 106 60-cvcle a-c (GE model
Feed pawl 97527 101 5BA65AA77) 6708 114
Feed pawl arm 97526 99, 101 Nut: hex; %6~24 _ 70887 108
Feed pawl lever 97525 99, 101 Nut: hex; 4—40 3599 98, 101, 104,
Field coil 73239 114 106, 113.
Field core 73238 114 Nut: hex; 6—32 6345 115
Field frame: (with 70771 Nut: hex; 6-40 3598 98, 99, 101, 103,
oiler) 73236 114 105, 106, 110
Filter (assem) 99217 100 Nut: hex; 6-40 „ .. 3606 105
Foot: rubber 88924 108 Nut: hex; 10-30 _ . 34-59 114
Gear: 39 teeth 97576 107 Nut' hex; 10-32 34-4 115
Gear: 42 teeth 97563 102 Nut: hex; 10—32 89897 98
Gear: 53 teeth 110651 107 Oil cup 89896 98
Gear guard 110726 107 Oil wick: felt 97481 107
Gear hub 97564 102 Oiler 70771 114
Governor adjusting bracket. 80338 115 Outer contact disk 78443 115
Governor brush and speed Outer disk brush spring:
adjusting bracket (assem). 80341 115 (with brush) 78399 115
Governor cover 78451 115 Outer disk contact spring 78496 115
145
Name of part Part No. Fig. No. Name of part Part No-. Fig. No.
Pawl: ratchet 97538 103 Screw: 6-40 x % 33-158 98
Pin: clevis 92175 105 Screw: 6—40 x % 1269 102, 107, 108 107
Pinion: 10 teeth _ 110650 114 Screw: 6-40 x 3%4__ _ _ 102465
Plate 97585 108 Screw: 6-40 x % 6811 103, 107 114
Plate 102942 105 Screw: 6-40 x 1272
Plate 110652 100 Screw: 6—40 x %_ __ _ 1226 107
Plug: 8-prong 98544 111 Screw: 6—40 x 1%s- 78028 110
Plug: polarized 107156 112 Screw: 6—40 x l1%o -- 110824 108
Post 86869 115 Screw: 6—40 x 2%s- - - 1297 109
Post 97586 107 Screw: 8—32 x 101833 107
Post 99204 107 Screw: 10—32 x 97296 108
Post 99293 107 Screw: 10-32 x %e 44035 98
Post 110653 98 Screw: 10—32 x % 78301 108, 114 114
Post 110703 107 Screw: 10-32 x % 73244
Post: anchor 80478 103 Screw: 10—32 x 1% 1258 107, 108 113
Power cable (assem) Release arm 110766 111 Screw: drive _ 103782
97931 106 Screw: eccentric; 6-40 _ 74171 105
Release bar 97549 104 Screw: hex; 4—40 x % 80957 105
Resistor: 10 ohms 96781 109 Screw: mach; 6-32 x _ 1064 115
Resistor: 300 ohms 71853 108 Screw: mach; 6-32 x n/32 6344 115
Resistor: 500 ohms 70722 108 Screw: mach; 6-40 x %2 74059 99, 110
Resistor: 1,000 ohms 90814 108 Screw: mach; 6-40 x 6746 98, 102, 114, 115
Resistor bracket (assem) Resistor unit (assem): 250- 110835 109 Screw: pilot; x/—32 _ 1100 114
Screw: pivot; 6-40 70803 105
500-1 000 ohms 97571 108 Screw: pivot; 6-40 Screw: set; 10-32 72096 105
Retainer 97528 99 86341 107
Retainer 99116 98 Screw: shoulder; %-20 90952 108
Retainer: copper 71189 114 Screw: shoulder; 4-40 33-170 113
Retainer: steel 73231 114 Screw: shoulder; 4-40 1174 98
Retard coil: 1.1 ohms 95936 110 Screw: shoulder; 4-40 80283 101
Roller 7027 99, 101 105 Screw: shoulder; 6-40 99278 101
Roller: lever 7679 Screw: special; 4—40 7678 105
Screw: 0.138—40 x %6 1268 98 Screw: thumb 1073 113
Screw: 2—56 x 0.188 1164 98, 99 98 Screw: thumb; 4-40 Selector lever bail 97560 105
Screw: 4-40 x 1163 97514 99
Screw: 4—40 x %o - 76167 105 Selector lever No. 1, right-_ Selector lever No. 2 99259 99
Screw: 4—40 x%e - 83408 107 99260 99
Screw: 4—40 x 14 1028 98, 108 99, 101, 104, 105, 106 106 Selector lever No. 3 99261 99
Screw: 4—40 x % 1162 Selector lever No. 4 „ 99262 99
Selector lever No. 5 99263 99
Screw: 4—40 x % 74613 Serial number plate: (blank). Set of letters-sensing mechanism parts 35975 107
Screw: 4—40 x %2 - 102052 105
Screw: 4—40 x %6 1168 104, 106, 115 100 97949 106
Screw: 4—40 x 1051 Shaft- \ 97506 102
Screw: 4—40 x 83856 104 Shaft-. 97513 99
Screw: 4—48 x 78025 114 Shaft. - _ 97540 103
Screw: 6—32 x 1266 110 Shaft 110673 107
■Screw: 6—40 x 80706 114 Shim. _ _ 200-214 113
Screw: 6—40 x %2 93141 110 Shim 7654 103
Screw: 6—40 x J4 1161 99, 100, 108 98, 103, 105, 113 98, 115 110 Shim. . _ _ 8896 98, 99, 105 108
Screw: 6—40 x J4 8543 Shim 71047
Screw: 6—40 x % 80444 Shim 91617 114
Screw: 6-40 x %2 Screw: 6-40 x Screw: 6-40 x 2%4 - Screw: 6-40 x % 82702 Shim 98361 102
1160 102 Shim 102861 105
80342 115 Shims - _ _ - 98198 107
1026 98, 107 Side frames: left (withbush-
Screw: 6—40 x % 103539 98 ing) _ _ 97503 98, 102
Screw: 6-40 x %6 1169 98 Side frame: right (with
Screw: 6-40 x Via 82440 107, 110 bushing) 97501 98, 102
146
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Spacer 87398 106
Spacing collar 2526 103
Spring 35-70 99
Spring: clutch 80471 102
Spring: compression 75606 103
Spring: compression 71999 114
Spring: extension 2836 98
Spring: extension 3610 106
Spring: extension 4703 99
Spring: extension 6323 115
Spring: extension 55090 98, 101, 104
Spring: extension 60669 99
Spring: extension 98636 103
Spring: extension 101385 101
Spring: extension 101386 105
Spring post 74554 98, 104
Spring washer 83561 113
Sprocket: tape 97555 105
Stiffener 84892 104
Stiffener: long 97531 103
Stiffener: short 97532 103
Stop 84047 114
Strap 2980 108
Strap 97590 113
Strap: 2%" long (with 82474 terminals) 76284 108
Strap: 6" long (with 82474 terminals) 103161 108
Stud 7386 98
Stud 97550 104
Stud 97551 104
Tape chute (with bracket). 110953 113
Tape-out lever 97523 99
Tape retaining lid (hinged). 110780 105
Tape retaining lid (plastic). 97562 105
Top plate 97552 105
Top plate 110790 105
Terminal 81726 104
Terminal 82474 110, 111, 112
Terminal block (assem) 73670 108
Terminal end 89925 108
Terminal strip (assem) 97582 107
Washer 200-1348 98, 113
Washer 2438 98, 108
Washer 3650 108
Washer 8165 115
Washer 8330 114
Washer 36273 110
Washer 88455 108
Washer: bakelite 75750 109
Washer: bakelite 90096 108
Washer: fiber 78905 110
Washer: fiber 91837 114
Washer: flat 3438 98, 109, 115
Washer: flat 7002 98, 105, 106,
Washer: flat 41675 107, 108, 110, 113, 115 105
Washer: flat 73232 114
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Washer: flat 73844 99
Washer: fiat 75607 103
Washer: flat 80312 114
Washer: flat 84579 114
Washer: flat 102839 105
Washer: steel 103-27 99, 101, 104,
105, 106
Wearing strip 8222 114
Wick: felt 89881 98
Wick: felt 101591 98
Yoke 97542 98
3. Alphabetical Index to Parts Identification Illustrations for Tape Winder, Number-Tape Reel, Tape Chute, Spring Tape Holder, Power Cabinet, Signal Indicator Panel, and Rectifier Unit
Note.—For a listing of equipment drawer parts, refer to figure 19.
Following is an alphabetical index to the parts identification illustrations for the tape winder, number-tape reel, tape chute, spring tape holder, power cabinet, signal indicator panel, and rectifier unit, components of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-1A).
a. Alphabetical Index for Tape Winder.
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Bearing cap C3500 80, 81
Box connector 3101 81
Bracket C3504 80
Bracket C3505 80, 81
Bushing insulator 5381 81
Cable clamp 2364 80
Clutch disk C3510 81
Clutch shaft (assem) C3496 81
Clutch spring C3512 81
Cord, power (SJ Tirex, 2-cond, - 81
33)4" long).
Core C2357 80
Coupling (%" x diam bores). 1 81
Cover plate C3501 81
Driven gear (assem) C3497 80
Driving gear (assem) C3498 81
Driving shaft C3509 81
Extruded washer C3511 81
Filter IF-24 81
Function washer 72883 81
Gear C3515 80
Gear hub C3514 80
Hub C2358 80
147
a. Alphabetical Index for Tape Winder— Continued
b. Alphabetical Index for Number-tape Reel.
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Lamp Lamp bracket Lampholder Locking collar, tape-reel, shaft. _ Lockwasher: % x x %4 . Lockwasher: 6 x %2 x %2 Lockwasher: 8 x %4 x %2 Lockwasher: 10 x %4 x %4 Motor bracket Motor, tape-winder Mounting flange Name plate : Nut Nut: hex; 8-32 Nut: hex; %-28 ' Plug cap Reel flange Screw: fil head mach; 6-32 x Screw: fil head mach; 6-32 x Screw: fil head mach; 6-32 x Screw: fil bead mach; 6-32 x 1%_ Screw: fil head mach; 6-40 x Screw: fil head mach; 6-40 x Screw: fil head mach; 8-32 x 1%. Screw: fil head mach; 8-32 x 1%. Screw: fil head mach; 10-32 x %_ Screw: hex head cap; %-28 x Screw: round head drive; 2-0 x Shaft housing Shaft collar Sleeve bearing Sleeve bearing Sleeve bearing Sleeve bearing _ _ Sleeve roller Spacer bushing Spiral gear (clutch-shaft gear) Stop nut Switch cover Tape reel (assem) Tape-reel shaft (assem) Tape-winder motor Terminal lug Terminal strip Thrust washer (% x % x )4e") — Toggle switch (SPST) 194120 C3530 193296 SC-37 C3535 FUE-51-2 C3362 C3531 C2359 7057. C3507 C3499 C3513 C3516 FI-300 1-304-7 FI-503 C3506 3661 H-2448-R 42-TE-064 C3502 C3494 •_ C3495 FUE-51-2 31 2-50 AH & H20992.. 80 80 80, 81 80 80 80, 81 80, 81 80, 81 81 81 80, 81 81 80 80 80 81 80 80, 81 81 80 81 80, 81 80, 81 80 81 80, 81 80 81 80, 81 81 81 81 81 80 80, 81 81 81 81 80 80 80 81 81 80, 81 81 80, 81
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Bearing SR254 116
Bearing collar C2554 116
Bracket C3533 116
Brake._ C3534 116
Cover . .. C3540 116
Hub C2552 116
Lockwasher: 4 x %2 x 116
Lockwasher: 6 x %2 x %2 116
Lockwasher: 10 x %4 x %4 116
Nut: cap; 10-32 116
Nut: hex; 4—40 116
Nut: hex; 10-32 . 116
Reel (assem) C3532 116
Reel flange C3371 116
Reel-stud shaft C3372 116
Rewind handle C2553 116
Screw: fil head mach; 4—40 x % 116
Screw: fil head mach; 4—40 x 1 116
Screw: fil head mach; 6—40 x 116
Screw: fil head mach; 6-32 x % 116
Screw: fil head mach; 10-32 x % 116
Tape grip pin C2549 Ufi
Washer: brass; 4 x %2 x 0.025 116
Washer: brass; 6 x % x 0.032 — 116
c. Alphabetical Index for Tape Chute.
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Base C3528 97
Chute C3526 97
Lockwasher: 2 x %2 x 0.022 97
Lockwasher: 6 x %2 x %2 97
Pin: steel wire “S”; 19 (0.041) 97
W. M. gage.
Pivot bearing C3527 97
Screw: fil head mach; 2-56 x - 97
Screw: fil head mach: 4-40 x 97
Screw: hex head mach; 6-40 x %. 80467 97
Screw: round head drive; 2-0 x %_ 97
Spring C3529 97
Washer: brass; 8 x ?{6 x 0.036 (re-
drill to No. 10 (0.093) diam)__ — 97
148
d. Alphabetical Index for Spring Tape Holder.
Name of part Part No. Fig. No.
Bracket C3466 96
Extension spring C3467 96
Lockwasher: 8 x %4 x %4 96
Screw: til head mach; 8-32 x 5/ic, _ - 96
e. Alphabetical Index for Power Cabinet.
Name of part Ref. symbol Fig. No.
Cord-grip body: polarized (fe-
male connector) R 117
Cord-grip cap: polarized (male
connector) M 117
Fusetron: screw base: 1.6 amp.. D 117
Resistor: 40 ohms L 117
Switch: toggle; DPDT E 117
Switch: toggle; DPST F 117
f. Alphabetical Index for Signal Indicator
Panel.
Name of part Ref. symbol Fig. No.
Light assembly: red; with 120-v,
6-w mazda lamp B2 23
Light assembly: white; with 120-
v, 6-w mazda lamp Bl 23
Switch, push button: DPST DI, D2, Cl, C2_ 23
Switch, push button: locking;
DPDT E 23
/. Alphabetical Index for Signal Indicator Panel—Continued
Name of part Ref. Symbol Fig. No.
Switch, push button: Yaxley; DPDT ’ F 23
g. Alphabetical Index for Rectifier unit.
Name of part Ref. symbol Fig. No. 21 21
Capacitor 500-mf
Stack, selenium
4. Parts Identification Illustrations for Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC—1
Parts used in Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 are illustrated in figures 96 through 117.
-------------C3467 EXTENSION SPRING
---8 x 3/64x 3/64" LOCKWASHER
Vi .1 '' rz b--------8-32 x 5/16" F. H. I. MACH. SCREW
-------------C3466 BRACKET '
TL 57554S
Figure 96. Spring tape holder, parts identification.
C3526 CHUTE
80467 SCREW
C3528 BASE—
2-OX 1/8" R.H. DRIVE SCREW
6X 1/32 X 1/32" LOCKWASHER
C3527 PIVOT BEARING
C3529 SPRING
4-40X5/16" F.H.I. MACH. SCREW
2X 1/32 X 0.022" LOCKWASHER 2'56 X 1/8" F.H. I. MACH. SCREW
8X 7/16 X 0.036" BRASS WASHER (REDRILL TO# 10 (0.193") DIA)
19(0.041) W.M.GA. STEEL WIRE
"S" PIN
TL57305S
Figure 97. Tape chute, parts identification.
149
97500
BASE PLATE
M-177
99115
99117
99116
89881
101591
89896
89897
1026
2191
1164
97503
97546
103539
110777
80444
2191
7002
97543
8543
97545
55090
93463 ARMATURE '1163 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
OIL CUP
NUT
SCREW-
SCREW-
BRACKET
WICK, FELT-
WICK, FELT-
SCREW BRACKET
YOKE---
SIDE FRAME,LEFT (WITH BUSHING)
BRACKET-----
NUT
LOCKWASHER
SCREW
LOCKWASHER
97501
Figure 98. Base plate, parts identification.
MAGNET COIL,SOLENOID, 105 OHMS PER COIL (WITH 1028 SCREWS AND 2438 WASHERS) BRACKET >
LUBRICATOR,FELT----
RETAINER \
'74554 SPRING POST 2836 SPRING
110792 CABLE DISTRIBUTOR (W.D.-2302)
'44035 SCREW
2669 LOCKWASHER
97583
97529
7386 7002 .8896 3598
2191
7002
GUIDE BUSHING
CLUTCH LEVER
SIDE FRAME,RIGHT (WITH BUSHING) STUD WASHER SHIM
NUT
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
DETENT SPRING SCREW LOCKWASHER WASHER, FLAT,
SCREW
LATCH
SPRING
3599
3640
200-1348 WASHER
1174
97541
97542
1161 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER
8896 SHIM
97512 COMB
97514 SELECTOR-LEVER BAIL
4703 SPRING
99259 SELECTOR
99260 SELECTOR
99261 SELECTOR
99262
99263
SELECTOR SELECTOR
97523
35-70
TAPE-OUT
SPRING
LEVER
103539 SCREW
92685 BUSHING, SPACER 1169 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER 33-158 SCREW 2191
LOCKWASHER
SCREW
LOCKWASHER
6746
2 191
7002 WASHER
110653 POST
1268 SCREW '44035 SCREW
2669 LOCKWASHER
3438 WASHER
TL5726.IS
NO. I, RIGHT
NO. 2
NO. 3
NO. 4
LEVER LEVER LEVER LEVER
LEVER NO. 5, LEFT
TL 57I77S
Figure 99. Selector-lever assembly, parts identification.
1162 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER 103-27 WASHER
97516 BUSHING
97513 SHAFT
1164 SCREW
90791 LOCKWASHER
73844
WASHER
80708
74059
2191 LOCKWASHER
97528 RETAINER
97525 FEED-PAWL LEVER
97526 FEED-PAWL ARM
CABLE CLAMP SCREW
7027 ROLLER
99278 SCREW
3598 NUT
97515 BAIL EXTENSION
60669 SPRING
150
1051 SCREW ) J-4--------4-,
3640 LOCKWASHER I
K 7$ 7— —
1161 SCREW | 7~\ J-------F—/T*\ .
2191 lockwasherJ /| । AS ITlp«=>—
110652 PLATE ----n II- K. '*"’
^=====S#1
9921? FILTER ASSEM-—TL STITSS
Figure 100. Filter assembly, parts identification.
97525 FEED-PAWL LEVER
1162 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER 103'27 WASHER
7027 ROLLER
99278 SCREW
3598 NUT
97526
101385
FEED-PAWL ARM
SPRING
SCREW
80283
3640 LOCKWASHER
3599 NUT
97527 FEED PAWL
55090 SPRING
TL57I79S
Figure 101. Feed paid, parts identification.
TL 57181S
Figtire 102. Shaft assembly, parts identification.
151
7389 DRIVING CLUTCH----------------------------, _________[97501 SIDE FRAME, RIGHT
\ / Z (WITH BUSHING)
6746 SCREW 'l________________________________ \ /
2191 LOCKWASHER \ \ /
2 \ \ / /----97563 GEAR, 42T
7391 DRIVEN CLUTCH--------------------------. \ \ / /
80471 SPRING- --- >. \ \ \ fl 160 SCREW
v \ \ \ \ 1 I ^Zl2'91 LOCKWASHER
97503 SIDE FRAME, LEFT_____, nnnnnnn \ \ \ \ Z
(WITH BUSH.NG) J~ j £.»...........IrtllVlSl __________________(^9 SCREW
97506 SHAFT-----------L_____________________RIT] ^2.9! LOCKWASHER
101766 CAM-SLEEVE ASSEM---------------1 / | \
98361 SHIMS--------------------------------------' ------—97564 GEAR HUB
2526 SPACING COLLAR
7654 SHIMS
75606
75607
97540
2191 LOCKWASHER
3598 NUT
97538
80478
98636
97500
97537 CONTACT LEVER (I)
7318 CONTACT LEVER (6)
97533
97534
SHAFT
PAWL
SPRING
BASE PLATE
SPRING
WASHER
Figure 103. Contact-lever assembly, parts identification.
POST, ANCHOR
8543 SCREW
97549
RELEASE BAR
55090
SPRING
SPRING POST
3599 NUT
74554
1168 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
103-27 WASHER
90539 BUSHING
97551 STUD
2191 LOCKWASHER
1162 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
97535
97536
97531
97532
CONTACT SPRING, LONG CONTACT SPRING, SHORT
CONTACT STOP, LONG CONTACT STOP, SHORT
STIFFENER, LONG
STIFFENER, SHORT
6811 SCREW
2529 BUSHING, BAKELITE
2191 LOCKWASHER
2503 COVER PLATE
- 2504 INSULATOR, PLATE
97530 CONTACT BRACKET
TL57I82S
97550 STUD
I 2191 LOCKWASHER
97547 CONTACT ASSEM----
84666 CONTACT SPRING^!
41720 CONTACT SPRING
84705 CONTACT SPRING
84892 STIFFENER
81726 TERMINAL
|83856 SCREW —
183954 BUSHING
41732 CLAMP PLATE
41733 INSULATOR
97548 BRACKET
74554 SPRING POST / TL57I83S
Figure IO-'/. Release-bar contact assembly, parts identification.
152
110790
TOP PLATE
110780
110777
BOTTOM
97561 GUIDE
110781 BRACKET
1162 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
103-27 WASHER
80957 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER 103-27 WASHER
70803 SCREW
3606 NUT
74171 SCREW
76532 BUSHING
2191 LOCKWASHER
3598 NUT
110778 BRACKET
1162 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER 103-27 WASHER
102937 LATCH
76167 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
97562 TAPE-RETAINING LID (PLASTIC)
80957 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
102942 PLATE
72096 SCREW
3598 NUT
-T97556 BRACKET, RIGHT
(J0286I SHIMS
TAPE-RETAINING LID (HINGED)
DETENT SPRING
8543 SCREW ] T_D
2191 LOCKWASHERl
7002 WASHER
8896 SHIMS
97552 TOP PLATE
97560 SCREW, THUMB 103-27 WASHER
97559 CLAMP PLATE
8543 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER
7002 WASHER
8896 SHIMS
97557 DETENT LEVER 101386 SPRING
99283 GUIDE “
102052 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER 103-27 WASHER
97554 BRACKET
102861 SHIMS
80957 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
102942 PLATE "
72096 SCREW
3598 NUT
i ~ o (0)
97555 SPROCKET, TAPE
(A)—iop view, top plate with hinged tape-retaining lid. (B)—top view, top plate with plastic tape-retaining lid. (0)—bottom view.
-97544 LETTERS OPERATING-LEVER ASSEM
z
110842 LEVER
74613 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
87398 SPACER
110841 EXTENSION
Figure 105. Top plate, parts identification.
7678 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
41675 WASHER
7679 ROLLER
102839 WASHER
^92175 PIN
TL 57I84S
97931 RELEASE ARM
3610 SPRING
'1162 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER
103-27 WASHER
86209 STUD, CLUTCH LEVER POST Il 68 SCREW
3640 LOCKWASHER 103-27 WASHER
<3599 NUT
3598 NUT 'I
2191 LOCKWASHER -----------1
7002 WASHER J
(USED ON BOTH ENDS)-1 J
97949 SET OF LETTERS-SENSING MECHANISM PARTS -------------------------------
TL57I85S
Figure 106. Letters-sensing mechanism (number transmitter), parts identification.
823667—49----11
153
154
110654 BASE, GREEN WRINKLE--------—-----—----—------------------------—---!----------------------------------------------99373 CABLE CLAMP
97582 TERMINAL STRIP ASSEm'I_______ I . x
(WITH 101833 SCREWS) I \ \ Z\X ___X_____ ______|82440 SCREW
J K \l \ [2191 LOCKWASHER
1026 SCREW 'l ..----—\ \
2191 LOCKWASHER ' KAMiIT \ ------------U-------97586 P0ST
7002 WASHER J M B ____________-_____________
99205 CABLE BRACKET-------------------------x \ O O [6811 SCREW
\ [2191 LOCKWASHER
\ .--------------------U-------110703 POST
99204 POST ------------------\ 0/0
\ t-------——— —|_____[J_____[6811 SCREW
S \ I / / 12191 LOCKWASHER
. .......TZT7 \ / /
6811 SCREW [________________UW1------ / \ Z / y------------------------U-------110673 SHAFT
2191 LOCKWASHER J _y-^ \ /
\ / / / p-z-y JI___[6811 SCREW
99293 POST------------------.... [2191 LOCKWASHER
6811 SCREW 'I_______________fr\ / O / 97586 POST
2191 LOCKWASHER J __"gj [ |_____________Ivl _/ r4-i
^(SEE^LEVAtIon’aBOVE)'}--------VCCgaV [GIO0000^X^G 0000 0 G^
J - ‘ ll'“y Xg \-----—----------§ Z'-U_________ 98198 SHIMS
83740 COLLAR 'l__________________________________ I Ad = _ L 1258 SCREW
86341 SCREW | || “==^fTB - -Z _ ’ [2669 LOCKWASHER
_____ © = _____ZZ === ® 2 ©s C--I||
==—Xr gg Zv== - -------97481 0,L WICK> FELT
~~h I X \ L 9 Tv. . | -----U-------102465 SCREW
17 V—<\ VZ_____________________[97579 HUB
// \ X\ -------------- 1269 SCREW
/ \ \\ 12191 LOCKWASHER
--------------------' ___________________X \\
> K ( Y\ \ | 110726 GEAR GUARD
] \ y------ -b-------- 82440 SCREW
\ [7002 WASHER
\ I 106380 CODE PLATE (BLANK)
99293 POST------------------Li— -----1--------------------------------------------- \ [83408 SCREW
\ fll065l GEAR.53T
6811 SCREW 'I -1 ------ 1226 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER J----------- " TC F '-‘hX. >2191 L0CKWASHER
___________Z x__.--------------------Z \X_---------------------> |X [35975 SERIAL NUMBER nl__________Vi------------------------------------------------------------------------ PLATE(BLANK)
° 1--x |75646 DRIVE SCREW
\ m^mimim y;/'-----97586 POST
110674 NAME PLATE "| \ <8811 qcRFW
75646 DRIVE SCREW J-------------------------------------------------X--------------------------------------------------J LOCKWASHER
TL 57I86S
Figure 107. Base (top view), jiarts identification.
110654 BASE,GREEN WRINKLE-----------x __-_____________________________________ (97296 SCREW
\ ~I 2669 LOCKWASHER
869? 5 g2pT’RUBBER^---—~------------------------------------------------------------------------------—97569 BRACKET X
90952 SCREW >_________|jLrX~l l^~| fffil ([ CXI ]) ) T4871 BOLT
88455 WASHERJ --------x J': S A’-' ---x- ---X I— 1^1 ---U----H 70887 NUT
Z H______ A ("X‘■ ( A I 1---1 I I 2669 LOCKWASHER
2980 STRAP ] Z| Z’GZ- ZjL \ , il\
1258 SCREW V---------- --------------- — p.p Tj \ \ ------------------------------- ------70724 INSULAT0R ----
3094 INSULATOR_____________________________•. 7/ I N 89925 TERMINAL END
Lx MU I I \ | 1028 SCREW
X'-' X? 1 I --------------------/-----------u------] 2438 WASHER
78011 CAPACITOR, l-MF--u-------------------X. SW-1. 3640 LOCKWASHER
; X I J
x . T -------—----------------------------u------70722 RESISTOR
71853 RESISTOR, 300 OHMS | || __________ | D I II1 1 (500 OHMS EACH)
(FLAT TYPE) -----
'-------z-T-' itrU Ubfcj---------—Z 97571 RESISTOR UNIT ASSEM —
\ Cl I , ® )l| I® (250-500-1,000 OHMS)
90814 RESISTOR, 1,000 OHMS | n 11 U UU n I- ---
TO0?!4 WaSr STEEL —A _____U____f^69 SCRE*
90096 WASHER, BAKELITE J Z Tx I®|, ^1^ XS% 1^2191 LOCKWASHER
lei \! || (73670 TERMINAL BLOCK ASSEM
I 7 | 1 > , ----- (INCLUDES 1028 SCREWS AND
I (L JJ / ITllo) O o (O'! I ' 3650 WASHERS, BRASS)
■ - ' / U \ T —— -----------------------LT' \| 78301 SCREW
/ n\ ' I 2669 LOCKWASHER
94679 CAPACITOR,O.I-,O.I-,O.OI-MFX| / \ X R.R
1161 SCREW --------------! \ 91584 BAR
2191 LOCKWASHER \
/ ---------------------------1-1----8253 CABLE CLAMP
______| 97585 PLATE Y I 71047 SHIMS
76284 STRAP,2 l/g LONG L_________________________\
(WITH 82474 TERMINALS) |;@) Q O
IO3I6I STRAP, 6"L0NG '
(W'TH 82474 TERMINALS) X_/7830l SCREW
________________________I 2669 LOCKWASHER
Z"T"' —~~>i
0
V-. ^=^7
- ■ ' -----Z T L 5 718 7 S
Figure IOS. Base (bottom view), parts identification.
155
96781 RESISTOR,10 OHMS-------AZ ^3438 WASHER
75750 WASHER .BAKELITE------' U U \
'----------75750 WASHER, BAKELITE
II0S3A BRACKET---------/
--------------------------110835 RESISTOR BRACKET ASSEM------------------------------- TL 57I88S
Figure 109. Resistor-bracket assembly, parts identification.
'35^6 CAPACITOR,O.I-MF EACH----------------------------------------------------------95937 CAPACITOR,O.OI-MF EACH
82702 SCREW v -------99354 CONTAINER
82474 TERMINAL VX , r~T—~
7002 WASHER —-------o o I o 1 o I o J ------95936 RETARD COIL, l.l-OHM
2191 LOCKWASHER TT,—L— ---------------------AX -A- -
3598 NUT / / / /\ \ || IP Z78028 SCREW
99357 CLIP------------------/ / (Q ©J \ 95935 BUSHING, BAKELITE
\ 78905 WASHER, FIBER
99356 BRACKET-----------------Z / / / \ 1
r- v // \ 7002 WASHER
74059 SCREW X / / / \ 2191 LOCKWASHER
2191 LOCKWASHER L_____________/ / \
7002 WASHER / \ 1^3598 NUT
82440 SCREW Z________________/ / \____________________(219^' LOCKWASHER
*»' LOCKWASHER ) / I 36273 WASHE^
I 99355 BRACKET-------------------------ggg|2>___\,__________________________________/ 77911 BRUSH CAP
1266 SCREW 2191 LOCKWASHER
•\7002 WASHER
-------------------------------99250 MOTOR-GOVERNOR FILTER ASSEM------------------------------------------------ TL 57189 S Figure 110. Motor-governor filter assembly, parts identification.
jK. Z \
------- ff "" —110767 CABLE
___________ J) ,n -Fl n / WITH 82474 TERM|NALS
—98544 PLUG ,8-PRONG--------zzz? rrr r m q
----------------------------------------110766 CABLE ASSEM,POWER (APPROX 50"LONG) W D-2301 TL 57190 S
Figure 111. Power-cable assembly, parts identification.
____________________________________________________<110769 CORO WITH')
B 1 82474 TERMINALS )
r| 107156 PLUG, POLARIZED-~T i
110768 CABLE CORD ---------------------------------ASSEM, POWER (APPROX 48" LONG) TL57I9IS
Figure 112. Power-cable cord assembly, parts identification.
156
---------------------------------------------------------------|s ............
\ —--- 110680 MOTOR-COVER ASSEM-
v "" 11 I--------1 I
, i I I
I I I
I
! I
I' ' :
110679 COVER, LEFT REAR --------------------------------- ► 1,1 I I I [33-170 SCREW
| i I I 200-214 SHIM--------1
| I -XJ 1 (BETWEEN 110772 & II0680)-1
1ft ___11___________ 1811 W-------- 83561 SPRING WASHER
/ \ / 'IV--------J , 200-1348 WASHER
/ . V \ | 3640 LOCKWASHER
I Cm' 1 1 \ 3599 NUT
I \
\ '-------------- 110772 COVER PLATE
- » ■ ■ ■ * »• k--°J |\
* 48 \
0] O ; lff-Z8543 SCREW
110678 COVER, LEFT -► L--J ।
110681 COVER, TOP-
। (WITH TAPE CHUTE)
----1--- 110952 COVER, TOP
X z—J---C—x ____________________ 8543 SCREW
8543 SCREW ________|[_|_______ ToX'' 1 --
7002 WASHER I \ X-----X------------L_1___L— "0953 TAPE CHUTE
? ® 0 J.-__r®" ; (WITH bracket) J
97590 STRAP--------............ ..........................
fiftD t
f I-*-- 110677 COVER, RIGHT
8543 SCREW ----[--- 8543 SCREW
/ 1 / 110957 CARD HOLDER-
/ } / BRACKET ASSEM
110676 COVER,FRONT|_ _xlj a, „„„„ _ _ s
(WITH TAPE GUI DE) J ---- y® ______p|| ------------------ 110955 CARD HOLDER
/ X - 3------------------ 103782 SCREW, DRIVE
1073 SCREW, THUMB ------------------' '---------------------------- 110956 BRACKET z
TL 57I92S
8543 SCREW
Figure 113. Covers (top view), parts identification.
157
73236 FIELD FRAME (WITH OILER)------------------< / 73238 FIELD CORE
\ / ,------73242 INSULATION (FOR I FIELD COIL)
6710 ARMATURE---------------------------------\ \ / / ✓
\ \ / / [78301 SCREW
\ \ / / ,------- 2669 LOCKWASHER
\ \ / / / 184579 WASHER
70873 BRUSH-HOLDER CAP-----------'----------\ \ \ / / /.73237 END SHIELD (WITH OILER)
70872 BRUSH-HOLDER (WITH INSULATOR)--x \ \ \ / / // /----------73239 FIELD COIL
8094 BRUSH, ELECTRICAL CONT, CARBON (WITH SPRING)-\JX \ \\ / / // / /------70771 OILER
91837 WASHER, FIBER--------------------\\\ \ \\ / / / / / /
71998 BRUSH-HOLDER RING (WITH 80706 SCREW)-\\ \\ \ \ \ // / / / / ,----5061 BALL BEARING (BOTH ENDS)
\\ If \ll™tM ____[71999 SPRING
70771 OILER ------------------------- X \\ W \ W M Wil 1/ / / / / I803'2 WASHER
\ / / /
1100 SCREW ]____________________________ V XVT^BF / / /
104451 LOCKWASHER] \ IvgMbx ' z > / / '_~~~W J [S // / t2191 lockwasher
8222 WEARING STRIP-----------------------j F Z-4V////////1
10650 PINION, IOT
7661 ADJUSTING LEVER----------------“----} jjCyH-1 ' ^11 <■ ;, ■■■]■—
91617 SHIMS-----------------------------*4 I'd® ^xJS||||||||||||||N ||||||I|m S 5k / ^lllllllk
84047 STOP----------------------------- / ^lllllllllllllll I/iIIIHR
/\-=- ■.uujaa;---------------------1272 SCREW —\ [73231 RE TA IN E R, STE E L 'l DnTU
/ ----------------V---------- '---------------- 71189 RETAINER, COPPER "
/ \ [73232 WASHER, FLAT J t S
73244 SCREW------------------------------- / \
73243 LOCKING WEDGE-----------------' i’8025 SCREW
6708 MOTOR, 1/25 H P, IIO'V, 60‘CYCLE, A-C SERIES (G E MODEL 5BA65AA77)
TL 57I93S
Ti'iniirt'o 11!. Afalnr nnrts irlf’/nf'ifimt'inn
158
6811 SCREW ___________
2191 LOCKWASHER]
FOR MOUNTING GOVERNOR-
6 34 4 SCREW ------------------
6318 CLAMP---------------------
1064 SCREW---------------------—
r—6314 CONTACT SPRING (ASSEMBLY )
[ 72835 CONTACT POINT
U 86868 BUSHING
I 86869 POST
2191 LOCKWASHER
6347 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER
6323 SPRING—------
6320 CONTACT SCREW
GOVERNOR WITH
COVER REMOVED
6319 BLOCK-
6324 ADJUSTING WHEEL
8165 WASHER_______
6330 BEARING (ASSEMBLY) (UPPER AND LOWER)
78443 OUTER CONTACT DISK ------
78438 BUSHING -----------------
78437 INSULATOR ---------------
78496 OUTER DISK CONTACT SPRING
---------------78451 COVER
________________| 78497 INNER DISK k CONTACT SPRING
---------------78439 GOVERNOR SHELL
_______________(34-4 NUT 2669 LOCKWASHER
1^3438 WASHER
80352 CENTER CONTACT GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY --------------------------
GOVERNOR CIRCUIT
ADJUSTING BRACKET-
BRUSH SPRING (WITH BRUSH?
110978 CABLE, MOTOR UNIT 110979 CABLE
80338 GOVERNOR
78399 OUTER DISK
78400 INNER DISK BRUSH SPRING (WITH BRUSH?
80444 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER
7002 WASHER
80337 BRACKET
80342 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER
80335 CLAMPING PLATE
78403 CONTACT BRUSH
2301
80336 INSULATOR
— 80334 CONTACT TERMINAL
41733 INSULATOR
41732 CLAMPING PLATE
1168 SCREW
78398 BUSHING-BAKELITE
___.80340 BRUSH SPRING PLATE
6746 SCREW
2191 LOCKWASHER
80341 GOVERNOR BRUSH AND SPEED-ADJUSTING BRACKET ASSEMBLY
TL 55I75SA
Figure 115. Motor governor, parts identification.
159
C3532 REEL,SUBASSEMBLY
C3533 BRACKET
10 X.-3-xJVlOCKWASHER
64 64
10-32 BRASS CAP NUT
3 3 „
l0X64X 64 LOCKWASHER 10-32 HEX.IRON NUT
JO-32 x|" F.H.I.MACH SCREW
03533 BRACKET
C3534 BRAKE
Figure 116. Number-tape reel, parts identification.
6x1 xl " LOCKWASHER 32 32
6-32 X 3"f.H.I. MACH SCREW
8 J
4Xi?X32 LOCKWASHER 4-40 X ^-"F.H.I.MACH SCREW
C2549 TAPE GRIP PIN
REEL C3372
STUD SHAFT
4-40 HEX.IRON NUT
C2553 REWIND HANDLE
4-40Xl"FH.I MACH SCREW
9
4X- X0025 BRASS WASHER
C2554 BEARING COLLAR
”6x5x0 O32"BRASS WASHER
8
6X ^X^" LOCKWASHER
6-40X ip.H.I. MACH SCREW
LC3540 COVER
■ SR-254 BEARING
C2552 HUB
C337I REEL FLANGE
TL 57553S
CAUTION!
FUSE BLOCKS SHALL BE INSTALLED SO THAT THE LIVE SIDE WILL COME TO CENTER CONTACT OF BASE AND THE GROUND SIDE TO THE SHELL OF EACH RECEPTACLE.
RESISTORS (L)
BOX CONNECTOR
CENTERING WASHERS TO-^ BE USED TOP AND BOTTOM
CUT-OUT FUSE
FB2)
(FB3)
A-
GRIP,CORD
-CUT-OUT FUSE (WITH SOLID NEUTRAL)
CORD-GRIP BODY, POLARIZED
SWITCH,DPST (F)
LEFT SIDE OF POWER CABINET (COVER REMOVED)
®
®
®
FUSETRON, SCREW BASE, 1.6-AMP (D)
SWITCH, MULTI-GANG, EQUIPPED WITH 2 DPDT SWITCHES AND KNOB LEVER
(E)
(Gsny \(gs2)
DC
AC DC
AC
fPOWER'"'
(P02)
(POI)
PLUG, FLUSH MOTOR. FEMALE,POLARIZED
PLUG,FLUSH MOTOR. MALE,POLARIZED
:on
OFF (PS)
POWER CABINET
A
FRONT VIEW
CORD,2-COND, I8-GA,4'LONG
notes:
I. BRACKETED DESIGNATIONS(FI TO F5, PS,FBI GSIAND2, P0IAND2, PRI TO PR4) ARE THOSE ON WIRING DIAGRAM.
2. BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO.
DRAWING 108245-3
TO FB3 USED
CORD, 2-COND 14-GA, 41 LONG CORD-GRIP CAP, POLARIZED—z (M) /
CORD-GRIP BODY, POLARIZED (R)
TL57I60S
B
Figure 117. Power cabinet, parts identification and assembly.
160
5. Numerical Index to Parts Identification Illustrations for Multiple Transmitter Distributor and Base
All parts used in teletypewriter equipment are assigned basic numbers that remain fixed regardless of the equipment in which they are used. The part number is usually the only means of positive identification because of similarity among parts. This is especially true for such items as springs, bolts, screws, nuts, washers, and lockwashers, which look alike but are different in material, tension, etc. The same parts may be used in different assemblies and frequently use the name of the assembly as part of the descriptive name for the particular use. However, some parts with identical names are actually different parts with different numbers. The parts are listed in numerical order with the basic name and description of each part and the illustrations in which each part appears. Only one reference is made to a figure for a given part even though that part appears several times in the illustration.
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
M-177___ Magnet coil: 105 ohms 98
33-158___ Screw: 6-40 x h 98
33-170__- Screw: shoulder; 4-40 113
34-4 Nut; hex; 10-32 115
34-59 Nut: hex; 10-30 114
35-70 Spring 99
103-27-__ Washer: steel 99, 101,
104, 105, 106
126-123-- Bushing: rubber 114
200-214-_ Shim 113
200-1348. Washer 98, 113
1026 Screw: 6-40 x % 98, 107
1028 Screw: 4-40 x Va 98, 108
1051 Screw: 4-40 x % 100
1064 Screw: mach; 6-32 x % 115
1073 Screw: thumb 113
1100 Screw: pilot; J4-32 114
1160 Screw: 6-40 x he 102
1161 Screw: 6-40 x % 99, 100, 108
1162 Screw: 4-40 x / 99, 101,
104, 105, 106
1163 Screw: 4-40 x he 98
1164 Screw: 2-56 x 0.188 98, 99
1168 Screw: 4-40 x he 104, 106, 115
1169 Screw: 6-40 x he 98
1174 Screw: shoulder; 4-40 98
1226 Screw: 6-40 x % 107
1258 Screw: 10-32 x 1% , 107, 108
1266 Screw: 6-32 x he 110
1268 Screw: 0.138-40 x he 98
1269 Screw: 6-40 x h 102, 107, 108
823667—49----12
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
1272 Screw: 6-40 x xhe 114
1297 Screw: 6-40 x 2he 109
2191 Lockwasher 98, 99, 100,
2438 Washer 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 114, 115 98, 108
2503 Cover plate 103
2504 Insulator: plate 103
2526 Bushing: spacer. - 103
2529 Bushing: bakelite 103
2669 Lockwasher 98, 107, 108, 114, 115 98
2836 Spring: extension
2980 Strap 108
3094 Insulator 108
3438 Washer: flat 98, 109, 115
3598 Nut: hex; 6—40 98, 99, 101, 103, 105, 106, 110 98, 101, 104, 106, 113 105
3599 Nut: hex; 4—40
3606 Nut: hex; 6-40
3610 Spring: extension 106
3640 Lockwasher _ 98, 100, 101, 104, 105, 106, 1 08, 113 108
• 3650 Washer _ _ . _ - -
4703 Spring: extension 99
4871 Bolt: he-24 x 4 108
5061 Ball bearing 114
6314 Contact spring (assem). 115
6318 Clamp. _ . - 115
6319 Block 115
6320 Contact screw 115
6323 Spring: extension. 115
6324 Adjusting wheel 115
6330 Bearing (assem) _ 115
6344 Screw: mach; 6-32 x 1%2 115
6345 Nut: hex; 6-32 115
6708 Motor, series: he-hp 110-v, 114
6710 60-cycle, a-c (GE model 5BA65AA77) Armature 114
6746 Screw: mach; 6—40 x he - 98, 102, 114, 115 103, 107 98, 105, 106, 107, 108, 110, 113, 115 99, 101
6811- Screw: 6—40 x %
7002 Washer: flat
7027 Roller _ _ -
7318 Contact lever. _ _ 103
7386 Stud - - -- 98
7389_ Driving clutch _ _ _ 102
7391- Driven clutch _ _ - 102
7654 Shim _ _ _ - - - 103
7661 Adjusting lever 114
161
Part No. Name of part Fig. No. Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
7678 Screw: special; 4-40 105 77911 Brush cap 110
7679 Roller: lever 105 78011 Capacitor: 1-mf 108
8094 Brush (with spring): electrical 114 78025 Screw: 4-48 x 114
8165 contact; carbon 78028 Screw: 6-40 x 1%6 110
Washer 115 78301 Screw: 10-32 x % 108, 114
8222 Wearing strip 114 78398 Bushing: bakelite 115
8253 Cable clamp 108 78399 Outer disk brush spring (with 115
8330 Washer 114 brush).
8543 Screw: 6-40 x K 98, 103, 105, 78400 Inner disk brush spring (with 115
113 brush).
8896 Shim 98, 99, 105 78403 Contact brush 115
35975 Serial number plate: (blank) __ 107 78437 Insulator 115
36273 Washer 110 78438 Bushing: bakelite 115
41675 Washer: flat 105 78439 Governor shell 115
41720 Contact spring 104 78443 Outer contact disk 115
41732 Clamp plate 104, 115 78451 Governor cover 115
41733 Insulator 104, 115 78496 Outer disk contact spring 115
44035 Screw: 10-32 x %6 98 78497 Inner disk contact spring 115
55090 Spring: extension 98, 101, 104 78905 Washer: fiber 110
60669 Spring: extension 99 80283 Screw: shoulder; 4-40 101
70722 Resistor: 500 ohms 108 80312 Washer: flat 114
70724 Insulator 108 80334 Contact terminal 115
70771 Oiler 114 80335 Clamping plate 115
70803 Screw: pivot; 6-40 105 80336 Insulator 115
70872 Brush holder (with insulator). 114 80337 Bracket 115
70873 Brush-holder cap 114 80338 Governor adjusting bracket 115
70887 Nut: hex; %6-24 108 80340 Brush spring plate 115
71047 Shim 108 80341 Governor brush and speed 115
71189 Retainer: copper 114 adjusting bracket (assem).
71853 Resistor: 300 ohms 108 80342 Screw: 6-40 x 2%4 115
71998 Brush-holder ring 114 80352 Center contact governor (as- 115
71999 Spring: compression 114 sem).
72096 Screw: pivot; 6-40 105 80444 Screw: 6-40 x % 98, 115
72835 Contact point 115 80471 Spring: clutch 102
73231 Retainer: steel 114 80478 Post: anchor 103
73232 Washer: flat 114 80706 Screw: 6-40 x %6 114
73236 Field frame (with 70771 oiler). 114 80708 Cable clamp 99
73237 End shield (with 70771 oiler). 114 80957 Screw: hex; 4-40 x % 105
73238 Field core 114 81726 Terminal 104
73239 Field coil 114 82440 Screw: 6-40 x 7/16 107, 110
73242 Insulation (for one 73239 field 114 82474 Terminal 110, 111, 112
73243 coil). 82702 Screw: 6-40 x %2 110
Locking wedge 114 83408 Screw: 4-40 x %6 107
73244 Screw: 10-32 x % 114 83561 Spring washer 113
73595 Clamping rod 114 83740 Collar 107
73670 Terminal block (assem) 108 83856 Screw: 4-40 x iy6 104
73844 Washer: flat 99 83954 Bushing 104
74059 Screw: mach; 6-40 x %2 99, 110 84047 Stop 114
74171 Screw: eccentric; 6-40 105 84579 Washer: flat 114
74554 Spring post 98, 104 84666 Contact spring ; 104
74613 Screw: 4-40 x % 106 84705 Contact spring 104
75606 Spring: compression 103 84892 Stiffener 104
7o607 Washer: flat 103 86209 Clutch lever post stud 106
75646 Drive screw 107 86341 Screw: set; 10-32 107
75750 Washer: bakelite 109 86868 Insulator bushing: bakelite.. _ 115
76167 Screw: 4-40 x %6 105 86869 Post 115
76284 Strap: 2%" long (with 82474 108 87398 Spacer 106
76532 terminals). 88455 Washer 108
Bushing 105 88924 Foot: rubber 108
162
Part No. Name of part Fig. No. Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
88925 Cup 108 97548 Bracket 104
89881 Wick: felt 98 97549 Release bar 104
89896 Oil cup 98 97550 Stud 104
89897 Nut: hex; 10—32 98 97551 Stud _ 104
89925 Terminal end 108 97552 Top plate 105
90096 Washer: bakelite 108 97554 Bracket 105
90539 Bushing 104 97555 Sprocket: tape 105
90791 Lockwasher 99 97556 Bracket: right _ 105
90814 Resistor: 1,000 ohms 108 97557 Detent lever 105
90952 ___ Screw: shoulder; %-20 108 97559 Clamp plate 105
91617 Shim 114 97560 Screw: thumb; 4-40 105
91837 Washer- fiber 114 97561 Guide 105
92175 Pin: clevis 105 97562 Tape retaining lid (plastic) 105
92685 Bushing: spacer 98 97563 Gear: 42T 102
93141 Screw: 6—40 x %2 110 97564 Gear hub .. . 102
93463 Armature- electromagnet 98 97568 Bearing. 107
94679 Capacitor: 0.1-0.1-0.01 mf 108 97569 Bracket 108
95935 Bushing: bakelite 110 97571... Resistor unit (assem: 250- 108
95936 Petard coil: 1.1 ohms 110 500-1,000 ohms.
95937,_ Capacitor- 0 01 mf no 97576 Gear: 39T 107
95938 Capacitor: 0.1 mf no 97579 Hub 107
96781 Resistor: 10 ohms 109 97582 Terminal strip (assem) 107
97296 Serpw 10—32 x *^1$ 108 97583 Guide bushing 98
97481 Oil wick* felt 107 97584 Bar 108
97500 Base plate 98, 103 97585 _ Plate 108
97501 Side frame: right (with bush- 98, 102 97586 Post 107
ing). 97590 Strap 113
97503 Side frame: left (with bush- 98, 102 97931 Release arm 106
ing). 97949 Set of letters-sensing mechan- 106
97506 Shaft 102 ism parts.
97512-_ Com b 99 98198 Shim . 107
97513 Shaft 99 98361 - Shim 102
97514 Selector*^ ovct' bail 99 98544 Plug: 8-prong- 111
97515- Bail extensions 99 98636 Spring: extension 103
97516 Bushing 99 99115. Bracket 98
97523 TapA-out Ip ver 99 99116 „ Retainer 98
97525 FAP.d-pa.wl lavar 99, 101 99117 _ Lubricator: felt 98
97526 Feed-pawl arm 99, 101 99204 Post 107
97527 FapH pa wl 101 99205 Cable bracket . _ 107
97528 "Retain at 99 99217 Filter (assem) 100
97529 Clutch lever 98 99250 Motor-governor filter (assem) — no
97530 Contact bracket 103 99259 Selector lever No. 1, right 99
97531 Stiffener* long 103 99260 Selector lever No. 2 99
97532 Stiffener* -short 103 99261 Selector lever No. 3 99
97533 dnntaet snrinp” Ions* 103 99262 Selector lever No. 4 99
97534 103 99263 Selector lever No. 5 99
97535 Contact stop* long 103 99278 Screw: shoulder; 6-40 101
075.8R 103 99283 Guide: punch 103
97537 103 99293 _ Post 107
Q752S 103 99354 Container no
97540 Shaft 103 99355 Bracket _ . no
97541 Bracket 98 99356 Bracket .. no
97542 Yoke 98 99357 Clip no
97543 Bracket 98 99373 Cable clamp _ — 107
97544 Letters-operating lever (as- 106 101385___ Spring: extension • 101
sem). 101386-- Spring: extension 105
97545 Latch* lever 98 101591- Wick: felt 98
97546 "Bracket 98 101766-- Cam sleeve (assem) 102
97547 Contact (assem) 104 101833___ Screw: 8-32 x 107
163
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
102052. Screw: 4-40 x %2 105
102465__ Screw: 6-40 x 107
102839 ___ Washer: flat 105
102861 . Shim 105
102937. Latch 105
102942 Plate 105
103161 Strap: 6" long (with 82474 terminals). 108
103539__ Screw: 6-40 x % 98
103782... Screw: drive 113
104451. Lockwasher 114
106380.__ Code plate (blank) 107
107156-.. Plug: polarized 112
110650.... Pinion: 10T 114
110651___ Gear: 53T 107
110652-. Plate 100
110653.__ Post 98
110654___ Base: green wrinkle 107, 108
110673 __ Shaft 107
110676___ Cover: front 113
110677.__ Cover: right 113
110678-__ Cover: left 113
110679___ Cover: left rear 113
110680.__ Motor cover (assem) 113
110681--- Cover: top (with tape chute). 113
110703-.. Post 107
110726___ Gear guard 107
110766--. Power cable (assem) 111
110767___ Cable 111
110768... Cable (assem) 112
110769-__ Cord 112
110772-.. Cover plate 113
110777___ Detent spring 98, 105
110778.__ Bracket __ 105
110780-.. Tape retaining lid (hinged) 105
110781. Bracket 105
110790___ Top plate 105
110792___ Cable distributor 98
110824.__ Screw: 6-40 x l’%6 108
110834-.- Bracket 109
110835.__ Resistor bracket (assem) 109
110841___ Extension 106
110842___ Lever 106
110952___ Cover top 113
110953.__ Tape chute (with bracket) 113
110955-.. Card holder 113
110956 __ Bracket 113
110957-.- Card holder bracket (assem) _ _ 113
110978___ Cable: motor unit 115
110979___ Cable: governor circuit 115
6. Numerical Index to Parts Identification Illustrations for Tape Winder, Number-Tape Reel, Tape Chute, and Spring Tape Holder
The following index to the parts identification illustrations for the tape winder, the number-tape reel, the tape chute, and the spring tape holder lists the parts for each item according to the numerical order of the manufacturer’s part numbers.
Note. For a listing of parts for the power cabinet, the signal indicator panel, and the rectifier unit, see paragraph 3 of this appendix (an alphabetical index). For a listing of equipment drawer parts, refer to figure 19.
a. Numerical Index for the Tape Winder.
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
AH & H20992__ Toggle switch. 80, 81
C2357 Core 80
C2358 Hub 80
C2359 Nut 80
C3362—. Mounting flange 80 81
C3494... Tape reel (assem) 80
C3495 Tape-reel shaft (assem) 80
C3496 Clutch shaft (assem) 81
C3497-_ Driven gear (assem) 80
C3498 Driving gear (assem) 81
C3499.- Shaft housing 80 81
C3500 Bearing cap 80 81
C3501--. Cover plate 81
C3502 Switch cover 80
C3504 Bracket 80
C3505 . Bracket 80, 81
C3506. Sleeve roller 80, 81
C3507. Reel flange 80
C3509 Driving shaft 81
C3510 Clutch disk 81
C3511____ Extruded washer 81
C3512 Clutch spring 81
C3513 Shaft collar __ 81
C3514.. Gear hub . . 80
C3515 Gear 80
C3516.. Sleeve bearing 81
C3530 Lamp bracket 80
C3531 Name plate 81
C3535 Motor bracket 81
FI-300 Sleeve bearing 81
FI-503 Sleeve bearing 1 80
164
a. Numerical Index for the Tape Winder
—Continued
b. Numerical Index for Number-tape Reel
—Continued
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
FUE-51-2 Tape-winder motor 81
H-2448-R Spiral gear (clutch-shaft gear)_ 81
1-304-7 Sleeve bearing 81
IF-24 Filter 81
SC-37 Locking collar, tape-reel shaft. 80
1 Coupling (x %6" diam bores). 81
2-50 Terminal strip 80, 81
31 Terminal lug 81
42-TE-064 Stop nut 81
2364 Cable clamp 80
3101 Box connector 81
3661 Bushing spacer 81
5381 Bushing insulator 81
7057 Plug cap 81
72883 Function washer 81
193296 Lampholder 80, 81
194120 Lamp 80
b. Numerical Index for Number-tape Reel.
Part No. Name of part Fig. No
C2549 Tape grip pin 116
C2552 Hub 116
C2553 Rewind handle 116
C2554 Bearing collar 116
C3371 Reel flange 116
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
C3372 Reel-stud shaft _ _ 116
C3532 Reel (assem) 116
C3533 Bracket 116
C3534 Brake 116
C3540 Cover 116
SR254 Bearing 116
c. Numerical Index for Tape Chute.
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
C3526 Chute. _ _ _ _ _ 97
C3527 Pivot bearing 97
C3528 Base _ _ 97
C3529 Spring _ _ _ __ 97
80467 Screw: 6-40 x %" hex. head machine. 97
d. Numerical Index for Spring TapeHolder.
Part No. Name of part Fig. No.
C3466 Bracket 96
C3467 Extension spring 96
165
-SIGNAL INDICATOR (VIEWED FROM REAR)
/10 10 01 — z—x z-x 7 7 - —
(£2) (Bg) (F) / - c 2 2 o a - ! 0 0 c 0 2 0 2 5 } c o a 2 ? 0 0 5 u J c ’ 0 5 ? 2 ‘ □ a r" c 7 < i r> •>; J c 2 < o a ; a 5
NOTES:
I. WIRES RUN FROM JONES SOCKET SIS VIA CABLE TO SWITCHES AND LIGHTS IN INDICATOR PANEL
2. BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO DRAW-
ING NO. 108234-2
JONES SOCKET SIS
/ (VIE WED FROM FF !ONT)
D2“2 Do 1
■n X
2 '■ □2~ 1
d2-£ —aLi r.B
F - 4 1 c.
F-3 ■h Jb s|
C2- 3 7 -T ■ Cg-I
NOTE 1 < °2-2 1 Cl 2
10 II ’ ”■ C2-4 1 > NOTE 1
b| " Ci-I
F - 1 S 14 U1 3
Ci-4
F - 4 T " ,eB E - 2
E-3
Di - 1 19 20 8|- 1
\ Bl- 2
22 23 " ■ Di 2 J
TO PANEL AND TURN1-BACK AT SWITCH D2 25 26 " ■■ Hi30! 28 29 ■ ■■ ■■ 33l 31 32 ■ B
TL 57IB7S
Figure 118. Signal indicator, wiring diagram.
166
167
YVARNISH TUBING FOR N0.I8-GAWIRE (0.042" ID)—7
7
| / 1 7,.\ > /3/I6" DIAM HOLE
RESISTOR------------------Tr—V SOLDERING LUG UNDER
1,0000. -z ±jL_ \r LOCKWASHER FOR CONTACT
A ) J3 I / )) SETSCREW
CAPACITOR---—V >■ /T
0.2-MF LX-________iXZ—I
\ O Ax
1 @
note:
I.CAPACITOR AND RESISTOR LOCATED IN BACK OF BELL MOUNTING BRACKET. 2.BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO
DRAWING 107160-1. TL57265S
Figure 119. Method of mounting and wiring of spark killer to alarm bell contacts.
LAMP
------------------- ■
AC-DC MOTOR
f'L./ ----7~\ J TIREX CORD^'^(HE) PLUG CAP
y y---------------------------------o o
FILTER""--. TERMINAL STRIP
__/ I -------
'pO.IMF | (HH) SWITCH
BRUSH ON SIDE OF MOTOR
©. ADJACENT TO TAKE-OFF SHAFT
X GROUND UNDER MOTOR MOUNTING SCREW TL57264S
Figure 120. Tape winder, wiring diagram.
168
I I-125 I J SELENIUM STACK
v=.-x;^=> ; IIIIIIIII1IIHIHII1IIIIIIIII1IIIIIIIIP
\ . -----, ______ I NEG AC POS AC
\ n a iso h---------------------- NEG
—\-----U —I >. ------1 CE 1--1 I
X / I CE < I
/ I < I------1 O I
—rn - o ।
/ ' £ O
NO. 18-GA | | 105 | w | o M-----------------------------------------------
TWO-CONDUCTOR 1 ----- 1-----' | S,
CORD I ___________ ।
bkFZV] ^plugbcable i3oonn^<-*----- । / ° r- w 16 a5
' _.JflMFL~ / 3 0-------*BR a______V-------1 R I I
I---±----> R *- . ° R 9 9 I R ?
I-------j-----I / 4 .____________•_____5J [ 8^7
y straps 5 0 W °7! L _
•!
GROUND SCREW T r I rl I"____________
I------------------1 zn 61cAZJ GI U _____ ____BR
! |~7 <-—-~-7> ~~ 4
Y /O'-7' I i z—x GROUND jrvyP°lMF°? J
CABLE J / l'?V' ll(Zn-——' SEE SCREW ‘XP^OOQIMFo)----------“< SPLICE
(,ncludes^e)_z ^1!!; 0 J y
I ! 3 § \ -— ...........r?R~yR~! IOjl
NOTES: I 4 0.^-----------------!-------1 < . FIELD /
FOR D-C OPERATION, REMOVE SHUNT FROM ! c Y R 001-01-0.1 MF I ____\___ ____G '~P't SEE
10 JL ANO 300 11. RESISTORS || ] I l~~ I ==^-------T i H V________-ZZ~2\ ySJ----N0TE 1
1'1 J. * '“'BK BK BK । I
CUT LEADS 2" LONG AND TAPE ENDS I I CAR ! ! I [ TjOOX: ]
I , n I n-1 n STRAP
ASSOCIATED CABLES | 1,000 4L |l (a) H LZ i
----------MOTOr LEADS I ! i *—*-‘U 1 110979 GOV CIR CABLE *-7— r 1 t 000/4 110767 POWER CABLE L Q-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FILTER LEADS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------fL ___________ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------110978 MOTOR CABLE CABLE FIELV0? CONTACT WIRE COLOR CODE___________________________________________________________________________________________________ \\J
CODE SOLID COLOR OR TRACER IN WHITE eRpUND
V-----WHITE----------------------- SCREW TL 57267S
G GREEN
BK BR BL S
YELLOW RED
black
BROWN
BLUE
SLATE
BASED ON TELETYPE CORP DRAWING WD-23OI-D
Figure 123. Multiple transmitter distributor base MXB8, wiring diagram.
170
NO- 18-GA TYPE SN SOLIDX
F FIXTURE WIRE (BLACK) \
/ pi F I
j / \ { ^Tr-FRONT FACE
----1----------------1 / (VIEWED FROM SOLDERING LUG SIDE) g —-RBK|-T | 1 5-----------------’ —-------------------------—’ OF DRAWER
F B L RI " 4 [ 7 ^'--x I" I I
,______ LRI-I----------B ■■■ 3|-R3'2 P2-24
p r—Pl lbi-,7L2===-s..— =—;j77 sbi'5i—v~\ X RR2'g7d—r~\SB~'
L,« L,3.3LEJi===-i,|Z_ sa,9 3-x ZXp'M
A 6 SOLID FIXTURE R|5-|-----1_8 " 2^-P2-2O 77/ \X SA 3 X\ZX XX
I 3WIREIWHITE) RR|-|----—Ml2|-----------RRI-T |-X----- =fA2-5 _ —jfepFRONTXX 4“ Pl'20 LR4-5—A(io) FRONT Qt-SA5-6
LRSI 'M* RC-R------—— —। — । ”””l c a g - 2 I o I —— (zx VIEW zx) , RBKI-T l^lzx VIEW zxl
J 2? Rl5'4------------T TI5I--Rl5'6 1 SPARE I SA5 2—I O RC P|-9_JgV RR2~L——V) E O'
/R9-2-----| ~ RC-B RC~4 -=^~ifalBt_____RI6-4 \ ' P|-|6-LBjJ_----- R]° Z^0^1 R6'3 P2 - 18-MX (s/-4-SAI - !2
g 7O J ---------S-£:,| RC , 2-8'O=^„ XX-»-,4_J p,.27ZpW)©>C-f «-23 p2-,9-E—
o_________ z/«\ cai-r_____19 20 " 7_z———SA2-I2 ------------. SA2-2 I_' ' I I '—
,n (J i Lj( J RBK2-8 ■■ ^■Z4I-RBK2-6 6 - PlZL ____ I 1ST LEVEL ' I IST LEVEL
t / \RS2/—V-OB T o4 PI-12 \8) A / KU 1- SAI'IO X®) z> z^ XZ-SA2-6
O ZX-P2-I2 S81’6 -XC----------LR4‘4 SA4-8 -| , X0 (gyZ-|-RB-5
^nn^szzL*1-; Rl8-2_____r 8 4 r—28 RA'3---------------HSB2’5 /
—J * LRI 5 LR2.5 ----------®|-------R2-2 OG MS—-CTRI-16 SBI-I2- 27 ,ncc / 2D LEVEL
l LR4 3LR4'6------— ■L8!___LR2-6 ________2ZTSA2-6 p2.|4---. 26 6_z----- 28 LEVEL SEENOTE3^^I____________
Zd2_I C3 I--------LR2-4 3 ^7 8 ■ 1 o SA-3
CZLeXT i ,j LR21 »“2'2 —==X'!I------------------“K2’T 1 LR3 ^SBg-9 522^=^74^9 RB-3---77— -BB-B3
:ps.; P2-3„»E^==^-i(3| 1 »RI«-f=7—7=1-9,-, , zw
_&Kj 04 77---------LR3'' CA, -RR2-23------------Rl5'3 Rl0'3---TC^------CTRI-12 1 X SBM-7-a |- RA'4---MMntXDH- RA’L
—7 \i----1 n 13 SA2 3 ■■■ — ■ ■ — S BI “ 8 c „ 2 rii-x-' I _I
gx gcTXK F--------LR3-4 16 17 ■ PI-8----®D ©2----R5.4 ---- R" 3 ,--------------1 VIEW RA-23
5\r=—, SBI-7 ^2l|---RI4-2 , , RBKI °---HSBI-9 /ggy | .
sae-sza-2-=£t-^24|—RC-6 R22-—:©— xuz^sb^o viC7]rr2
LR4-5 ‘ - MVZ^13 LM. .. A-l T^OC_pRB-L
ZD \\] C6 Q 19 SA4-8 —J--25-26____R24-2 ------------ 6"~RI4’-23 7---SA5'I2 3DLEVEL I
~Z\\ \ ..Irnyl // ft 21 RA 6 RNN-B ---f-------^—_ kSEE NOTE 2 no 8—--<'rr pg 25 6 —SA4-6
\\Y-(cR7}-y / -RA_7 RB_g2-^C~2AtLRls|-4 LR2 4----^-2s5A3-7 RA-25X-25 /-\SA-4
WcTVZ 0 22 Pl'25 -4-M7 29 ByMp2-l3 P2-4-ZX------A-P2-I 3^_| r~i--------21 pl’4----\5 |/--pl'l SA3-2-X" 6 SA4-4 I / \ (N0.28,N0.29 OR N0.30 ON P2) SHALL BE DONE WITH N0.20-
R 'I?____? ?| R - 9 | y 5 0 X\ -SA4-II THE INSULATION ON WIRES RUNNING TO OTHER LUGS ON
S4',-J p> । R3-g J '------'V I I r? s ° T CTRI-2 RN L I , RII-I—I AS R TO/ Rft R24-4--77 77-------1- SBI - 3 THROUGH 90 DEGREES WITH THE SURFACE OF THE WAFER
B.3|?2 9304, pg g ?'| \ |oX?1|A?,|h-,9 K4.,^x_A.ra.7 MJ \_/ | BEFORE SOLDERING WIRES TO THE LUGS.
I I H RR2-2|J r\" ' \ H---1ZU-L-LL2-1—_LR2.3 1---RNN-2 5TH LEVEL | 5- BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO DRAWING 108'230-10
PI-3-1 Ho SA5-8--------- । 1-------—— LRI-3
____________ I \ I -- L............... LR2-7 LR|-7---------------------------------------e------------- --- --- ---- --------------------------------1 6. MO.OOOO
R^fo2 2500 \ R-lgFo2 18000 I SPARE I R-?n ' RELAY PANEL VIEWED FROM REAR OR =70 = 70
I |____ Fx IT 0222224 °%, I b R 20 SOLDERING LUG SIDE. TL 57263S
P2-3J | I | ] 70 ______________________________ ~__________
I I* SA-5-J I ------------- ------------------------------1
R^lyZM^Myl ?2M^2M?| -R '3000 Z 1 SPARE I R-21 Zi I zl-------L. I 7~l I I ■
lr4-2h— —r H--------ft ------------------------- 14 14 14 14
Lre-sEeXJlhi.J V ____________________ I X I H ' LJ LR4-7 IL. |TT TT I I
p'-2'- \ P2 '2115000 ' I L LM- LR3-7;s4-3 |________si______|_S2_________
R-7| SPARE | R-I5|o6U5O4|Z\2 n'l |o'2M O2|o3gM O4|r-23 7 °\ 7 ? „ - M^FRONT EDGE OF DRAWER
PI-l5j-»p|.l3Jl|-T 4---1 'I lJ-RBK2-5 2w\ x S ~ AS S SEE NOTE 2
P2-l8_p!_L3-lp| |(_j L - RNN., RB-B - - \ p * - - -
I------------1 r-7-X /S=<----- . ------------ , ■ ■ ---- rA-B SEE NOTE 3
R-8 SPARE R-'6 ?V|? ?ImVm^ Xm ?2000 R’24
------------- p2-ii4-5oohl I--------J L' T T LL sa5-7 TOP VIEW OF SWITCH PANEL
PI-18------1 I---------- SA3.5
RBK2-B —1 1------- P2-29
RN-4— --------------- RN-B
Figure 124. Equipment drawer, wiring diagram. 823667 o _ 49 (Face p> 170)
POWER PANEL NOTES:
MON '"ALL WIRING TO BE NO. 18-GA SOLID FLAMENOL OR EQUIV-
TAPE ALENT. COLOR OF WIRE TO BE BLACK, EXCEPT GROUND
REEL I WIRES TO BE WHITE. A A t
I ] ' 2~IN ORDER TO OBTAIN GOOD ELECTRICAL GROUND BONDING CZTLr V
----x I I F0R THE CONSOLE, REMOVE THE PAINT ON THE UNDER SIDE SWITCH
I /Z—I 0F THE MOUNTING CHANNEL IN CONTACT WITH THE LOCK- SWITCH
I | WASHERS USED WITH THE TWO FRONT MOUNTING SCREWS /(tTJA
nPR_, I 2 I 3-BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAGH CO DRAWING / ZKZZ \ /XZ'
1 no ------I------------- 108247-7 //'X ' /#SZ \
HC L--------1_________ 6% (//' '
I 77! ——
I pUFPERc । PARTIAL FRONT VIEW OF POWER
|_REPERF_j CABINET
DC---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RECT
rUj)zq—
WHITE----* I \
INSULATION _ I----------------------------------------------------------------------------------HLkD—I co,
1 L Vi7 R I r-XoUl------------------ ---------- U/
x xi rLUr]
"i I F]FlFlFl i-hFFl FBZ
I FrxA - CM K> sr I L \F3/ R I
O । £ £ s £ i 1/
opr-2 HL—' J—-------------- d -----------------------------------Mux-
—I—---------- ° ° ° FAlllT
. l(oji x > ° \ fb3
ix । — L/L exl
—t — Tl ----------1—F? °4xi—
CONVENIENCE---------------------------------' I -RT~
OUTLET ___________________________ __ L—-------1
/ MPO___________________________ ________________________________
WHITE ->*' -------------------=2L_,
INSULATION -—-------------------- L — ■ --------
I v NO. 18 ~ G A ।------1 _Z ~
I L 1 ^nREXcVLE _J=^O>U U----------------------------------------------------H°£">2 I
---------------- j 07 ba -----------------------------------l_o7 oXL-J GSI r----------------------------------------------------------------GS 2 'ZZZIZIIZ
|------------------- -------------------------P4 s5 °T______________________________________H4 °5 °|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------U1 °31 _U>l FXoXl ______________________________________________________________-J-tttt—a-1-1------------n-TT----
I rUU '" /U v '
' V_Z । Zfront OF POWER CABINET.
I I I SEE SKETCH ABOVE
I I |o o| |
| L__l __J ON 2zn off________________________________ I
r~t“~ipo 1 ps 7z
I | 7s I rTI—h —7? rd-------------------------------------—
I ( __ ) ] POWER—* __________________________________Z~-WHITE '
I ~ CABINET , . INSULATION
L-Y-J UTs
i__________ j I z—V 11
7 GND2 - ___________ GNDI__X I
EQUIPMENT DRAWER-/ ____------------------------
CABINET MOUNT ING-A ' ' ' -(
CHANNEL (SEE NOTE 2) I;( TL 57I69S
Figure 125. Power conduit system, wiring diagram.
171
<°T1 n n TRS (VIEWED FROM FRONT) SIP (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
TB-53 ----—O-----TV MJI-4 -----p-O——IV pi| ___________ ___________________________________________
PJI-2 MJI TB-52 —TB-2(---------------------------7 ----------SIP-24 4 7^39------TX 3|---------TB-40
-------U MJ3-2-----a»“ ——---------TB-22 TB-42-----------1 —2 .
... V n _Vi n —1 1---------------------------------------»■« r.-V'4—
—1_£ MJ2 joUj, PJ2 TD Z5------------------j h-------------MJ4,2 .|----TS-4S
PJ2-2 ----O------1 B 26 1----LI ___________ TB-47-----------------------------aaa aX 12I-----TB-49
-------U TB-IO-----------12---J,1
>>-, n TRC;.7 P~| n TB-9-------«■ Xa is|------TB-II
TRS-4 _ TRS 7 -----T°3-----TV TB"I3----------------4 !
<~3TV X>------1 , MJ4 TB-I2--------«ao aX el----TB-14
x>----T MJ3 SIP-2 -----------cA----J TB-16-----------<2---I7 J
TB-2O ----o------ -----LI TB-15---~Xa ail-----------TB'17
-------U T B -19---------15---1° !
TB-18-----■■ 24|----------TRS-I
---------------------------------- 22 23 ■
ITS-2 LTS~I --------------1 I------------------SI-1 \ 27|
— E I it, I." - 1
LTS-6 -LTS 5---—O d 1 lid 111 Ido—----------------------———— S|-6
654321 123456
। T c - q LT S ’ 7-----------1 ।------------------SI - 7
LTS 8------------------------1 ।------------------------SI "8
SIP~14 s'lP-15- ~ ■ , I ] II, ~ n Sl'10 51 (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
sip-16------------o ddddd oooo d o—---------------------------si-12 Tq_„_________naZZZZ
12 II 10 987 789 10 1112 I D c ~| ■ X.
SiP-18 SIP-17—— ——■ r— IZ ZZ~7 51 ~15 si-|4 / SEE NOTE 2 TB-5 .-'.'ZTZZT 2 [ TB'3
SIP-20^-—==T1 F I-----~ SX'5 SI-16 T0.c TB-4—^-X^a |--------------TB-6
SIP-22---------—O d 1 111 111 i 6 O—---------^_Z_S|.|8 T8-7---- aaa ah |---------TB-9
___IB 17 IB IS 14 IS IS 14 IS 16 17 IB TB “II---------------T _
MIS-4 S P'23 I I------------------si-19 TB-IO--- ■■ Xa 12I--------TB-12
MJ3 4 Toe.n------------------1 I------------------—-SI-20 TR-14___________10___" ■
TRS-3 -----------------. I I ,....... =rSI 21 sl-22 TB-13--- — -X is!---------TB-15 /SEE NOTE Z
TRS-5 1---------o d 1 111 111 Ido—-----------————SI-24 TB-I7“b.|6=-^ J. ie|___________TB.8
o 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 Tn on 16 17 ■
TRS’8---------------------1 ।------------------SI _25 ° 20------------:----1 ■
PJ2'3 M ,2-9-----------------1 I I----------------------------SI-26 TB-19-------■ “21|--------TB-21
y M J 2 2. ........... । II (j f— -----s | - 2 7 / T B - 2 3_______9____20 *
SPARE-NO W.RES {■■ y | 3 | y y==..........................SPARE-NO WIRES ~
' , T_ 30 29 26 27 26 25 U. 25 26 27 26 29 SO Z TB-25—-----«a aX 27|------TB‘27
LTS-10--------------------1 O --------------------S2-I \ 25 26 a 2
lts-ii--------- . r......................... =--------t£_!_S2-2 I
LTS-12-----------1 I Z I =----S2-3
LTS-13-----------------1 o ।------------------S2-4
LTS-14--------1 Illi £ 111 1 I------------S2-5
lts-15------------o ooddd = ddddd o---------------------------32-6
36 35 34 S3 32 31 m 31 32 33 34 35 36
LT S -16------------------1 " I-----------------s 2 - 7
LTS-17 , ---- ---------1 |----- ------------------— S2-8 S2 (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
Slp~S S|PM------------- |~| I I - S2-I0 TB-32 ---------- ■ _ X,
SIP-5 ---------—O d 66 66 dddd d o—---------------------------52-12 k SEE N0TE , TD TB'31--------7" 2 3I--------TB-33
42 41 40 39 38 37 37 38 39 40 41 42 f 1 L TB‘35------------------,
SIP-6---------------------. ।------------------S2-I3 TB-34------mb aha 6|------TB’36
s SIP-0 ............... .....1 1 -- ep-.rS2-l4 TB-38-----------2----5 !
SIP-9 --------- . I , -----52 5 S2-I6 TB'37---9|----------------TB-39
SIP-10--------t 1 111 111 11 —-----S2-I7 TB-41-----------“
SIP-II------------O ododo ddddd O-----------------------------S2-I8 TB-40------aaa aX I2|-----TB-42
49 47 46 45 44 43 43 44 45 46 47 48 TR-44___________10 " ■
SIP" 2--------------------1 -------------------RP-IR ° -----—| . ■ k
B-l ----------- —-Z , ~________52 ...,n TB-43---—«“ I5|-------TB-45 Z SEE NOTE 2
Dll , B’2 .............I I I I I I----------- ----- S2-2I 2 20 TB-47-----------“
PJ|_3------------------1 ।------------------S2-22 TB-46------■■ ■■ i8|------TB’48
LTS-.B^-2. 1111 1111 S2-23S2-24 TB-50Fb-49 X 2,|I______________TB-51
/ 54 53 52 51 50 49 49 50 51 52 53 54 __ __ 19 20 ■
SPARE-NO W.RES ( --------- . I I . =~S2-25S2-26 TB’53 TB-52--24I---------------TB-54
LTS-9---- ---1 ,-- ---------S2-27s J tb-56___________22 ’
SPARE-NO WIRES 1 A 1 1 111 1 I? ' -]> SPARE-NO WIRES TB‘55 27[ x6'57,
60 59 58 57 56 55 55 56 57 58 59 60 30|_J-----SPARE-NO WIRES
LTS (VIEWED FROM FRONT) LTS -TERMINAL 9
TB-I---------O O--------TB-31
' 1° -«---LINE-TERMINAL
TB'2---------°2 CH;------TB-32 BRACKET
TB-3---------O O—-------TB-33 (
TR.4_________n Z2 To NO. 18-GA TINNED WIRE SOL-
TB 4 O4 ---------TB-34 DERED TO LUG OF TERM. 9 \ A
TB-5---------O. O--------TB-35 AND TO SHAKEPROOF LOCK- * 7/-irx „
T„ „5 _14 ING TERM. LOCATED UNDER XX-jA,------—
IB-6---------°6 °i5------TB-36 HEAD OF LEFT SCREW. (SEE L - _ 4.,_____J-L- - - -I
TB-7---------O? ---------TB-37 NOTE 4) J
TB'8---------Oa O-^------TB-38 7
T B ~ 57-----4D o -------TB-54
BOND TO CABINET-----9 18 1-------------------------'
(SEE SKETCH AT -------- SKETCH SHOWING METHOD OF
right) grounding cabinet
NOTES: 3 "'X
I ALL WIRING SHALL BE DONE WITH NO 22'GA TYPE SN SOLID INSTRUMENT WIRE OR AN APPROVED I
EQUIVALENT EXCEPT AS COVERED BY NOTE 2.
2 WIRE FROM JONES SOCKETS (SI 8 S2) RUN VIA TWO 27-COND MULTIPLEX CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK. \___/ /SEE NOTE 3
3 CAPACITOR (0.2 MF) AND RESISTOR (1,000 - OHM) ARE MOUNTED IN BACK OF BELL MOUNTING BRACKET >
TO KILL THE SPARK ACROSS THE CONTACTS OF THE BELL. f----1 , ,
4 IN ORDER TO OBTAIN GOOD ELECTRICAL GROUND BONDING FOR THE CONSOLE, REMOVE THE PAINT ON -1—q P Q
THE UNDERSIDE OF THE MOUNTING CHANNEL IN CONTACT WITH THE LOCKWASHER USED WITH THE V LT-| CAP p
LEFT MOUNTING SCREW. 'Q 2(?---1
5.BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO. DRAWING 108376-8 M |
TB-50 —1 >— TB-51
BELL MOUNTING BRACKET TL57262S
Figure 126. Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TG0-1A), signal wiring.
172
------------------------------------------------------— POWER SUPPLY TO -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------—---- EQUIPMENT DRAWER
L FILTER. I ill -1/ /MON TAPE REEL
Na ------------AUM- AXTOlUH) © §M ■ --M
। ' . 3___ "ecs , J rLrr) J-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0—'000A __ , Ml
j~~F I ~|____________________2 II 'is 13 33 ifla 34 34 W —1 --0— J 2 2000MjSJ'wJ + UPPER REPERFORATOR RECTIFIER
--VZ RNN--------------------------------------------------•-€>—D—A------------------------------------------------N0T£. 3 + -JMV' - MV 2000/1 <--Q_ jj2000 >■ (JT \ 1 o O Q
----— _________________________________ [7^4______________________ » J J FILTER. 3 , MJ-3 — | Y I RECT IN-£) ।==
rm rr~o—— MM -MJ r° ----- ’ Si 1'011 (Z3| - ■ —7^ rx_ I
L^J--------------------------------------------------;t._ _____________34 34 J ---------------------------------------------J.xTRr4*!”^ NOTE 3—y ? __ n lrsi IJI'M rectout---~(M TK
®ooa n b ? 9 ?WWi ♦-•cPt-_ ' |2'3r* I SAI 2 son 0x1 I lol 1 — Xs4-^ X.
r________------------------------------------------------”Z"/~L >M _______________W____s g ;• J. Z?SoS7ST M-rl -----------tM c““e T V
M-, BREAK 0, RBK2 -------------------------------------------------------------------L>-O-»---------------------------<< JMA ACCORDING TO \ / REPERF Vtf/1 V+
M Tamp IM ------ L______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________4_—1 Ml R6 RI7 POLARITY OF -a- >' SJ / T +
I S «R«« « J A H 4 4 jPIi 33 «> 10 K> ' ,000 A bjM____________r ” M-Awv2-- SUPPLY / \ JzJ |M~1
-------------^td Tho-a-^J I—L^uJ
|----------L------ orr-y_-OH | _______ FILTER. oa my MJ-4 LR52 Ul'U XTR
I------------------- 6^15. 13 13 13 IT IT iHj « ,0 14 14 ,4 J , Inropn . T8 - r-,____________________________________________________ L0 BREAK ,0'10,
UT^______r—YU SA3 key B XTC(LR-2) ,
,ff_<^SA3 lU£‘-U-0-4-UU_'L-S-A Do-; HjrUM MBfLrS 714 2 ! aflj J. 1XU-RI» M »oo’ sove t - ground
—_____________Rjzr5—MJ li00A • .as©a $a5 I yrx b-hj a—a—a—a—? >.”°. s -v--------
*RA 2000 A 5A5 rbB3 iSS^ E3— L>-A Q-O—•---roL <—-!22£±-L 25 25 JTJ_ F MiM
»J ,T------ Ji 1 —--- . 1^2 ^Mr!. 2 1 SO 20 20 rrH1 ■ cMM ’ fWKVMl R5
,r/ p ' ■ —-==□
f-T_____ 4 SA4 77" sb, 0 pMM------------------------------------------------------------------------p- - -------------------------------------------------------
CAA ' ,, ° _____________________ T — —----------------------------——-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 250 A 1
I_______1^ ________ J____________ "--------------------*------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +-MvM
4 r-----------f=M SB2 rot 4 RI RIB
MM-4-AZ-------------------------------------------------jr . . FTJ ~ 7-^- I ,^,w lO'Ma .....
2----M3 - jj l \ 5B2 1 ; 'r° '? J_ ■> 7 ? T. 1 1-0 r° R2Z 6jfj RS REC-'1 ? tL________,
SA4 SA4 RI2 S3 - T5 V “ A D-O—• ] x x —Lvww5—0-M -2000,A "1 -O C> ® —<•)—© D ® 1 I *®« 1 7~\ ALL FUSES 1.6-AMP FUSETRON
,000A I --------------------------------------■*------------- RIO 5 SAI M h SAJ 2000 A 7<4o-«^^ 1--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*-A/W—*----MM
|LJYYl7 " L Aw!-jjj| 23 23 S3 ijyfjA 1^3 52 22 22 jM?___________________________________________j- ________ 4 [_^--[>- -©-©—{>-®_। f LZ________
L-UVW1^—sjs |------------—__________________________________________________ '500 A ’M---------------------------------------------------------------<•>——<§>—®-S ~E—o__'a o3 V LzT—U W 40 A y—y
--- ---------1.300 A | tM RR| ------------------------- RIO 2—M SI 4 * 4 A A.4i?A ST----*■-AW—*_M7 . ,ioooaRI1 Rl3 “°Jm lMwJ -I 2^3 1 —♦—-o—0—® -©-©—D—®—I 9--,
-----MtY~L 3 JM - J -_______________________, LOWER L^AW— 3 5 5 s 5 5 35 .4_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________I______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ..£ _ZjJ ’"M-W/wi----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- »± 4__ FO2, ’Ir=J REVERE - -•—0 D ® -©-©—£> ® 1 vW-4- jCj
SA5 2V,n 3TTJ____________________________________________________________ rra I | ^.W'GNtr 0.2Mr -H—v-Y-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------z
R24 - 19 19 49 ,2 ,2 AlaW'l „ „ 4» IB ,8 i M3 'OOOA 1 A * A A. .A. Mo J
--------------- '" . -----;------ L-Lx-zowoj ° i --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1__________________M> y-M .----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------77-
SA2 o’ I I MJ-2 PJ-2 - . ? "f____________________________________________________________________________________________________________T T T T T T IT ,6 . I
-----------------------------1 17 17 47 10 10 9 9 46 16 16 » > ■ > 54 \ 1500 a f 1500 a “I-----£ £ Z A L . 1 [ I --tH-r5 Y »T - _- -®H-Hg- -o JMTJ-kx
> 1 l40 J t J , , „ ° ’ TIa 522 »«. ’ - CAXJNO CoLcTO* _ WOUND CWHCOTiON-________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ij
__.£ kA », _*. IM 4 A A » MX------- -•_______________________i__ 7 TO CONSOLE AT LINE ' TO CONSOLE IN M/
A—1 rs—4 D—(§WS)-o ZI____ sjM---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------y o3 S2 TERMINAL STRIP --£-- POWER PANEL / ? <>------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------—_. R9 ’j—1 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ note 3_ /
------ MZ ™ lM I-1— —==LI-“»’■», —। M 'V362------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MTTL--.. VAjJ Mi
AS----—----------------------iz-ML L__________________________________________________________________________________________ MhwM---------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------n _+n / 1-
1--------SBI '-o, — ■ ' ----------------- SEND LOOP REC L00P GROUNDED SIDE OF POWER SUPPLY
J 0 2 MF -—_ __
1000-A —J J
LEGEND: N0TE 2 " N0TE 2
• TERMINALS OF 27- PIN PLUG P-l
O TERMINALS OF 27-PIN SOCKET S-l
® TERMINALS OF 3O-PIN PLUG P-2
© TERMINALS OF 30-PIN SOCKET S-2
0 TERMINALS OF NO IA0-0 TERMINAL BLOCK TB
A TERMINALS OF 27-PIN SIGNAL INDICATOR PLUG SIP
A TERMINALS CF 27-PIN signal indicator socket sis
■ terminals of e-PIN transmitter plug trp
□ terminals of e-PIN transmitter socket trs
< 8 terminals of line terminal strip lts
1P1 ^3 I POLAR RELAY
SLOW OPERATE RELAY (ARM SLUG)
SLOW RELEASE RELAY (HEEL SLUG)
I. LIVE CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED L ON DIAGRAM + CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED + ON DIAGRAM - CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED - ON DIAGRAM GROUND CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED -±- ON DIAGRAM
2 THE * ANO - SIGNS ON THE EXTERNAL LINE LEADS MERELY INDICATE CORRECT POLARITY FOR SIGNALING BATTERY. THESE POINTS ARE NOT CONNECTED TO BLOCK LRS2.
3. THESE POINTS ARE PHYSICALLY GROUNDED. WHEN POWER IS SUPPLIED TO EQUIPMENT DRAWER FROM THE RECTIFIER THERE WILL BE NO PHYSICAL GROUND IN THE EQUIPMENT DRAWER AND THEREFORE NO CONNECTION BETWEEN LRSI-4 AND THE POINTS MARKED "NOTE 3'.'
4 SAI,SA2,SA3,SA4, ANO SAS-= FIVE-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH "SPLIT-NORMAL" SBI AND SB2 = TWO-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH "DUPLEX-SINGLE'
SI ANO SZ = TOGGLE 3WITCHES*OPR.-NON-OPR.*
S3 ANO S3 = TOGGLE SWITCHES "POLAR -MAKE AND BREAK*
Figure 121. Normal duplex polar operation, schematic diagram.
5. BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO DRAWING P-102 2 2
TL 57273 s
823667 O - 49 (Face p. 172) No. 1
— POWER SUPPLY TO ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________-__ EQUIPMENT DRAWER i_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________r.._I_------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ / /MON TAPE REEL
L ________FILTER. • ■ > I < r—p.
al«'« [&.». _X_— °---------*^°-J ai a. ai R6 ‘ (7 "|X7| -
i~o.A NO.* _____?--------------------»-O------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ A XTG (LR-I) t-iZ- y
'Lt-C;---------1 » .1 .5 13 13 h „ 1* N6fn__ ___<■ a””? Hilw-+ UPPER REPERFORATOR rectifier
---y~RN RNN_____________________________________________<-O—D * •& fr A______________________________-- ------------ p NOTE 3 +—™ - /4\ r,'.. ■ -1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------riLTe, w|i ~|,, MJ.3 — ——। t_ । .ecTIk—I Wife
L.^rpy s^J E — -Uy] L~' ®L e-111/x
2000s;r^AVA^-L MBf- 1 MC ..jTn W 1 4 4----------W » « « J L + —CROSS-CONNECT j^{ | LOWER —__CONVENIENCE -T \ / _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________• SA3_TYt 1000 4 4 - LS-S-i-S-A—j-xj^g&z-a—I—o-•—O J I-Q—Q- ♦ 1 °2 + ijoa ACCORDING TO -- REPERF -V v7l OUTLET 't/
BREAK 4 RBK2 4 J 'vI R6 RI7 POLARITY OF - / J/T I*
7 Rie, •• N « 4 4 lamp 3 , M ra n _____________________ft n- g ,, 4w-- 3UPP1-y ---— i—Mfil
_______________[_______ FILTER^ 0^ ,' ss MJ-4 LRS2 Ul'U XTR- -
I [y---------n = =^d------ n -----[h BXTG(LR-2) , TT
-------la-------------------- 24 SA’ SRI5« 15 15 IS '* '• 20 K » .4 » r^WRC MBrfi MC1 rmTI j~~r^ 7~^--Z imL * 2 ih, ' ' " ’ » RI9 . R” >IVE + - GROUND tdQf a--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Jtlijoo? - • —«-£ 2 luu,!
,JOOn|fc"1$ysA5-- RB1p^W ---y-? ------ 1000
>> ------823—y la ----------—R23 .RI4. ainsi so » » 1—»—» Ji ' | rWA°4 _x R5
a;i — ~-gFf —~" =^vl
"I Pr 4 SA4 * I r=P" SBI ° -----------------------0------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------—------------------------------ 'AW»
I > /s ~| • -7- ----- ---------- --------- - _ ]
4 /____________ j—;-----------------582 I foi ' t ri Rl8
g y f^rZL---------------------------k.^----------------------------------------------—----------। ; ““ 7^4^ —
Vr_____’ 4 - *“ T-fe, LiQaasOA 4 S + Joooa mj_( pj_, ----- ------ V 1/ vy
al >s--------c3 R5 'u" '*' 1 a 1 1 a a 3a 11 ? Y °_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SA4 5A4 RI2 ' ® ’ ? _________ ____•-<>->-«----1 L_z>_nlt_0_<>_> CM 42000,4 - L<—O—[V -® L-®--Hg) I_4_.__XvjU___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ALL FUSES 14-AMP FUSETRON
ieoo4,[—"J ---------*---------- «'O »SAI LW ah .. SAJ MO°A » > * » > 3 » la o
L—SA5 J -y~| «« S3 lUfl* 'UJj sa aa aa r~» ia « ° /» i I—®—o 0~-® -©-<§>—Q--® J -------MA 1 —
. ,~o.iRI1 Rl3 “Pbls ‘-'SH L^kJ L-0 -
o MW L n—45 -— -----------------Rjs , „ S»jS 5 S 35 14 I--, , ,LW—•__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
JS-4wa_____________________ U-H------------------------J FO2^ r----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- I lowerr ^^12--- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------L.___Z _7CT
-- y________________________________________L —----------------------™“°“T B2 I—^^4 L±>q r--e^
SA2 °7i-1 I 17 17 47 10 10 9 9 46 16 K 34 } I500» I |500a “I A O Fl 1^5 .(g» I-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------IP—X
L . —■ phrf.^ 7I~ —IfT SA2 — •—o—o-p—|-. -—o y.
... . Jgrr:.... -------»;k-2(i-'-4) lp=~~t~s~4:l' -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------—X7
r* . Di ■ y|„ 542 COWO a2»K->»« L3j c!j ^O.NO r Uy
!» IT • • T T 44 14 14 M CCo_2___ L—_______________________________________________________________________________________________4 _ V TO CONSOLE AT LINE 1 TO CONSOLE IN Jf / 7
r— A—rd— ----------dr—A D—(Oh-© o „ 5 7—q!_! E) -i M
•”" . ______-______________________________-.x-C 1 -rhXi 77 w______________________t?? ■ J. ■ ...' sssrs1 ...;i
r Czp s«», rb>*— I--- 7 L-J _____________________,,,, „ jjl. ssr-2 —4° rx i—Ori
. ■ 7- . - x .• - ■ x - .; . MT -------------------------------------------b-:^xrX- LMJ WW J —
--------------- 4r FILTER x "T1 5 S_ MJX LR5Z U||0 11--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------_=1— 5 ri54 o □ -THr. ,. 14W .. - &-* ; i pi
LL« ---—» ----s^u1X104 ? -r—4 AX! -r 8 ‘ M ,b > 3 XTC(LR-2) I I
-------MZ34sa? , 15 ,s ,s „ „ TTT; ’ r^TXn ”°rh -- W ; \ A i ma ™ ?n ™_>'VE Z-X GWO°^ wM, ■» । .zrrrz;______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________jlsls m ’ - ratM
1 1_____________-------1 zTZ S4 24 24 ZT 27 57 1------- R4
” t---------------Tj----------------—^, C> 1--------MsZ-H)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- —77—,
f—c___________T—0 1 io f 381 L___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 2so A
' 5^4 ' , > ° __ _____ + —xWV-*—
4 5 o -------------------------------------------------------------- 2M{1
1--------.' X___________________° /-----------------------------------------—-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Rie
4 -------------------------------4 5B2 FOI z Rl _
M --------------------------------------------------J ... /■ .4$. ., .................. .« MJ U’“™ I nn 1^ I
^~C___X ~H”I I kfl**”A ’H - *-cM * A -D-O-^ ~W7L MJ.| pj-l j—- — REC-|fLR-3) ~1 , 2 2 2 2 2 22 II ? M_
27 M: 0*^2 57 _L Go--. / 10 10 <0 14 14 O 13 SIS 9 JJ f-O R22 7-’» R5________________ 1 A r> A I— [>- A -A 1 ©>-* [)-O-» , |> > L_LvWW*—cz-g A 20007 -° X~QS) V~ ~W~ |-------4---------------------------------------------W—*-
SA4 SA4 RI2 ___ ( -----J---X--------- SAI H71 Pl <> SAI 2°O°J' ’A'l---- ■-, » » » * > > » !« o To
L—LmmIiI SA5 -£■ L-iMW-l-‘Lj—| 21 23 53 'HCl4 'My 52 22 22 X7* «____J> .1* —• ° ® 0~-® j 40a 1 FT-
lMMXxi ' f______________________J M---------------------------CW6>MS)-M IM-----------*7 4 4 4 4 4 4 34 A l——:----------------------------------------------------
---—----------11294 I T°Jg 2000a isooA | ® *-> D ® JH------------------------------------------------------------J -^2?- |fi=r-|"-«r-------------------------------------J -----L— SA5 R24_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________-„ is 49 <2 12 -TpLr n n 48 is >8 A [m °ro«A • 6 Q-Hg) -—<§>—0“-<8> [_ ° < I-(jM-
--------------------------------------- =5 mj_2 pj 2 4 R2 7 7 ’ A A A M I--------------' CM ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------:-------------------------------71/— --J XH L Mm H r-7—3—-i ----------cMmm------—° rJ-—t—1 rels key vrar----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------sbi •-op m ma-z; .. X—R22‘Sr_K^EEM±2Z l-s» . 1
■Xi rx-. 7=.. F”tj . saj P»i-r L^oi™. ra txJ ---------1 7
a X 1 s ! i « ; ; „ fdg g-;%CX^V,NE 4- / ( 7
jMSFX2)-X>—A-Xs— £j—A—D—©•-<•> °—do 9—M ?3 S2 NOTE 3 /
o_7-------------------------------------------------------------------— ——----------------• X —------------------ NOTE 3 I 1------_ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MM pM I1 —■— 'I V-M lmj 7342____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________,raLrML-—11 / 1-
O ----------------------------2 —p—p ___________________________________________________________ Hf—VW ____ SEND-RECEIVE grounded side or power supply
------------F 381 <—-0, - 0.2 MF--+J Mu ’ 100021 NOTE 2
LEGEND:
• TERMINALS Of 27- PIN PLUG P-l
O TERMINALS Of 27-PIN SOCKET S-l
© TERMINALS Of 30-PIN PLUG P-2
@ TERMINALS Of 30-PIN SOCKET S-2
0 TERMINALS OF NO 140-0 TERMINAL BLOCK TB
A TERMINALS OF 27-PIN SIGNAL INDICATOR PLUG SIP
A TERMINALS CF 27- RN SIGNAL INDICATOR SOCKET SIS
■ TERMINALS Cr B PIN TRANSMITTER PLUG TRP O TERMINALS OF B-PIN TRANSMITTER SOCKET TRS ® TERMINALS OF LINE TERMINAL STRIP LTS
IPI I") I POLAR RELAY
SLOW OPERATE RELAY (ARM SLUG)
SLOW RELEASE RELAY (HEEL SLUC)
Figure 129. Normal single operation, schematic diagram
I . LIVE CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED L ON DIAGRAM + CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED + ON DIAGRAM - CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED - ON DIAGRAM GROUND CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED -±- ON DIAGRAM
2 THE + AND - SIGNS ON THE EXTERNAL LINE LEADS MERELY INDICATE CORRECT POLARITY FOR SIGNALING BATTERY. THESE POINTS ARE NOT CONNECTED TO BLOCK LRS2.
3 . THESE POINTS ARE PHYSICALLY GROUNDED. WHEN POWER IS SUPPLIED TO EQUIPMENT DRAWER FROM THE RECTIFIER THERE WILL BE NO PHYSICAL GROUND IN THE EQUIPMENT DRAWER AND THEREFORE NO CONNECTION BETWEEN LRSI-4 AND THE POINTS MARKED "NOTE 3'.’
4 SAI,SA2.SA3.SA4, ANO SAS= FIVE-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH "SPLIT-NORMAL' S8I AND SB2 — TWO-3ECTION ROTARY SWITCH "DUPLEX-SINGLE"
SI AND 32 = TOGGLE SWITCHEs'dPR.-NON-OPR,"
33ANO 34 = TOGGLE SWITCHES "POLAR -MAKE ANO BREAK"
5 . BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO DRAWING P-10224
TL 57274 S
823667 0 - 49 (Face p. 172) No. 3
POWER SUPPLY TO EQUIPMENT DRAWER
--- / .MON TAPE REEL
i FILTER. ' • I << [—TX
rir YZ~ ' 0 ® ’O—: 2I 21 u R6 (-T-) L-I-J—। V
aj R 6 qM2,0A r------------------------------------------------------------------------------a-o---------------------------------------------------------------------------------D-q. • - A XTG (LR-l) L-U W
>1000a NO* ....q-q 61 2 2 2 'ooo a pig ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
i": 3_________ RELS NBrh NC i -’-y*n"JI I X-UPPER REPERFORATOR RECTIFIER
—o—£" I 19 19 19 Z3 23 S 24 Z4 » ‘ »-------------------------------------------------------------------------« Li-444-i O X + —JvJ l>442 ----I
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 N0TE3 V — (M__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________,_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _______?• 9 ‘,‘.“A2 SUPPLY , \ , 4 (1 ' ,4-, _(-0 5wd ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _....
’ r RI6, II II 41 4 4 L*MP 3 3 40 K) 10 f ________1000 A J ----------MO—♦ -OOO.-. IA I i A 3 _ JM7] TA/ ¥¥“
L-s«» ®-~© o-a •&—m a—cmx«>—?rr |-w£-j 4 n'ln XTR—” — ----
ALARM SW n. FILTER. 0.2 W , S 5 MJ-4 LRS2 II j | II
--------------i-____ OFF-S— -ON | ?—- M -----------------------------------------------------------------------------O----------------------------------------------------------------------------•-O- «. I—-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------z—H— Lz.?. ■_r~—Yz:".-» IS bxtc(Lr-2) ‘MF
t A. L JMzzjz- -j ; GTWj “’M
_____Y-MMJ '™a »-<>—u A -a ala^M-^ • M Fl’. SA5 I 4 __I. . N0TEI
2,1-- ,, R23 ^2 I -------- , I?.J % 2 I______-------------1 UtM-Ui-—---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
««r f . Mt------------------M---------------------------------------EMMJn-Y SM KXX.A ^y=!- —_ ---------
'”°n - M_________ S---------W * « 24 I 27 27 37 1-==J R4
«t 1------------2 Za 2 I-------------MM" (-MM#—1 1---------©-©—D--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- —ivwvJ-
*?—£ SA4 —□ 1 io^|2 SB I I_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 250 n
SA4 ' ’ ~ ~‘' 2 so n
I_________|O 31______________ ____ 4 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- o in
5 r- =______\ SB2 FOI 2 Rl _
.________----------------------------------------------------------2 M Hi “I Uzrax
7r sJMi T—o„| Ln,22504 ’M t D—A—1>—J4- jooo* MJ | pJ_t REC-I ('LR-3') 7 2 2 2 2 1 3 " ? r^°
M -----------Si—\fSB2 1 rV if ----------------I L^M-4-H^q £74^^ J__________________’____________tZMtX—-M7 all fuses 1.^ fuse™
SA4 SA4 RI2 _____ xUZa------------------------------------------------4---*—----------- RIO . 5AI Lt 2f] ,. SAJ 20004 333.^
LzXXzSn 1------------------------1 15004 ’ ?——r» rio XS—°3 4444 4 4 34 ,3 1——---—avM---------------77
________________1300a | t°tR RRI f ,2oooa iJ^T, T •----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------O-{)-®-1 (*>-*<2) D- -1 9 -------------
. l?ylB'!__________________________________________________________________________________________________________LU| LOW„ LJ^-J 122x1 JZZLzJ ' —Lus-L-M
--------I Z--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J FOB, |Jj=i liSSJ U|(JM«JF -4—0—0—®-J--------------------®-@—D—®— I -~~ C__ Z-> 1—VAv2------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------" 2$-Ti-rF7 ' ' , r MAGNtr °-2“r-F e » « * « 30 IS 1-0 '’"Im z"Z
Sas _____________________X--------------------------J. 4. 12 .24GL, ,. „ 1 LX "T --UZ-MJY---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --. L, X—r\ .---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------£7-----
------------------ ■ ■ ' I-—®-©—}) A -A—-J ty A I-©—MJ_2 pj_2 2 R2--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------, , 1 7 AX nJ I---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|——] SA2 q*'x.—, 17 17 47 10 10 99 46 16 >6 r-cj n „ X _•—o—D—®- -®—©—D—®—_Mr
-------------------------------------i'zM V ®M|J, ,E. S t ' ' ' 1---------1-T-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 -IX
. I, 4 IL^^WsM Vjtl "2 C«OW» eo® cere. t-XJ CZJ ' ‘M
I .. . . . J.28 4 JU 7 U TO CONSOLE AT LINE ' T0 CONSOLE IN JL2 J y
J , J kl> ! I I. I y 2< Mt---- T S----«?>S2 TERMINAL STRIP ’-±-- POWER PANEL / 9 °
4MST-K2ZZJ A—ri—J 1>—A—()—©*-<•) —26 27_ R9 0 1 3 52 __NOTE 3_ /
_________________□ t L I I1-....................................................................................... ................'I N0TE3\ Izrx 1 mTM
A S SB 2q————————JrrzLL.vL'^L ----u Y X-7] Mz
\----------------------------------—r1 8004 —------ n _ 1 /
0 o—----------------------------1 T □_ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ SEND LOOP NO I SEND LOOP NO. 2 GROUNDED SIDE OF POWER SUPPLY
____________V SB| ’—0| * °-2“f--J\ — J *- .. 3 l00°'n L> NOTE 2 M NOTE 2
LEGEND- +j RECEIVE L00P N01 +^| RECEive loop no 2
• TERMINALS OF 27-PIN PLUG P-l
O TERMINALS Of 27-PIN SOCKET 3-1
® TERMINALS OF 30-PIN PLUG P-2
@ TERMINALS OF 3O-PIN SOCKET S-2
0 TERMINALS OF NO 140-0 TERMINAL BLOCK TB
A TERMINALS OF 27-PIN SIGNAL INDICATOR PLUG SIP
& TERMINALS CF 27-PIN SIGNAL INDICATOR SOCKET 3IS
|P| ^3 I POLAR RELAY
SLOW OPERATE RELAY (ARM SLUG)
I. LIVE CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED L ON DIAGRAM
+ CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED + ON DIAGRAM
- CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED - ON DIAGRAM GROUND CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED -±- ON DIAGRAM
SLOW RELEASE RELAY (HEEL SLUG)
2 THE + AND - SIGNS ON THE EXTERNAL LINE LEADS MERELY INDICATE CORRECT POLARITY FOR SIGNALING BATTERY. THESE POINTS ARE NOT CONNECTED TO BLOCK LRS2.
■ TERMINALS Cr B-PIN TRANSMITTER PLUG TRP □ TERMINALS OF B-PIN TRANSMITTER SOCKET TRS ® TERMINALS OF LINE TERMINAL STRIP LT3
3. THESE POINTS ARE PHYSICALLY GROUNDED. WHEN POWER IS SUPPLIED TO EQUIPMENT DRAWER FROM THE RECTIFIER THERE WILL BE NO PHYSICAL GROUND IN THE EQUIPMENT DRAWER AND THEREFORE NO CONNECTION BETWEEN LRSI-4 AND THE POINTS MARKED "NOTE 3''
4 SAI,SA2,SA3,SA4, AND SAS«= FIVE-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH 'SPLIT-NORMAL' S8I AND SB2 = TWO-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH 'DUPLEX-SINGLE'
SI AND 32 = TOGGLE SWITCHE3"oPR.-NON-OPR."
S3 ANO 34 = TOGGLE SWITCHES 'POLAR -MAKE ANO BREAK'
TL 572 70S
Figure 130. Split duplex polar operation, schematic
5 BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO DRAWING P-10225-
823667 0 - 49 (Face p. 172) No. 4
diagram.
POWER SUPPLY TO EQUIPMENT DRAWER
—---------------------------------------- - J ^MON TAPE REEL
21 2i 2i R6 “T7 r*TZ V—r
m-12,04. ---»—O----------------0-0—• A XTG (LR-l) M
NO. -------si NO. XTR I — 2 2 2 IOOOA R|9 _Lj ftp
rels j mrn f---------------------0--------------------------------------------------i ___________________ 4 n , i00°'i wX —upper reperforator rectifier
7 । .. .. .. 2323 h -24 *Brn_^ z +z$zfr4p-+ --1
---Mp” ] c^zr- note 3 Ri» pZ ® _ U>W -Wn.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J"--zZn a-.fcsp-i.”-—I atCT ,„—=(») =gr=U
------------~^—r, I * ’»1 22 22 rd FILTERX Q2* , 3 3 mj-3 |- 3— I,A I 1 Asl ------TL ( s- . ?— ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Z , f 0 4a-, a A " ?-■—o - R3 Y'lM RECT 0UT-’~(V) —_7\
Rizi rTn 4 t.«_I qX)*104 d-J M___ , > __ l_RSI II X [_7 XX
RI4 4 ----------------------------------------------------------------_ 24 a4 24 -r-|- _ । jooo^j- note 3 -) I L_ _ _ ----------AW- Al , I Al ------X
L ~4 wl__o—A sAS___________________________•—O D_____ _____?-v FL1TR 1 T / »lP I SAI 2404 ------------\X7) 1 \7)- 1 ower convenience i A z
03 u w
Vr ’ZT- -T-’-’l -J_q,22S04 ’1 S 4- “ 2000A MJ-I PJ-I 4f7i REC-I ('LR-3') , , 2 2 32 11 ? ?Z__-__
21 °Z________Xm----21 X2 fU \ 10 10 10 14 14 13 13 9 9 9 ,-Q <] R22 L? R5------------------ 2 2 rs_ © [)— -6d---- 1 400 I X> ALL FUSES I.S-AMP FUSETRON
'----?o 2 - \sb2 —®-o—Zi-Z—iUw—l*-g—•—, ry ry lzz-Z: 42000a ■• -o o-Hg -w-w-u ।-4------------------------------------
SA4 SA4 RI2 ______ ________________________________________________________________*___________ Biri I SAI fa Hl , SAI 20004 t D ® @—© D ® ? ?_---------—— » 1’000-iR"-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------”13 LXWX-J 5 5 , 5 5 5J5 J4 ।--WU-PP
---------------------------------- > n=F—---------------------------------------------------------------------------------J--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- iF=rnpL°p- —-^ zz-zp _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________- 2?=7.-II , r .magnet 02 mf ee»6 L
SA5 2Ry X1-2--------------------------„ „ 4, 12 .aXXpl ,1 U 48 18 .8 1 LF yA -_____________________________________________________I----------------------------------------------MP-
--------------------L------------------------------------------------------------------ M._ p._ 2 R2 7 7 T , , , 37 I. ______------------------------I I---------------------1 SA2 \-i I R n 1’ L° a ! ! n “ 7 r41 r° 54>/°—jWmM-vml-_______________________~| • ° ©-©—D ® ------------------0 poJ_PP
1 g ~rP rH I Ih k SA2 1 ^^vwv-yvvvv^-_____________________________________ x 8 . 8 02 » n -o _ ^1
“f RELS KEY '“kpp-X--------9 SBI L-W—rZ. 1’ o ft Pr 'X? 2r> P .. P " R22 R5 REC-2 (LR-4)-s , ■ -Zp) .
. " 1 -A W L .♦. X. X 'sa2 ‘ I -------------------------$ ground connects | IP
gp SA2 20004^^-^^^ ^^ZtZnE - TO CONSOLE IN 0 ?7
y\ J-A \5x 8 ’ 7744,4 14 26 FX__________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________7—Q1 '/ 03 -.? TERMINAL STRIP --i-- POWER PANEL 7
-------------------------------------------«_L 27 M’S2 _____________ note 3_______________ / , ,_____________, _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ xxsrf 111 ..-z-l.—jj v.i£x i^2 SB2_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________^"pZSoP1- -«' 7 Z I_Z__
Z 2 , oZ—-, _______________________________________________________________________________________________ H(—WW J_ +~| SEND NQ.I + SEND NO. 2 grounded side of power supply
______________l^2 SBI *——o, 0 2 mf v~. X 'W. 1 looo-“ Z> NOTE 2 NOTE 2
LEGEND: +~| RECE)VE No । RECEIVE NQ2
• TERMINALS OF 27- PIN PLUG P-l
O TERMINALS OT 27-PIN SOCKET S-l
® TERMINALS OT SO-PIN PLUG P-2
© TERMINALS or 30-PIN SOCKET S-2
D terminals or no mo-o terminal block tb
A TERMINALS or 27-PIN SIGNAL INDICATOR PLUG SIP
A TERMINALS CF 27-PIN SIGNAL INDICATOR SOCKET SIS
■ TERMINALS OT 8-PIN TRANSMITTER PLUG TRP
□ TERMINALS OF 6-P1N TRANSMITTER SOCKET TRS
® TERMINALS OF LINE TERMINAL STRIP LTS
[Pl ^3 I POLAR RELAY
SLOW OPERATE RELAY (ARM SLUG)
SLOW RELEASE relay (HEEL SLUG)
I . LIVE CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED L ON DIAGRAM
+ CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED + ON DIAGRAM
- CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED - ON DIAGRAM
GROUND CONNECTS TO ALL POINTS MARKED -±- ON DIAGRAM
2 THE + AND - SIGNS ON THE EXTERNAL LINE LEADS MERELY INDICATE CORRECT POLARITY FOR SIGNALING BATTERY. THESE POINTS ARE NOT CONNECTED TO CLOCK LRS2.
3 THESE POINTS ARE PHYSICALLY GROUNDED. WHEN POWER IS SUPPLIED TO EQUIPMENT DRAWER FROM THE RECTIFIER THERE WILL BE NO PHYSICAL GROUND IN THE EQUIPMENT DRAWER AND THEREFORE NO CONNECTION BETWEEN LRSI-4 AND THE POINTS MARKED "NOTE 3"
0W
4 SAI,SA2,SA3,SA4, ANO SA5= FIVE-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH "SPLIT-NORMAL'
SB! AND SB2 = TWO-SECTION ROTARY SWITCH "DUPLEX-SINGLE
SI ANO Sa = TOGGLE SWITCHES OPR-NON-OPR."
S3 ANO S4 = TOGGLE SWITCHES 'POLAR -MAKE ANO BREAK*
Figure 131. Split duplex make-and-break operation,
5. BASED ON WESTERN UNION TELEGRAPH CO DRAWING P-10226.
823667 0 - 49 (Face p. 172) No. 5
schematic diagram.
POWER SUPPLY TO ---------------------------------- EQUIPMENT DRAWER ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------■ .MON TAPE REEL
I FILTER. । ' I <£\ XPV---
RI6 x ~ G ■ "3—' 2| 2i 2, R6 . C-) r*Tz— vJz
2JRI6 Up2104 .Mk;—0------B_H-)----------D-o—•—W axtg(lr-i) - W
<•000 A NO. -------\l N0, -p 2 2 Z 1000 A RI9 _MK
, T Mh WC1 IO -----> ----pocoMRMZM. UPPER REPERFORATOR RECTIFIER
NOTE^ . .?.,J
s7, ^gfl Mx=: — xr E> CCJ se
4r,4 Ml "J * ° ;4 ^‘7 rfag?r~ 17 Z ____—, - M-1 LMI 1mL 7 c I |x\
l^T"LT| --------------------------------------------------------imZml....J :'' .-r-_________________________________________________________w__________________”Ju_L’*' ♦mLi ssss^ |jJjp ~1 xL <»ss®« t xz
r tp .«« [3wg— I______________M ...... xxu- Rl’ M/-4 , AU hM LuJ
7 RI6 U II 4J 4 4 LAMP i J 40 >0 K> M _______________1000 4 V| --------------------Co—• M .0004 'A I 1 A3 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<7 OS' i==
L~ZL (JHs)—l> A tCr—ZU—7-*—CH§>—® XT7 -wv-it ' 4 M i 1 M xtr —------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------'
orf*M,AS* A- FILTER. °-2Mf ~i~ 8 3 MJ-4 U'lN
| 1„ ’ 22 ] L^TWi--______________________________SflL'30OA 2 --7--‘ ‘ N°T-3 [fa B XTG(LR-2) > J ' J '
TPF>B I 2 pi4>,3OOv 41 '« * I® 22 22 21 21 17 17 17 * -, SA4 ' ► ° < • 2L^ + —7^—
I ,o 31 4 s---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25011
1-----------__u___________________0 /---------------—--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- O|8
fs________________r— --------------4 SB2 FOI ____ 2 Rl______________________________________________
~-Q9---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
He---'<77- T-C UX122504 ’] g t ’ I 20004 MJ-’ PJ-' 47T R5 REC-l(LR-3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 32 11 ? tA°_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
21 -------- '2 21 X CM 1 / fC 10 IO 14 14 13 13 9 9 9 C—A 0-0—• 1 I 5 I > ——o--> .2000 a *-• O—U £9 m |------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------±-----
SA4 SA4 RI2 ____ _______________________________________________________4--1----------- R|O SAI H h .. SAJ 2OO°A ---,~ 3333 3 3 21 12 , M
GOO a ‘o 2 KlU 0 l,!TI -> |i ■ r~ 2. Z. U. z—>, zo. _z^k r\ a> T T ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
L—I AW2 5L SAS -f X-'.w/J_L*0-1 23 23 53 I4 'Hy 52 22 22 ______________4 92 — —•—O 0 ® (s7& 0““0 40 4 1 z-x
l-awLLc ’ !-----------------------J lioon ’ ---M@—D ? n iMMs)----------?„ ' ~ TZH-------4444 4 4 34 13 1——:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------He
!----—-----------~°° ' TlHg RRI r 2000A iwo4 I • C* D ® 8H© D 0 ? -----,
rii Ri3 5500 rm 1—— i—2v.w3 I 4011 1
e ,1000.5 U 0 1. u oik L—"vwr* 5545 5 5 35 14 I---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X 7—•-MAL
-------. , ,
P A ZOOOA VW ------ GROUND CONNECTION L-4— -- TO CONSOLE IN 0 /m
,3 13 45 e « 7 . „ n-U28 -_________4 C TO CONSOLE AT LINE ' T0 CONSOI-E IN / /_
Ji " h overall; J-8 contact arrangement; WECo #303A. Mounted in monitor jack box 4T91859
PAD, silencing: felt; 11%" 1g x 9H" wd x thk; Booth Felt Co #47 Grey. Placed under reperforators _ 4T109405
REEL; mts on front of cabinet; c/o reel w/bracket; steel; 4%" diam x 1" wd overall; Western Union #1046A. Number tape reel 4T1000-3
SPRING: helical extension type; 0.031" diam music wire; 3" 1g x %" diam; 50 turns; %" diam mtg plate w/#8-32 tapped hole in ctr ea end; Western Union dwg #10114. For tape holder 4T1000-7
TAPE: teletype; 1Xo,z wd; white; fiber board core, 8" OD roll, 2" ID; Fed Spec #UU-P-547A, type 3. Blank recording tape__ 4A2702
TERMINAL, lug: ring type; hot tinned dipped; for #14 AWG wire; %0" 1g x %2" wd w/%2" hole; Sherman #19. MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR Ground terminal on power cabinet. 3Z12025-5.2
1 RANSMITTER-DISTRIBUTOR: single channel; 115 v AC 50/60 eye, or DC, 30 w, single ph, series-governed motor, 5 unit code, 60 or 100 words per min operation w/10-spot target; 16" 1g x 15" wd x 5%" h overall; incl one number transmitter, Teletype code #MXD11, two message transmitters, Teletype code #MXD10, and one base, Teletype #MXB9 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only). Provides one number transmitter and two message transmitters to provide continuous transmission. 4T1000-10
TRANSMITTER-DISTRIBUTOR: single channel; 115 v AC 50/60 eye, or DC, 30 w, single ph, series-governed motor, 5 unit code, 60 words per min operation w/10-spot target; 16" 1g x 15" wd x 5%'' h overall; incl one number transmitter, Western Union #MXD-9, two message transmitters, Western Union #MXD-8 and one base, Western Union #MXB-8 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only). Same function as above 4T1000-1/Cl
174
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR —Continued
SCREW, machine: flat Fil H; steel; #6-40 thd; W lg; thd portion %" lg; head %2" OD x %" thk.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #10-32 thd; %2" thk; %6" across flats.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #2-56 thd; thk; %6" across flats (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
SPRING: helical extension; 0.010" music wire; 37 turns; %" lg x 0.130" diam overall.
WASHER, flat: steel; #4; %4" ID W OD, 0.035" thk.
COIL, solenoid: electromagnet; single wound, 105 ohms DC resistance; 1%" lg x 1" wd x 1%" h overall.
WASHER, flat: steel; 0.120" ID, 0.375" OD, 0.035" thk.
MODIFICATION KIT: consists of mtg plate, cover, and necessary hdw.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40 thd; %" lg; head %a" diam x %4" thk.
SCREW, machine: Bind H; steel; #4-40 thd; %" lg; thd portion 0.219" lg; head %" diam x 0.063" thk.
SCREW, machine: R H; brass; #6-32 thd; %" lg; head 0.251" diam x 0.097" thk.
SCREW, thumb: knurled head; steel; #6-40 thd; %" lg; thd portion %6" lg; head %8" diam x %2" thk; shoulder %2" diam x %2" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40 thd; %6" lg; hd 0.217" diam x 0.119" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40 thd; %" lg; head 0.217" diam x 0.119" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #4-40 thd; %" lg; head 0.175" diam x 0.096" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #4-40 thd; %6" lg; head 0.175" diam x 0.096" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #2-56 thd; jKe" lg; head 0.135" diam x 0.067" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #4-40 thd; %6" lg; thd portion %2" lg; head 0.176" diam x %4" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40 thd; 0.438" lg; head 0.217" diam x 0.119" thk.
SCREW, machine: flat top Bind H; steel; #4-40 thd; 1%2" lg; thd portion %2" lg; head diam %2" thk; shoulder 0.155" diam x kio" lg.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #10-32 thd; 1%" lg; thd portion 1%" lg; head 0.303" diam x 0.164" thk.
Base plate_______________________
4T33-158
Center contact governor assembly.
Contact part__________________
Selector lever assembly__________
Selector lever assembly. Release bar contact assembly and top plate.
Base plate_______________________
Base plate, covers___________________
4T200-1348
Replaces plastic tape retaining lid with steel hinged type retaining lid.
Base plate, base (top)___________
Base plate, base (bottom)________
Governor_____________________
Covers_______________________
Shaft assembly___________________
Selector lever, filter assemblies, and base (bottom).
Selector lever, release bar contact assembly, feed pawl.
Base plate_______________________
Base plate, selector lever assembly.
Release bar contact, governor brush and speed adjusting assemblies, and letter sensing mechanism.
Base plate_______________________
Base plate_______________________
Base plate (top), base (bottom).
4T34-4
4T34-11
4T35-70
4T103-27
4T177M
4T1000-6
4T1026
4T1028
4T1064
4T1073
4T1160
4T1161
4T1162
4T1163
4T1164
4T1168
4T1169
4T1174
4T1258
175
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol y
Name of part and description
Function of part
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR
-—Continued
SCREW, machine: FH; steel; #6-40 thd; 0.313" ig; thd portion 0.237" 1g; head 0.268" OD x 0.076" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40 thd; Vi" 1g; head %2" diam x %4" thk.
WASHER, lock: steel; split ring type; 0.141" ID, 0.251" OD, 0.031" thk.
WASHER, flat: brass; %4" ID, %" OD, 0.034" thk
INSULATOR, plate: rectangular; bakelite; 2%" 1g x 0.438" wd x 0.094" thk over-all.
BUSHING: spacer; steel; 0.189" ID, 0.312" OD, 0.154" thk.
INSULATOR, bushing: tubular; bakelite; %4" ID, 0.215" OD, %6" 1g.
WASHER, lock: steel; split ring type; 0.200" ID, 1%4" OD, 0.047" thk.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.014" music wire; 21 turns; %e" 1g x 0.181" diam overall.
WASHER, flat: steel; %6" ID, OD, 0.053" thk.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #6-40 thd; %2" thk; %" across flats.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #4-40 thd; %2" thk; across flats.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.024" music wire; 26 turns; 1" 1g x 0.223" diam overall.
WASHER, lock: steel; split ring type; 0.120" ID, 0.210" OD, 0.035" thk.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.013" music wire; 26 turns; %e" 1g x %2" diam overall.
BEARING, ball: single row radial; 0.5118" bore, 1.1811" OD x 0.2756" wd.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #2-56 thd; %" 1g; head 0.135" diam x 0.068" thk (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
CONTACT ASSEMBLY, switch: governor; single tungsten cont %" OD x y16" thk; 12%2" 1g x %" h x %" thk overall.
CONTRACT, governor: screw type; #6-32 screw 'wW diam tungsten cont welded to head; 0.385" 1g overall.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.033" music wire; 19 turns; l%e" 1g x 0.259" diam overall.
Y HEEL ASSEMBLA’: leather disk w/steel plate ea side, 0.341" diam bearing hub w/shoulder, adjusting screw inside hub w/stop pin and spring hole at end; 1.464" diam x 1" d overall.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-32 thd; 0.344" 1g; head 0.187" across flats x 0.094" thk.
Base plate______________________
Shaft assembly, base (top), base (bottom).
Base plate, base (bottom)_______
Contact lever assembly__________
Contact lever assembly__________
Contact lever assembly__________
Base plate, base (bottom) motor, center contact governor assembly.
In base plate___________________
In base plate, resistor bracket assembly, center contact governor assembly.
In selector lever contact lever, top plate,letters-sensing mechanism, and motor-governor filter assemblies.
In base plate, release bar, letters-sensing mechanism, and covers (top).
Letters-sensing mechanism_______
In selector lever assembly______
In motor unit assembly__________
Contact spring in center contact governor assembly.
Contact screw in center contact governor assembly.
In center contact governor assembly.
Governor adjuster_____________
In clamp of center contact governor assembly.
4T1268
4T1269
6L73006
4T2438
4T2504
4T2526
4T2529
4T2669
4T2836
4T3438
4T3598
4T3599
4T3610
4T3640
4T4703
4T5061
4T5740
4T6314
4T6320
4T6323
4T6324
4T6344
176
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR
—Continued
NUT, hexagon: steel; #6-32 NC-2; %2" thk; %" across flats.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40 thd; lg; head 14" across flats x %2" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40 thd; %" lg; head %" across flats x %2" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, %6" OD, 0.032" thk.
ROLLER, lever: steel; 0.189" ID, 0.312" OD, 0.117" lg.
LEVER: steel;gooseneck shape; 1.578" Igx 1.536" wd x 0.065" thk overall.
GEAR: clutch; steel; 30 ratchet teeth on one side; %" diam x 0.412" d overall, 0.376" shaft hole, counterbored on tooth end.
GEAR: steel; 30 ratchet teeth on one side; %" diam x %" d overall, 0.376" shaft hole, counterbored on tooth end.
SCREW, pilot: Fil H; steel; #4-40 thd; 0.422" lg; thd portion 0.135" lg; head 0.188" diam x 0.078" thk.
ROLLER, lever: steel; 0.080" ID, 0.125" OD, x 0.172" lg.
BRUSH, electrical contact: carbon; rectangular, %" lg x %" wd x thk w/compression spring
and end cap, 2%b" lg x %" OD overall.
SCREW, machine: Bind H; steel; #6-40 thd; J4" lg; head J4" diam x J46" thk.
SHIM: contact mtg; steel; 0.140" ID, OD, 0.005" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; %" ID, J4" OD, 0.039" thk_
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #10-32 thd; lg; thd portion %" lg; head %" across flats x %" thk.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.014" music wire; 60 turns; 1%" lg x %2" diam overall.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.018" music wire; 20 turns; 1j4e" lg x jKe" diam overall.
CAP: contact brush; bakelite; %" lg x 2%2" diam overall.
SPRING: helical compression; 0.086" music wire; 3 turns; 3%4" lg x 1%4" diam overall.
SCREW, pilot: Fil Bind H; steel; #6-40 thd; y2" lg; thd portion 0.438" lg; head W diam x 0.094" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40 thd; %" lg; thd portion %" lg; head %" across flats x 0.094" thk.
WASHER, flat: felt; ID, OD, Xe" thk (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
In center contact governor assembly.
Base plate, shaft assembly, motor, governor brush, and speed-adjusting bracket assembly.
Contact lever assembly, base (top).
Feed lever_____________________
Operates keyboard transmitter contacts.
In shaft assembly______________
Clutch gear____________________
In top plate (bottom)__________
In top plate (bottom)__________
In governed-motor unit_________
In base plate, shaft assembly covers, and top plate.
Base plate, selector lever assemblies, and top plate.
In top plate (bottom)__________
In base plate__________________
In base plate and release bar contact assembly, and feed pawl.
In selector lever assembly-----
Brush holder in motor unit-----
Motor end play spring__________
In top plate (bottom)__________
6L3606-32-4.3 (formerly IT-6345).
4T6746
4T6811
4T7002
4T7027
4T7318
4T7389
4T7391
4T7678
4T7679
4T8094
4T8543
4T8896
4T41675 4T44035
4T55090
4T60669
4T70873
4T71999
4T72096
4T72508
4T72563
In main shaft assembly
177
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR —Continued
CONTACT, governor: screw type; #2-56 screw w/X" tungsten cont welded to head; 0.148" 1g overall.
WASHER, flat: felt; %" ID, 1%6" OD, %6" thk__ WASHER, flat: steel; 0.096" ID, 0.172" OD, 0.042" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40 thd; %2" lg; head %" across flats x %2" thk_
SCREW, machine: flat top Bind H; steel; #6-40 thd; 1g; thd portion %6" 1g; head %6" diam x %4" thk; shoulder %2" diam x Xe" 1g.
SPRING: helical compression; 0.024" music wire;
8 turns; %" 1g x 0.243" diam overall.
WASHER, flat: steel; Xe" ID, %6" OD, 0.011" thk.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.016" music wire; 39 turns; 0.1500" OD x 0.924" 1g overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
BEARING, sleeve: headless; steel; 0.140" ID, 0.250" OD, 0.218" 1g overall.
SCREW, machine: Bind H; steel; #4-48 thd; %2" 1g; head %" diam x %2" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #10-32 thd; %" 1g; head %6" across flats x %" thk.
ARM ASSEMBLY: nickel silver or steel; 3%" 1g x Xe" wd x 1%2" h overall w/X" diam x %" 1g cont brush soldered to one end, flat spring on opposite end.
ARM ASSEMBLY: nickel silver or steel; 3%" 1g x Xs" wd x1%2" h overall w/X" diam x X" 1g cont brush soldered to one end, flat spring on opposite end.
BRUSH, electrical contact: carbon; 1%4" 1g x X" diam w/spring X" diam x Xs" lg-
CONTACT, governor: screw type; #10-32 screw w/cont welded to head; 2%2" lg overall.
COVER: governor center cont; steel, bakelite insulation; 3%" diam x X" d overall.
CONTACT, governor: flat spring; hook shape;
1 *%4" lg x 0.531" wd x 4%4" d overall w/0.159" thk nickel silver cont on one end.
CONTACT, governor: flat spring; hook shape; P%4" lg x 1%2" wd x 2%2" d overall w/0.159" thk nickel silver cont on one end.
SCREW, machine: spcl head; steel; #4-40 thd; 1%2Z/ lg; thd portion of Xs" lg; head X" diam x %2" thk; shoulder %2" diam x Xs" lg.
WASHER, flat: steel; %" ID, 1%2" OD, 0.035" thk.
SCREW, machine: hex head; steel; #6-40 thd; X" lg; head X" across flats x %2" thk.
SPRING: helical compression; 0.038" music wire; 5X turns; 0.637" lg x 0.733" diam overall.
Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
Contact point in governor 4T72835
In governed-motor unit 4T73232
In selector lever assembly 4T73844
Selector lever and motor gover- 4T74059
nor filter assemblies. In top plate (bottom). 4T74171
In contact lever assembly 4T75606
In contact lever assembly _ 4T75607
Feed pawl spring 4 T76379
Bushing in top plate 4T 76532
In governed-motor unit 4T78025
Base (bottom), motor 4T78301
Contact for outer disk, governor 4T78399
brush and speed adjusting assembly.
Contact for inner disk; governor 4T78400
brush and speed adjusting assembly.
In governor brush and speed 4T78403
adjusting bracket. Outer contact disk in center 4T78443
contact governor assembly. Center contact governor assem- 4T78451
bly. Outer disk contact spring 4T78496
Inner disk contact spring 4T78497
Feed pawl 4T80283
In 6708 motor 4T80312
Tn governor brush and speed 4T80444
adjusting bracket, and base plate.
In shaft assembly 4T80471
178
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR —Continued
SCREW, machine: hex head; steel; #4-40 thd; %" lg; head 0.188" across flats x %2" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel;
#6-40 thd; %6" lg; head %" across fiats x %2" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; 0.196" ID, 0.625" OD, 0.065" thk.
STUD, steel; stud end #6-40 thd %s" lg, bearing end 1.034" lg x %6" OD w/#6-40 thd 0.219" lg; 1.502" lg x 0.355" OD overall.
SCREW, set: slotted; headless; steel; #10-32 thd; 0.188" lg; oval point.
INSULATOR, bushing: tubular; 0.095" ID, 0.142" OD, 0.093" lg w/shoulder 0.219" OD x 0.049" thk; 0.140" lg x 0.219" OD overall.
WICK: oiling; felt; %2" diam x %6" lg________
FITTING: 90° angle; 2%2" lg x 1%2" wd x 1%2" h overall w/shank thd #10-32, %" lg from vert ctr.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #10-32 thd; 0.094" thk; %" across flats.
BEARING, sleeve: steel; 0.113" ID, 0.171" OD, 0.143" lg overall w/head 0.312" OD x 0.073" thk.
WASHER, lock: steel; internal teeth; for #2 screw, OD x 0.010" thk.
SCREW, machine: straight side Bind H; steel; %"-20 thd; 0.469" lg; thd portion 0.219" lg; head %" diam x 0.109" thk; shoulder %2" diam x %" lg.
SHIM: governor; steel; %" ID, OD, 0.012" thk.
PIN, clevis: 0.029" music wire; %" lg x W wd_
BUSHING: spacer; steel; %4" ID, OD, %6" thk.
ARMATURE, electromagnet: soft iron w/brass plate; l%e" lg x wd x %" thk w/two #4-40 tapped holes on top side.
WICK: oiling; felt; diam x %" lg_____________
PLATE, mounting: right side; steel; 3.334" lg x iy2" wd x %e" thk.
PLATE, mounting: left side; steel; 3.334" lg x 1H" wd x %" thk.
SHAFT: cam; steel; 45%4" lg x %" diam overall.. BAR, guide: brass; 4X%2" lg x 1%4" wd x %6" thk__ BAIL: 0.065" steel; U-shaped; 1%" lg x 0.702" wd x 0.762" h overall.
ARM: steel; irregular shape; 2%4" lg x 0.801" wd x 0.065" thk.
BEARING, sleeve: headless type; steel; 0.127" ID, 0.186" OD, 0.135" lg.
LEVER: steel; L-shaped; long leg 1.793" lg, short leg 1.662" lg x 0.319" overall.
LEVER: steel; 2.371" lg x %" wd x 0.068" thk overall.
In top plate (top), top plate (bottom).
In base and motor governor filter assembly.
In 6708 motor___________________
In letters-sensing mechanism____
In base (top)___________________
In governor_____________________
In base plate___________________
For pressure lubrication________
In base plate___________________
Bushing in release bar contact assembly.
Selector lever assembly_________
Base (bottom)___________________
In 6708 motor___________________
For floating lever______________
In base plate___________________
In base plate___________________
In base (top)___________________
Side frame of base plate and shaft assembly.
Side frame of base plate and shaft assembly.
In distributor shaft assembly___
Selector lever guide____________
Selector lever assembly_________
Extension selector lever bail---
Selector lever assembly_________
Tape-out lever__________________
Feed pawl_______________________
4T80957
4T82440
4T84579
4T86209
4T86341
4T86868
4T89881
4T89896
4T89897
4T90539
4T90791
4T90952
4T91617
4T92175 4T92685
4T93463
4T97481 4T97501
4T97503
4T97506
4T97512
4T97514
4T97515
4T97516
4T97523
4T97525
179
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR -—Continued
LEVER: steel; irregular shape; 1.564" lg x 1.118" wd x 0.068" thk overall.
BRACKET: steel; 1.344" lg x %6" wd x 0.669" thk overall; 2 mtg ears w/two 0.156" diam holes.
LEVER: steel; 2%2" lg x 1.313" wd x 0.628" thk overall.
STIFFENER, contact spring: 0.010" nickel silver grade B; 1.562" lg x 1.375" wd overall w/6 fingers 0.156" wd spaced 0.063", solder lug term one end.
STIFFENER, contact spring: 0.010" nickel silver grade B; 1.375" lg x 0.875" wd overall w/1 finger and 1 solder lug term.
CONTACT, switch: 0.020" nickel silver grade B; 6 cont w/bumpers; 2.062" lg x 1.562" wd x 0.144" thk overall.
CONTACT, switch: 0.020" nickel silver grade B; single cont w/bumpers; 2.062" lg x 0.875" wd x 0.144" thk overall.
CONTACT, switch: stop type; 0.040" nickel silver grade B; 6 cont; 1.563" lg x 1.562" wd x 0.107" thk overall.
CONTACT, switch: 0.403" nickel silver grade B;
• single cont; 1.503" lg x 0.875" wd overall.
LEVER: contact assembly; steel; irregular shape; 2.813" lg x 1.849" wd overall.
PAWL: ratchet; steel; irregular shape; 1.563" lg x 1.114" wd x 0.188" thk overall.
LEVER: letters oper assembly; steel; 2.252" lg x 1.910" wd x 0.809" h overall.
LATCH, lever: steel; 1.125" lg x 1.812" wd x 0.065" thk overall.
SPROCKET, tape: straight feed; consists of ratchet wheel w/32 teeth, sprocket w/32 teeth, hub 0.812" OD w/ends csk 60° for pivot; steel; 1.078" OD x 1.313" lg overall.
LEVER: sensing mechanism; steel; 1.514" lg x 1.441" wd x 0.065" thk overall.
GEAR: spur; bakelite; main shaft; helical; RH; 39 teeth; 22 pitch, 1.9895" PD; 2.080" OD, 0.502" bore; straight face.
BEARING, sleeve: steel; 0.156" lg overall, bushing 0.1935" ID, 0.246" OD, 0.086" lg; head 0.438" OD x 0.070" thk.
LEVER: steel; J-shaped; 2.203" lg x 1.687" wd x 0.307" d overall.
SHIM: steel; 0.316" ID, %" OD, 0.005" thk___
SPRING: helical extension; 0.024" music wire;
16 turns; 1%o" lg x %6" diam overall.
FELT: lubricating; 1.438" lg x 0.625" wd x 0.094" thk.
LEVER: selector #1; steel; 1.944" lg x 1.579" wd x 0.200" thk overall w/offset to right.
LEVER: selector #2; steel; 1.944" lg x 1.579" wd x 0.079" thk overall w/offset to right.
Feed-pawl arm 4T97526
For feed roll-. 4T97527
Clutch lever, base plate 4T97529
In contact lever assembly. 4T97531
In contact lever assembly 4T97532
In contact lever assembly 4T97533
In contact lever assembly 4T97534
In contact lever assembly 4T97535
In contact lever assembly 4T97536
In contact lever assemblv 4T97537
Contact lever 4T97538
In letters-sensing mechanism 4T97544
In base plate 4T97545
Feed roll in top plate (bottom) __ 4T97555
Detent lever in top plate.. 4T97557
In base (top) 4T97576
Guide bushing in base plate 4T97583
Letters-operating release arm 4T97931
For driving clutch 4T98361
In contact lever assembly 4T98636
Oiling felt in base plate 4T99117
In selector lever assembly 4T99259
In selector lever assembly 4T99260
180
Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR —Continued
LEVER: selector #3; steel; 1.944" 1g x 1.579" wd x 0.079" thk overall w/offset to left.
LEVER: selector #4; steel; 1.944" 1g x 1.579" wd x 0.200" thk overall w/offset to left.
LEVER: selector #5; steel; 1.944" 1g x 1.579" wd x 0.319" thk overall w/offset to left.
SCREW, machine: hex head; steel; #6 40 thd; 0.294" 1g; thd portion 0.147" 1g; head %" across flats x 0.062" thk; shoulder 0.187" diam x 0.122" 1g.
GUIDE, punch: tape cont pin; steel; L-shaped; 1.188" 1g x wd x thk overall.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.024" music wire; 14 turns; 0.688" 1g x 0.200" diam overall.
SPRING: helical extension; 0.018" music wire; 15 turns; 0.512" 1g x 0.155" diam overall.
WICK: oiling; felt; %2" diam x %" 1g___________
CAM ASSEMBLY: steel; 22%2" lg x 0.830" OD overall.
SCREW, machine: straight side Bind H; brass; #8-32 thd; %e" lg; head 0.335" diam x %2" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #4-40 thd; 0.281" lg; head 0.177" diam x 0.079" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; 0.078" ID, 0.188" OD, 0.012" thk.
INSULATOR: bakelite; 0.147" ID, 0.215" OD, 0.514" lg (this item used in the AN/TGC-1A only).
GEAR: spur; bakelite; helical; LH; 53 teeth; 30 pitch, 1.9367" PD; 2.0033" OD, 0.502" bore; straight face.
CABLE ASSEMBLY: 8 #20 AWG stranded copper cond, rubber jacketed; 37" lg; Jones HB #P-308-CCT, 8 cont male connector one end, other end tinned.
CABLE ASSEMBLY: 2 #18 AWG stranded copper cond, rubber jacketed; 4514" lg excl termination; Hubbell #9202, 2 cont male connector one end, 2 ring type term other end.
SPRING: flat; steel; 1%" lg x %" wd x %" d overall.
BRACKET: L-shaped; steel; long leg 1" lg, short leg 0.845" lg x 0.532" wd overall.
COVER: steel; 21%2" lg x 1" wd x 1%2" d overall.
BRACKET: U-shaped; steel; 1.315" lg x %0" wd x 0.531" d x 0.095" thk overall.
MODIFICATION KIT MX-759/FG: for Teletype model #MXB8 transmitter-distributor base (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
WORM, gear: steel; 12 teeth, 28 pitch, 1.2703” PD, 3.25 to 1 ratio; 1.625" lg overall, gear 0.750" lg x 1.3417" OD, shank 0.875" lg x 0.688" diam, 0.312" diam bore x 0.062"d (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
In selector lever assembly_____
In selector lever assembly.____
In selector lever assembly_____
Feed pawl part_________________
In top plate (bottom)__________
Feed pawl part_________________
In top plate (bottom)__________
In base plate__________________
Main keyboard shaft____________
In base (top)__________________
In top plate (bottom) _________
In top plate (bottom)__________
Bushing________________________ _
Main drive gear______ _________
Power cable assembly___________
Power cable assembly___________
Tape lid_______________________
Tape lid mounting______________
Hinged tape retainer___________
Tape lid mounting______________
To convert transmitter-distributor from 60 to 100 words per minute operation.
Pinion gear____________________
4T99261
4T99262
4T99263
4T99278
4T99283
4T101385
4T101386
4T101591 4T101766
4T101833
4T102052
4T102839 4T109359
4T110651
4T110766
4T110768
4T110777
4T110778
4T110780 4T110781
4T111263
4T111264
181
Signal Corps stock
No.
Kef. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
R
K
M
PO-2
PO-1
F-l thru F-5
FB-3
MULTIPLE TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR —Continued
GEAR: helical; canvas base bakelite; 39 teeth; 28 pitch, 1.4796" PD; 0.502" ID, 1.551" OD, %" thk; straight face (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
SPRING: helical extension; 0.014" music wire; 16 turns; 0.181" OD x 0.516" lg overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
STIFFENER, contact spring: steel L-shaped; 1.532" lg x 0.875" wd x 0.065" thk overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
PLATE, cover: steel; 2.375" lg x 0.532" wd x 0.050" thk overall (this item used in the AN/-TGC-1A only).
SCREW, machine: slot drive, FH; steel; #6-40 thd; 0.750" lg overall; thd portion 0.375" lg; head 0.076" thk x 0.268" diam (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
INSULATOR: bakelite; 0.147" ID, 0.215" OD, 0.485" lg overall (this item used in the AN/-TGC-1A only).
STIFFENER: steel; 1.437" lg x 1.532" wd x 0.065" thk overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
MODIFICATION KIT MX-762/FG: for Teletype models #MXD8 and #MXD9 transmitterdistributor (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
CONTROL UNIT, power: 110 v DC or 110 v AC, 50/60 eye, single ph, 5 amp; 5" wd x 10" h x 10’4" d overall; Western Union dwg #108245-3.
CONNECTOR, plug: female; 2 cont; straight; 1%" lg x 1%" diam overall; Hubbell #7257.
CONNECTOR, plug: female; 2 cont; straight; 1.655" Igx 1.375" diam overall; Hubbell #7259.
CONNECTOR, plug: male; 2 cont; straight; 1.218" lg less cont x 1.375" diam overall; Hubbell #9357.
CONNECTOR, receptacle: female; 2 cont; straight; 1.187" lg x 2.031" diam overall; mtg flange w/two 0.136" diam holes on 1%" mtg/c; Hubbell #9819.
CONNECTOR, receptacle: male; 2 cont; straight; 1.187" x 2.031" diam overall; mtg flange w/two 0.136" diam holes on 1%" mtg/c; Hubbell #9808.
FUSE, plug: 1.6 amp, 125 v; one-time; standard screw base; 1%2" lg x 1%" diam; Buss #7016.
HOLDER, fuse: cutout type; for 1 Edison plug fuse; porcelain base; 2 pole, 30 amp, 125 v w/solid neutral; 2%" lg x 2%" wd x 1%" h overall; 2 screw term; Bryant #H120.
4T111265
Armature spring 4T111342
Contact part 4T112048
Contact part 4T112497
In contact assembly 4T112498
Bushing (contact part) 4T112499
Contact part 4T204370
To convert transmitter-distributor from 60 to 100 words per minute operation. 4T205062
For power to teletypewriter station equipment. 4T1000-9
A-c power and multiple cords 6Z3150-4
Power connector for equipment drawer. A-c power and multiple cords 6Z7568-1 6Z7591-20
Female multiple plug 6Z7785-1
A-c input 6Z8364P
Protects reperforator equipment- 3Z2601.31
Holds main fuse F-5 3Z2857
182
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
FB-1, FB-2
GS-1, GS-2
L
GS-1, GS-2
PS
RECTIFIER
RECTIFIER, metallic: selenium, power pack; input 115 v ac, 50/60 eye, 0.68 amp; output 110 v de, 0.600 amp; 15%" lg x 7" h x 6" d; Western Union #54A; Bunnell #107841-2.
CAPACITOR, fixed: electrolytic; 500 mf; 200 vdew; 4%" lg x 2" diam; HS metal case; 2 solder lug term on end; Dubilier #SA-10152.
CONNECTOR, plug: female; 2 cont; straight; 1%" lg x 6%4" diam overall; Hubbell #7259.
CONNECTOR, plug: male; 2 cont; straight; 1%" lg x l%o" diam excl cont; Hubbell #7057.
REACTOR: swinging choke; inductance 2.5 hy, 0.1 cap de, 1.0 hy, 0.3 amp de, 0.42 hy, 0.5 amp de, 0.25 hy, 0.75 amp de; 3 ohms de; 1500 v de; open frame; 3%" lg x 3%" wd x 3" d; two #18 AGW wire leads on bottom; ADC per Western Union spec #6719A; Bunnell #109406.
RECTIFIER, metallic: selenium; input 153 to 162 v ac, 60 eye; output 117 v de, 1.2 amp max; 36 No. 5 disks 67 mm diam; Fed Tele & Rad #5B9AV1; Bunnell #109407.
HOLDER, fuse: cutout type; for 2 Edison plug fuses; 30 amp, 125 v; 21%6" lg x 2%6" wd; Bryant #H220.
KNOB: bar; black phenolic; for %" diam shaft; single #8-32 setscrew; white engraved line on pointer; 1%" lg x %" h x %" rad; Croname #286.
RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 40 ohms±5%; 74 w; 6" lg x IjKe" diam; 2 radial lug term; JAN type #RW43G400.
SWITCH, toggle: DPDT; 3 amp, 250 v; bakelite body; PjKe" lg x wd x 1%" d overall; AH&H #81012.
SWITCH, toggle: DPST; 20 amp, 250 v; bakelite body; 24%4" lg x 1%2" wd x d overall; C-H #7402K3.
TRANSFORMER, power: plate; pri 125 v, 60 eye, single ph, tapped at 120/115/110/105 v; seed output 160 v, 50 ma, tapped at 145 v; open metal case; 4%" lg x 3%" wd x 4%" h; 8 solder lug term on top; Western Union spec #6720-B trans f #121-B; Bunnell #109437.
RELAY CONTROL UNIT
CTR-1, CTR-2
LRS-1, LRS-2
LR-1 thru LR-4
CONTROL: relay control unit; 23%" wd x 14>^" h x 23%'' d overall; Western Union dwg #108229-9.
BOARD, terminal: 12 solder lug term; bakelite; 3%" lg x %" wd x %6" thk; Jones HB #2012.
BOARD, terminal: 2 double screw term; bakelite; 1%" lg x 1%" wd x thk; Jones HB #2-141.
BOARD, terminal: connecting block; 8 term; composition; 23%4" lg x 2%2z/ wd x 12%2" thk; WECo #18B.
Provides source of d-c current,.. 4T1000-1/C3
Filter 3DB500-17
D-c output 6Z7568-1
A-c input 6Z1727
In output filtering circuit 4T109406
D-c power source 3H4859-22
For fuses F-l thru F-4 3Z2831-3
On a-c, d-c switches for power 2Z5848
cabinet.
In a-c motor circuits 3RW15907
A-c, d-c switches 3Z9858-3
Main power switch 3Z9847-1
Power transformer 2Z9612.242
Telegraph line control 4T1000-/C5
Connects capacitors and resistors. 2Z9412.66
Main line connections 2Z9402.44
For 255A relays 4E318B
183
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
C-l thru C-8
PO
P-1
P-2
F
FB
SA, SB
RC
RR-2
RA, RB
RNN
RBK-2
RBK-1
RELAY CONTROL UNIT—Continued
CAPACITOR, fixed: paper; 200,000 mmt±20%; 600 vdcw; 2%" lg x diam; wax impr; 2 axial wire leads; Dubilier #DT-6P2.
CAPACITOR, fixed: paper; 2 mf + 20% —10%; 600 vdcw; HS metal case; 1%" lg x 1%" wd x 2" h; 2 solder lug term on top; Tobe #FM-602 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
CONNECTOR, receptacle: male; 2 cont; straight; l/ie" lg x 1%" diam overall; mtg flange w/two 0.136" diam holes on 1%" mtg/c; Hubbell #9808.
CONNECTOR, receptacle: male; 27 flat cont blades; straight; 2%" lg x 1" wd x h excl cont; Jones HB #P-327AB.
CONNECTOR, receptacle: male; 30 flat cont blades; straight; 3He" lg x 2" wd x %" d overall: Jones HB #P-330AB.
FUSE, plug: 1.6 amp, 125 v; one-time; standard screw base; 1%2" lg x 1%" diam; Buss #7016.
HOLDER, fuse: cutout type; for 1 Edison plug fuse; porcelain base; 2 pole, 30 amps, 125 v w/solid neutral; 2J^" lg x 2%" wd overall; Bryant #H120.
KNOB: bar; black phenolic; for diam shaft; single #8-32 setscrew; white engraved line on pointer; 1%" lg x %" h x %" rad: Croname #286.
RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 3A1D; 3 amp, 150 v AC; 2 windings; concentric coil rated 46 v DC, 1300 ohms and 1250 ohms; 4" lg x 1%" wd x 2%" h overall; fast acting; Clare CP #17132; Bunnell #108819.
RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 1B1C1D; 3 amp, 150 v AC; double winding; concentric coil oper current 0.024 amp, 140 and 1300 ohms DC resistance; 4" lg x 1%2" wd x 2%" h overall; slow acting; Clare CP-G 21935: Western Union #202741; Bunnell #108691.
RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 1B1C and 1B1C1A; 3 amp, 150 v AC; double concentric wound coils, 140 ohms and 1300 ohms DC resistance; 4" lg x 1%2" wd x 2]4" h overall; slow acting; Clare CP #H-21935; Bunnell #108690.
RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 2B1A; 3 amp, 150 v AC; single winding, 2000 ohms DC resistance, 46 v DC; 4" lg x 1%2" wd x 2%" h overall; slow acting; Clare CP #E-21935; Bunnell #108816.
RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 1B3A; 3 amp, 150 v AC; single winding, 2000 ohms DC resistance, 46 v DC; 4" lg x 1H" wd x 2J4" h overall; slow acting; Clare Cp #D-21935; Bunnell #108817.
RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 1A; 3 amp, 150 v AC; single winding, 2250 ohms DC resistance; 4" lg x 1%2" wd x 2%" h overall; slow acting; Clare CP #F-21935; Bunnell #108692.
Filters______________________________
Connects power cabinet to relay drawer.
Line terminal connectors, _ _
Line terminal connectors________
Main line protection___________
Holder for above fuse__________
For 2- and 5-section rotary switches.
Operates alarm lamp____________
Feed-out key relay____________
Controls transmitters____________
Controlled by RN________________
Operated by release key______
Operates break lamp____________
3DA200-45
3DB2.602
6Z8364P
2Z7137. 1
2Z3045-1
3Z2601. 31
3Z2857
2Z5848
2Z7595-4
4C7715-3
4C7715-4
4C7715-5
4C7715-6
4C7715-7
184
Ref. symbol Name of part and description Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
RN RELAY CONTROL UNIT—Continued RELAY, armature: cont arrangement 2B; 3 amp, Transmitter control relay 4C7715-8
RR-1 150 v AC; single winding, oper current 3 amp, 550 ohms DC resistance, 46 v DC; 4" lg x 1J4" wd x 2%" h overall; fast acting; Clare CP #C-21935; Bunnell #108625. RELAY, armature: cont arrangement IBID; 3 Feed-out key relay 4C7715-9
LR-1 thru LR-4 amp, 150 v AC; single winding, oper current 0.014 amp, 550 ohms DC resistance; 4" lg x 1%" wd x 2%" h overall; fast acting; Clare CP #B-21935; Bunnell #108818. RELAY, armature: SPDT, polarized; 2 amp 110 LR-1 and LR-2 are trans- 4TRY30
R-24 top v DC, parallel windings, 136 ohms ea winding oper on 5 ma min DC; 52%2/z lg x 21^e// wd x 21^6// h overall; fast acting; WECo #255A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 200 ohms ±5%; 25 w; mitting relays; LR-3 and LR-4 are receiving relays. Limits current in relay RN 3Z5000-4
R-3, R-4, R-17, 2" lg x %" diam; 2 radial lug term; WL type 2" A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 250 ohms ±5%; 30 w; Limiters for line terminal strip. _ 3RW20709
R-18 R-14 top 3" lg x 2%2" diam; 2 radial lug term; JAN type RW40G251. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 800 ohms ±5%; 25 w; Current limiter for relays RA 3Z5380.3
CR-1 thru CR-8 2" lg x %" diam; 2 radial lug term; WL type 2" A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 1000 ohms ±10%; 1 w; and RB. Current limiters in capacitors 3Z6100-53
R-16 top 1%" lg x diam; 2 axial wire leads; IRC type #3BW-1. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 1000 ohms ±5%; 25 w; across relay contacts. Current limiter in winding of 3Z5410.21
R-13 tapped at 500 ohms; 2" lg x %" diam; 3 radial lug term; WL type 2" A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 1300 ohms ±5%; 30 w; RBK-2. Current limiter in RA circuits. _ 3RW25208
R-14 bottom 3" lg x 2%2" diam; 2 radial lug term; JAN type RW40G142. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 1500 ohms ±5%; 25 w; Limits bell alarm circuit current. 3Z5415. 9
R-12 2" lg x %" diam; 2 radial lug term; WL type 2" A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 1800 ohms ±5%; 30 w; Current limiter in contact cir- 3RW25806
R-ll 3" lg x 2%2/z diam; 2 radial lug term; JAN type RW40G182. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 1800 ohms ±5%; 40 w; cuits of RB. Current limiter for RB and RN 3Z5418. 1
R-22(2) tapped at 800 ohms; 3%" lg x %" diam; 3 radial lug term; WL type 3^" B. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 2000 ohms ±5%; 16 w; and controls current in transmitter magnets. Current limiters in bias circuit 3RW26109
R-23(2) R-6, R-16 2" lg x 1%2// diam; 2 radial lug term; JAN type RW32G202. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 2000 ohms ±5%; 25 w; of receiving and transmitting relays. Current limiter in RA and RB 3Z5420. 20
bottom, R-19 top R-15 top, tapped at 1000 ohms; 2" lg x diam; 3 radial lug term; WL type 2" A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 3000 ohms ±5%; 25 w; relays. 3Z5430. 15
R-24 bottom R-l, R-2, tapped at 1500 ohms; 2" lg x diam; 3 radial lug term; WL type 2" A. RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 3100 ohms ±5%; 30 w; Current limiters in RBK-1, RC, 3RW27308
R-9, R-10 tapped at 1500 ohms; 3" lg x 2%2" diam; 3 radial lug term; JAN type RW40G312T. RR-1 relays, and to line terminal strip.
823667—49----13
185
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
Signal Corps stock
No.
R-5(2), R-15 bottom, R-19 bottom
S-l thru S-4
SB
SA
RELAY CONTROL UNIT—Continued
RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 4000 ohms ±5%; 25 w; tapped at 2000 ohms; 2" lg x %" diam; 3 radial lug term; WL type 2" A.
SWITCH, toggle; DPDT; 3 amp, 250 v; bakelite body; l1%a" lg x wd x 1%" d overall; AH&H #82305.
SWITCH, rotary; 8 pole; 2 position: 2 sect; 1%-" lg x 1%6" wd x 2%" d overall; shaft %" lg FMS x %" diam w/%"-32 bushing %6" lg; Oak type #16985-H2.
SWITCH, rotary: 20 pole, 2 position; 5 sect; 3%" lg x 2" wd x iy2" h overall; shaft Xs" lg x %" diam w/%"-32 bushing Xs" lg; Oak type #27377-H5.
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235
REPERFORATOR: typing, receive only; 5 unit code; com characters arrangement w/0 in upper case P, Gothic style type pallet arrangement #193; wiring arrangement, dwg #WD1978; sync motor 110 v, 60 eye, geared for 368 opm; 12" lg x 12" wd x 9" h overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
REPERFORATOR: typing, receive only; 5 unit code; com characters arrangement w/0 in upper case P, Gothic style type pallet arrangement #235; wiring arrangement, dwg #WD2299; series-governed motor 110 v, 60 eye, geared for 368 opm; 12" lg x 1" wd x 9" h overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
COIL, solenoid: electromagnet; selector; singlewound; 105 ohms DC resistance; 1%" lg x 1" wd x 1’4" h overall.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #2-56; %" lg under head w/full lg thd; head 0.135" diam x 0.068" thk.
SCREW, machine: FH; iron, #2-56; %s" lg w/%2" lg thd; head 0.160" diam.
SCREW, shoulder: flat top Bind H; steel; #6-40; %" lg w/%" lg thd; head %2" thk x %2" diam.
NUT, hexagon: steel; %~32; %2" thk; Xs" across flats; special.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #10-32; %2" thk; 5/ie" across flats.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #2-56 ; Yia" thk; across flats.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #4-40; Xs" thk; %" across flats.
Same as R-22. R-19 is current limiter in bias and line winding of LR-1 and LR-2. R-15 is current limiter in RR-^ relay.
Controls operate and nonoperate polar-neutral battery.
Duplex—single switch___________
Split—normal switch_________
3Z9826-20. 1
Furnishes copy or receives messages on perforated tape on which message also is typed.
Same as above_______________
4TFPR29GS235
In pulling selector unit___________
Holds spring retainer plate_____
Holds leather on type bar backstop.
In base plate___________________
Base plate, punch block bracket, punch bail and vertical link bracket, and main shaft assembly.
Bell bracket assembly, main bail bracket, main shaft assembly, center contact governor assembly.
Selector unit assembly, 86933 motor unit assembly, 110846 motor unit assembly.
Bell bracket assembly. Range scale assembly.
3Z5440. 9
3Z9858-3
3Z9826-20
4TFPR5H193
4T177M
4T33-85
4T33-111
4T33-224
4T34-1
4T34-4
4T34-11
4T34-56
186
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
SPRING: extension; 0.028" diam music wire; %" lg x 0.190" diam overall.
SPRING: extension; 0.014" diam music wire; 1%" lg x 0.147" diam overall; 58 closed turns w/hook term, indexed parallel.
PIN, straight: steel; lg x 0.078" OD w/one end beveled.
WASHER, flat: steel; #4; %4" ID, %" OD, 0.035" thk.
ARM ASSEMBLY: detent; steel; approx 1%^" lg x %" wd x %6" thk overall.
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, %" OD, 0.036" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40; %" lg under head w/full lg thd; head %2" diam x %4" thk.
SCREW, machine: Bind H; steel; #4-40; %" lg under head w/0.219" lg thd; head %" diam x 0.063" thk.
SCREW, shoulder: cheese head; steel; #6-40; 1z^2// lg thd; head %" diam x %2" thk; shoulder %6" diam x %2" lg.
SCREW, machine: RH; brass; #6-32; 0.250" lg under head w/full lg thd; head 0.097" thk x 0.251" OD.
SCREW, pilot: flat top Bind H; steel; %"-32; %" lg w/M«" lg thd; head J%2" diam x %2" thk; pilot diam x 1%2" lg.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40; %e" lg; head 0.217" diam x 0.119" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40; %e" lg; head 0.217" diam x 0.119" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel, #10-32, 1" lg under head; head 0.304" diam x 0.152" thk.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #6-40; 0.688" lg under head w/full lg thd; head 0.119" thk x 0.217" OD.
WASHER, lock: (see 6L73006)_______________
WASHER, flat: brass; %4" ID, %" OD, 0.034" thk.
WASHER, lock: spring steel; x%4" ID, 7/i6" OD, 0.045" thk; split ring, Never Slip type.
SPRING: extension; 0.018" music wire; 13/ie" lg x 1%4" diam overall; approx 23 turns w/hook term indexed 90°.
WASHER, lock: spring steel; 0.200" ID, ]%4" OD, 0.047" thk; split ring, Never Slip type.
WASHER, lock steel; 2%4" ID, ^/6i" OD, y16" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; %6" ID, ^6" OD, 0.053" thk.
Main bail bracket assembly_____
Base plate_____________________
Locks nut to gear hub_________
Punch block bracket assembly, punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly.
Punch unit____________________
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly.
Base plate, punch block assembly, punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly.
Selector unit, terminal block, capacitor and resistor bracket assembly.
Range scale assembly__________
Center contact governor_______
Main shaft assembly. 110846 motor unit assembly.
Punch block bracket, selector unit assembly.
Punch block bracket, terminal block, capacitor and resistor bracket assembly.
Main shaft assembly____________
110846 motor unit assembly_____
Selector unit assembly. Resistor bracket assembly.
Base plate, main bail bracket assembly, terminal block, capacitor and resistor bracket assembly.
Bell bracket assembly__________
Main bail bracket assembly___
4T35-27
4 F35-68
4T36-24
4T103-27
4T122-700
4T123-244
4T1026
4T1028
4T1030
4T1064
4T1100
4T1160
4T1176
4T1245
4T1272
4T2191
4T2438
4T2449
4T2623
4T2669
4T2920
4T3438
187
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
NUT, hexagon: steel; %"-32; %" across flats; 0.094" thk chamfered both sides.
NUT, hexagon: steel; %2"-40; %" across flats; 0.156" thk chamfered both sides (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
NUT, hexagon: steel; #6-40 thd; %2/z thk; %" across flats (this item used on the AN/TGC-1A only).
NUT, hexagon: steel; #4-40; %2/z thk; %6" across flats.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #6-40; thk; %" across flats.
SPRING: extension; 0.024" diam music wire; 1" lg x 0.223" diam overall; special.
WASHER, lock: steel; #8, x%4" ID, i%4" OD, %2" thk, split ring, Never Slip type.
WICK: oiling; 1.750" lg x 0.093" diam overall_
WICK: oiling; 0.250" lg x 0.125" OD___________
WASHER, lock: spring type; spring steel; 2%4"
ID, 3%4" OD, 0.045" thk; split ring Never Slip type.
BEARING, ball: single row; self-alining: bore 0.5118"; 1.1811" OD x 0.2756" wd; Norma-Hoff #E-13, GE #3510881, Fafnir #13, Federal #FB-13, ND #13, SKF #E-13, Torrington #T-13.
SPRING: compression; 0.027" diam music wire; 7 turns; %" lg x %" diam overall.
SCREW, machine: Fil H; steel; #2-56; %" lg under head w/full length thd; head 0.068" thk x 0.135" diam.'
CONTACT ASSEMBLY: governor; single tungsten cont %" OD x Xe" thk; 12942" lg x %" h x %" thk overall; Teletype part/dwg #6314.
CONTACT GOVERNOR: steel; #6-32; 0.385" lg w/hex head %" across flats; w/tungsten contact welded to head.
SPRING: extension; 0.033" diam music wire; l%e" lg x 0.259" diam overall; 19 turns open; w/machine hook term, indexed parallel.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-32; 0.344" lg under head w/full lg thd; head 0.187" across flats x 0.094" thk.
NUT, hexagon: (see 6L3606-32-4.3)_____________
LEVER: selector sw’ord; steel; sword-shaped w/2 arms and 1 pivot, 1%" lg x 1.074" wd x 0.045" thk overall.
LEVER: selector T; steel; 0.594" lg x 0.531" wd x 0.051" thk overall.
PLATE, spacer: selector separator; 21Xe" lg x 2.141" wd x 0.065" thk approx overall.
Punch block bracket assembly __ 4T3595
Punch block bracket assembly __ 4T3597
4T3598
Base plate, punch block bracket 4T3599
assembly, punch bail and vertical link assembly.
Punch bail and vertical link as- 4T3606
sembly, type bar basket assembly, ribbon feed mechanical assemblies.
Type bar basket assembly, pull 4T3610
and function bar springs. 4T3640
Main shaft assembly 4T4809
Main shaft assembly_ 4T4813
Ribbon feed mechanism 4T4814
110846 motor unit assembly 4T5061
Ribbon feed mechanism 4T5363
Punch block assembly 4T5740
Center contact governor assem- 4T6314
bly.
Adjustment screw 4T6320
Center contact governor assem- 4T6323
bly.
Center contact governor assem- 4T6344
bly.
Center contact governor assem- 4T6345
bly. Selector unit assembly. 4T6685
Selector unit assembly 4T6686
Selector unit assembly 4T6689
188
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
BAR, pull: steel; 4.578" lg x 0.781" h x 0.0455" thk overall.
MOTOR, AC: series-wound; y>6 hp, 1800 rpm; open frame; 5%" lg x 5Xs" wd x 41%0" h overall; 110 v AC, 50/60 eye, single ph, 1.5 amp.
ARMATURE ASSEMBLY, motor: 110 v, 50/60 eye, hp; 7%" lg x 2.355" diam overall; %" diam shaft w/commutator.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #10-32;
X" lg under head; head 0.313" across flats x 0.125" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40; %g" lg under head; head %" across flats x %2,r thk.
SCREW, shoulder: Fil H, chamfered; steel; #6-40; 0.843" lg w/0.437" lg thd; head 0.281" diam x 0.094" thk; shoulder 0.406" lg x 0.187" diam.
SCREW, shoulder: flat top Bind II; steel; #6-40; %" lg 'wiyi" lg thd; head %2" thk x %2" diam; shoulder %6" diam x %" lg.
SCREW, pilot: cheese head; steel; #4-40; 1%4// lg w/Xo" lg thd; head Xo" diam x Xe" thk; pilot %4" diam x 1%4Z/ lg.
SCREW, shoulder: flat top Bind H; steel; #6-40; 1%4// lg w/%4"lg thd; head %2" thk x 0.280" diam; shoulder 0.1865" diam x lg.
SCREW, set: slotted, headless; steel; #6-40; 0.188" lg w/full lg thd; rounded point.
SCRklW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #10-32; %" lg; head %6" across flats x %" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40; %" lg under head; head %" across flats x %2" thk.
LEVER: steel; 0.969" lg x 0.125" wd x 0.180" h overall.
BAIL: steel; 3.063" lg x Xe" wd x 0.531" d overall; irregular shape, ends beveled at 35° angle.
CRANK, bell: trip latch type; steel; 1%2" lg x 1%2" wd overall.
COLLAR, spacing: code bar; steel; 0.221" diam x 0.051" thk; double chamfered (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
WASHER, flat: felt, white; %" ID, 1Xe/z OD, Xs" thk.
LEVER: steel; 5%4" lg x 2%4ZZ wd x 1%2" d overall.
LEVER: steel; 4Xs" lg x 2%2 wd overall_________
BAR, pull: position #1 or #2; 0.045" steel; 3.803" from spring mtg/c to extreme end w/lower sect twisted 27°; 5.803" lg x lXs" wd x %2" thk overall.
BAR, pull: position #33; steel; 5.803" lg x 1%6" wd x %2" thk overall.
SCREW, machine: eccentric; flat top Bind H; steel; #4-40; 0.281" lg w/0.250" lg thd; head I 0.094" thk x 0.312" OD.
Pull or function bars__________
Governed motor_________________
For a-c series-governed motors._
Base plate, range scale assembly .
Main bail bracket assembly, ribbon feed mechanism, main shaft assembly.
Bell bracket assembly. Range scale assembly.
Base plate. Ribbon feed mechanism.
Main bail bracket assembly. Ribbon feed mechanism
Base plate, bell bracket, assembly. Main shaft assembly.
Trip latch lever for range finder. _
Ribbon reverse____________,______
Range scale assembly_____________
Punch bail and vertical link bracket, type bar basket.
Main shaft assembly______________
Selector cam sleeve______________
Code bar locking lever___________
Space or letters shift___________
Figures shift__________________
Bell bracket assembly_________
4T6692
4T6708
4T6710
4T6745
4T6746
4T6799
4T6800
4T6801
4T6805
4T6807
4T6810
4T6811
4T6830
4T6834
4T6850
4T6859
4T6861
4T6909 4T6915 4T6916
4T6917
4T6942
S23667 49-----14
189
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
BUMPER: pallet backstop; leather; 6.375" lg x 0.437" wd x 0.125" thk.
ECCENTRIC: adj stop; steel; 0.562" lg x 0.250" diam w/#4-40 thd shank 0.281" lg, thd ^6" screwdriver adj.
LEVER: steel; 1.634" lg x 0.578" wd x 1.384" h overall.
WASHER, flat: brass; %4" ID, OD, 0.0205" thk.
LEVER: main bail; steel; 1.765" lg x 0.375" wd x Ys," thk overall.
SCREW, pilot; hex head; steel; %"-32; 0.594" lg w/0.407" lg thd; w/0.031" lg x 0.209" diam shoulder and pilot 0.156" lg x 0.155" diam; head 0.375" across flats x 0.094" h.
SPRING: compression; 0.055" diam music wire; 0.740" lg x 0.890" diam overall; special; 6}z2 turns w/closed ends.
POST, supporting: link; screw steel; %2" diam x lg.
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, *%4" OD, 0.055" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, %6" OD, 0.032" thk.
PLUNGER: pin type; steel; 0.455" lg x 0.099" diam overall; shank 0.077" diam x 0.244" lg.
GEAR: bevel; steel; 36 straight teeth; 48 pitch, 0.750" PD; 0.770" OD x 0.315" thk, 0.1885" bore; straight face.
LINK, shaft: steel; J-shaped; 1%6" lg x x%2" h x %e" wd overall.
GEAR: bevel; steel; 18 straight teeth; 48 pitch, 0.375" PD; 0.412" OD x 0.338" thk, 0.126" bore; straight face.
STUD: steel; 2%4" diam x 1%" ]g overall; one end #6-40 x %6" lg thd; opposite end #6-40 x %2" lg thd w/jKe" diam shoulder 1Yie" lg.
NUT, hexagon: steel; %"-32; 0.125" thk overall; 0.625" across flats.
STUD: steel; %2" diam x 2%2" lg overall-------
SPRING: compression; 0.026" diam music wire;
1%2" lg x %" diam overall; 6 turns w/squared ends.
SPRING: compression; 0.012" diam music wire;
J%4" lg x %4" diam overall; special; approx 7^ turns w/open ends.
SPRING: extension; 0.014" diam music wire; 2%4" lg x %2" diam overall; special; approx 15 turns w/hook term, parallel.
BRACKET: w/main shaft caps; zinc alloy die casting; 5X%2" lg x 3%" wd x 2%" thk overall.
SPRING: extension; 0.018" diam music wire; 12%4" lg x J%4" diam overall; special; approx 37 turns w/hook term, indexed 90°.
Type bar basket assembly 4T6954
Range scale assembly 4T6966
Clutch throw-out _ - 4T6971
Type bar basket assembly 4T6987
Main shaft assembly 4T6989
Main shaft assembly 4T6990
Main shaft assembly 4T6993
Punch bail and vertical link 4T6999
bracket assembly.
Selector unit assembly 4T7001
4T7002
Range scale assembly 4T7007
Ribbon spool shaft 4T7042
For ribbon reverse 4T7044
On ribbon feed shaft 4T7068
Mounting stud for clutch lever.. 4T7386
4T7415
Mounting stud for code bar 4T7484
Main bail bracket assembly 4T7599
Range scale assembly 4T7602
Punch block bracket assembly. 4T7603
Range scale assembly.
Main shaft assembly 4T7610
Selector unit assembly 4T7612
190
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Functibn of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
SPRING: extension; 0.020" diam music wire; 0.775" lg x 0.133" diam overall; special; approx 25 turns w/hook term, indexed 90°.
SPRING: extension; 0.020" diam music wire; 1" lg x %2" diam overall; special; approx 29 turns w/hook term, parallel.
SPRING: extension; 0.014" diam music wire; 1%2" lg x diam overall; special; approx 55 turns w/hook term, indexed 90°.
SPRING: compression; 0.021" diam music wire; 3%4" lg x ^ie" diam overall; 13 turns w/squared ends.
WICK: oiling; hard felt, white; 0.375" ID, 0.562" OD, 0.125" thk.
SPRING: extension; 0.018" diam music wire; 1.250" lg x 0.217" OD overall; special.
RIBBON, (see 6M1175 and QM53-R-2880).
SPRING: extension; 0.014" diam music wire; 0.645" lg x 0.177" OD overall; special.
BRUSH, electrical contact: carbon; 2jKe" lg x %" OD overall; w/compression spring and end cap; GE #5052405AA7.
LEVER: selector, right side; steel; 1.468" lg x 1.271" wd x 0.045" thk overall.
LEVER: selector, left side; steel; 1.641" lg x 1.068" h x 0.045" thk overall.
STUD: steel; 1%2" lg x %2" diam overall; #6-40 thd %" lg one end, #6-40 thd %" lg w/%4" diam shoulder 1%2" lg other end.
SCREW, machine: special; drill rod steel; round V-milled head; #2-56; 0.188" lg w/0.188" lg thd; shoulder 0.093" sq w/one side rounded on 0.062" rad w/max thk of 0.030" located 0.010" from head: head 0.130" thk x 0.1875" OD w/2 milled surfaces 27° on ea side of center line to depth on head of 0.100".
LATCH, lever: clock spring steel; 1.188" lg x %" wd x %4/z thk overall.
CAM ASSEMBLY: sleeve; steel; 2%2" lg x 1S/16" OD x 1%2" h overall; hole for shaft 0.2515" ID; 5 cams stamped #75230.
ARMATURE, electromagnet: steel; selector; irregular shape, 2" lg x 1%" wd x 1%e" h approx overall.
LEVER: tool steel; 1.948" lg x 1%2" wd x 0.050" thk overall.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40; W lg under head; head %" across flats x 0.094" thk.
SCREW, machine: Bind H; steel; #6-40; %" lg under head; head %" diam x 0.062'' thk.
SHIM: cont mtg; steel; 0.140" ID, %6" OD, 0.005" thk.
Selector unit assembly 4T7614
Main shaft assemblv 4T7615
Pull and function bar springs 4T7634
Main bail bracket assembly 4T7659
Main shaft assembly _ _ 4T7824
Type bar basket assembly. Pull 4T7825
and function bar springs. 4T7835
Type bar basket assembly. Pull * 4T7965
and function bar springs. 110846 motor unit assembly 4T8094
Selector unit assemblv __ 4T8157
Selector unit assembly __ 4T8158
Selector unit assembly _ _ 4T8470
For armature locking stud 4T8472
Ribbon feed_________________
Main keyboard shaft_________
Selector unit assembly________
Locks magnet armature_________
Ribbon feed mechanism. Selector unit assembly. Terminal block capacitor and resistor bracket assembly.
Punch block bracket assembly __
Punch block bracket assembly. Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly.
4T8493
4T8507
4T8508
4T8511
4T8539
4T8543
4T8896
191
Ref. symbol Name of part and description Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
REPERFORATORS FPR5II193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
WASHER, flat: steel; ^6" ID ^2" OD, 0.036" thk.
ARM: steel; 2.189" lg x 0.656" wd x 1.380" d overall.
ARM: steel; 2.189" lg x 0.656" wd x 1.380" d overall.
SCREW, pivot: headless w/screwdriver slot; steel; #6-40; 0.307" lg x 0.137" diam overall; %2" lg thd; w/60° taper and 0.031" diam pivot point.
CAP: contact brush; bakelite; }'Z' lg x 2%2ZZ diam overall.
NUT, hexagon: brass; #6-40; thk overall; hex sect 0.375" across flats 0.031" thk.
SCREW, adjustment: brass; hex; #6-40 thd; class 3 fit x ZmZ' lg on ea end; lg overall; hex center Yvi" thk x %" across flats, shoulder %2" wd x %" diam; special.
SHIM: steel; 0.196" ID, 0.438" OD, 0.010" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; #2, %4" ID, i%4" OD, 0.020" thk.
GAGE: 0.010" diam music wire; steel hex handle 0.187" across flats; 3" lg overall.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel #6-40; %" lg under head w/%" lg thd; head X/Z' across flats x 0.094" thk.
SPRING: compression; 0.068" diam music wire 3%4" lg x %" diam overall; special; approx 4 turns w/open ends.
NUT, hexagon: steel; %o"-32 LH thd; 0.281" thk overall; YZ' across flats.
WICK: oiling; %" lg x %2" diam overall________
WICK: oiling; %" lg x %2" diam________________
GEAR: steel; driving gear; 0.750" diam x 0.125" thk overall; 16 teeth.
WASHER, flat: felt; /2" ID, %" OD, /16" thk__ SHAFT: mtg gears, cams, couplings, and clutches;
steel; 5.946" lg x diam overall.
WASHER, flat: steel; %6" ID, %6" OD, 0.035" thk.
SPRING: extension; 0.008" diam music wire: 0.425" lg x 0.200" OD overall; special.
BEARING, ball: steel: 0.315" ID, 1.0236" OD, 0.315" thk; SKF #1-70153 spcl.
SCREW: hex head; steel; #2-56; 0.148" lg w/0.80" lg thd; tungsten point on head 0.250" OD x 0.020" thk; hex shoulder 0.250" across flats x 0.046" thk.
WASHER, flat: white felt; 0.516" ID, 1.250" OD, 0.062" thk.
DISK: friction driving; steel; ID, 1%" OD, %2" thk overall; Yib" thk stock; bushing 3%4" OD x %2" wd w/2 integral key tabs extending
I from bushing on one side.
Range scale assembly____________
Ribbon reverse, left____________
Ribbon reverse, right___________
Selector unit assembly----------
110846 motor unit assembly------
Selector unit assembly__________
Selector unit assembly__________
Pull bar guide__________________
Selector unit assembly----------
Thickness gage__________________
Punch block bracket assembly_ _
Main shaft assembly_____________
Main shaft assembly_____________
Main shaft assembly-------------
Main shaft assembly_____________
Clutch gear_____________________
Main shaft with gear hub--------
Main shaft______________________
Base plate______________________
Main shaft____________________ -
Adjustment screw________________
Main shaft____1_________________
In clutch, main bail cam, friction driving.
4T34432
4T70794
4T70795
4T70803
4T70873
4T71045
4T71046
4T71047
4T71073
4T71559
4T72508
4T72514
4T72517
4T72521
4T72522
4T72562
4T72563
4T72576
4T72579
4T72595
4T72644
4T72835
4T72883
4T72884
192
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
SPRING: compression; 0.051" diam music wire; 0.722" OD x %" lg overall; special.
GEAR: helical; worm gear type; steel; 35 spiral teeth; 1.664" PO; 0.500" bore; 0.500" face; 1.755" throat diam, 1.847" OD.
WASHER, flat: felt, black; %" ID, 1%6" OD, 3/i0" thk.
LEVER: steel; 0.868" lg x 0.750" wd x 0.625" thk overall; 0.035" thk stock.
SCREW, pilot: hex head; steel; #6-40; 2%2" lg w/%2" lg thd; head %2" thk x %" across flats; pilot %2" diam x %6" lg.
GEAR: steel; 0.938" OD x 0.781" lg overall; 16 teeth.
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, %6" OD, 0.060" thk.
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40 thd; J%2" lg; head 0.040" thk x y4" across flats (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
WICK: oiling; %" lg x H" diam_______________
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, %6" OD, 0.037" thk (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6 40 thd; 15/ie" lg; thd portion %" lg; head %" across flats (this item used on the AN/TGC-1A only).
GUARD: pull bar; steel; 7.560" lg x %6" wd x 0.065" thk overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
CAM: steel; 1%6/Z OD x 3%4" thk overall; bore y2" diam, face %6" thk w/4 jaws 0.182" wd x %2" h (this item used on the aN/TGC-IA only).
SPRING: compression; 0.055" music wire; 6% turns; 2%2" lg x 5%4" diam overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
GEAR: helical; canvas base bakelite; 43 teeth; 28 pitch, 1.8262" PD; 1.8976" OD, /2" bore, face %" thk; straight face (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 A only).
ARMATURE, electromagnet: steel and iron; irregular shape; 2Xe" lg x 1%" wd x 1%6" thk overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-IA only).
SPRING: extension; 0.014" diam music wire; 3%4" lg x 1%4" diam overall; approx 20 turns w/hook term, indexed 90°.
CAP: (see 4T70873)_________________________
ARM ASSEMBLY, contact: u/w inner disk; nickel silver or steel; 3%" x 7/16" x 1%2".
BRUSH, electrical contact: carbon; governor; J%4" x y4"; Natl Carbon grade 9613.
GEAR: worm; linen base bakelite; 31 spiral teeth;
19 pitch, 1.682" PD; 1.877" OD, y2" bore, face y2" thk; face edges beveled 25° (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
Main shaft assembly___________
110846 motor unit_____________
110846 motor unit______________
Tape tension_________________ _
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. Selector unit assembly.
Clutch driving gear____________
Base plate, punch bail and .vertical link assembly. Selector unit assembly.
Punch block bracket assembly __
Main bail bracket assembly_____
Tape reel container assembly___
Motor-governor filter assembly__
Pull bar guard_________________
Main bail______________________
Clutch spring in selector magnet support.
Speed conversion gear__________
In selector unit___________________
Ribbon feed mechanism_______
Motor-governor filter assembly. _
Governor brush and speed adjusting bracket.
Governor brush and speed adjusting bracket.
86933 motor unit assembly----
4T72885
4T73106
4T73232
4T73481
4T74399
4 T74502
4T74722
4T74986
4T75226
4T76099
4T78028
4T98479
4T101436
4T110878
4T110882
4T204382
4T75229
4T77911
4T78400
4T78403
4T78509
193
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS9235—Continued
SPRING: extension; 0.0165" diam music wire; %2" lg x %" diam overall; approx 18 turns w/hook term, parallel.
SCREW, machine: hex headjsteel; #6-40; 2%4" lg under head w/full length thd.
BEARING, ball: single row, radial; felt seal, one side; 0.3937" bore, 1.1811" OD, 0.500"thk overall; ND type #8500LiA-Pl, Holtzer #55512 (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
MOTOR, AC: sync; %o hp, 1,800 rpm; open frame; 6%2" lg x 5" wd x 4r^6" h overall; 110 .v AC, 60 eye, single ph, 2.2 amp (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
SHIM: 0.004" thk steel; 0.312" OD x 0.160" ID SCREW, machine: slotted hex head; steel; #6-40;
/le" lg under head; head %" across fiats x %2" thk.
WASHER, flat: steel; %4" ID, x%2" OD, 0.094" thk.
COMMUTATOR: steel frame, bakelite insulation; 2 segment commutator 0.984" OD x 1%2" wd w/outer edge beveled; 2%" lg x 1%" wd x 2%2" d overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
SPRING: extension; 0.012" diam music wire; 3%" lg x %" diam overall; 301 turns w/parallel ring ends (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
PLATE: nickel silver; 2%" x 2%4" x 0.0159" thk overall.
SPRING: torsion; 0.026" diam music wire; 0.223" diam x 0.558" lg overall; special.
WHEEL, detent: steel; 0.740" OD x 0.189" thk overall w/slot.
CORD: 2 #18 AWG stranded copper cond color-coded white w/black-white tracer; 31 %" lg excl terminations; WECo #347A connector one end, spade term lugs other end.
STATOR, motor: teletype #82283; steel housing; sync winding, y40 hp, 110 v, 60 eye, single ph; 5" lg x 4%" wd x 5" h overall (this item used on the AN/TGC-1 only).
WASHER, flat: black felt: %6" ID, %6" OD, tfe" thk.
WASHER, lock: steel; %r," OD x 0.010" thk; for #2 screw; internal teeth.
SEGMENT, type bar: semi-steel; 6.094" lg x 3.313" wd x %" h overall.
SCREW, machine: FH; steel; #4-40; 0.312" lg overall; head 0.216" diam.
LEVER: #1 left vert link; flat type; steel; 3.143" lg x 0.315" wd x 0.035" thk overall.
Selector unit assembly________
Ribbon feed mechanism, governor brush and speed adjustbracket, terminal block, capacitor, and resistor bracket assembly.
86933 motor unit assembly_____
Synchronous motor (new style) Synchronous motor (old style).
In tape tension lever_________
Main shaft assembly___________
Motor-governor filter assembly.
Selector unit assembly. _ ____
Starting switch_______________
86933 motor unit_____________
Spacer in top selector plate___
Punch block bracket assembly__
Operates detent lever__________
Switchboard cord_______________
For a-c motor_______________
Main shaft assembly____________
Selector unit assembly_________
Type bar basket assembly_______
Punch block bracket assembly. _ Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly.
4T78824
4T80342
4T80358
4T82283
4T82392
4T82440
4T82493
4T82841
4T82843
4T83920
4T84023
4T86920
4T89317
4T90263
4T90752
4T90791
4T91899
4T93191
4T95401
194
Name of part and description
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
LEVER: #2 vert link; flat type; steel; 3.072" lg x 0.315" wd x 0.035" thk overall.
LEVER: #3 vert link; flat type; steel; 3.001" lg x 0.315" wd x 0.035" thk overall.
LEVER: #4 vert link; flat type; steel; 2.930" lg x 0.315" wd x 0.035" thk overall.
LEVER: #5 right vert link; flat type; steel; 2.859" lg x 0.315" wd x 0.035" thk overall.
LEVER: shift lever; steel; 2.093" lg x 0.810" wd x 0.674" thk overall, 0.065" thk stock.
CRANK, bell: #1 left intermediate bell crank; steel; L-shaped, 1.016" lg x 0.832" wd x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #2 intermediate bell crank; steel; L-shaped, 1.050" lg x 0.932" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #3 intermediate bell crank; steel; L-shaped; 1.145" lg x 1.132" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #4 intermediate bell crank; steel; L-shaped; 1.160" lg x 1.232" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #5 right intermediate bell crank; steel; L-shaped; 1.171" lg x 1.332" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
BUSHING: bearing; steel; 0.113" ID, 0.172" OD, 0.042" lg; outside surface ground and polished; inside edges beveled; headless.
CRANK, bell: #1 rear punch bell crank; steel; L-shaped; l%e" lg x 1%<" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #2 punch bell crank; steel; L-shaped; 1%6" lg x 1%" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #3 punch bell crank; steel; L-shaped; 1%b" lg x 1 ^4" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #4 punch bell crank; steel; L-shaped; l%e" lg x 1%2" lg x 0.035" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: #5 front punch bell crank; steel; L-shaped; l%e" lg x 12%4/Z lg x 0.035" thk overall.
SPRING: extension; 0.010" diam music wire; 0.120" diam x 0.938" lg overall; special.
SPRING: compression; 0.017" diam music wire; 3%4" diam x 1%e" lg overall; 14 turns w/open ends, not ground.
CRANK, bell: steel; V-shaped; 1.344" lg x 1.447" lg x 0.045" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: steel; V-shaped; 1.344" lg x 1.369" lg x 0.045" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: steel; V-shaped; 1.344" lg x 1.291" lg x 0.045" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: steel; V-shaped; 1.344" lg x 1.213" lg x 0.045" thk overall.
CRANK, bell: steel; V-shaped; 1.344" lg x 1.135" lg x 0.045" thk overall.
Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95402
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95403
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95404
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95405
Base plate 4T95409
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95411
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95412
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95413
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95414
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95415
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95416
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95421
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95422
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95423
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95424
Punch bail and ' vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95425
Punch bail and vertical link bracket assembly. 4T95428
Base plate 4T95430
#1 top code bar 4T95431
#2 code bar bell crank 4T95432
#3 code bar bell crank 4T95433
#4 code bar bell crank 4T95434
#5 bottom code bar bell crank __ 4T95435
195
Name of part and description
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
PLATE, spacer: nickel silver; 1.312" lg x 0.884" wd x 0.0201" thk overall.
NUT, shoulder: steel; #6-40; %" thk; 0.185" across flats.
SCREW, pilot: slotted, headless; steel; %"—32; %" lg w/ lg thd; pilot 0.139" ODx %" lg.
PAWL, ratchet: steel; 1.467" lg x 0.421" wd x 0.095" thk overall.
ECCENTRIC: hex type; steel; 0.312" across flats x 0.140" lg overall.
GUIDE, ribbon: 0.062" diam Bessemer rod; M-shaped; 1^" lg x 0.865" wd x 0.218" thk overall.
BLOCK ASSEMBLY, punch: (see 4T111023)_______
STRIPPER: steel; 0. 094" diam x 0.328" lg overall.
STRIPPER: steel; 0.094" diam x 0.328" lg overall.
SPRING: compression; 0.010" diam music wire; 0.293" lg x 0.085" diam overall; 9 turns w/end ground flat.
BRACKET: steel; 1.187" lg x 0.390" wdx 0.285" thk overall. •
STUD: steel; %" lg overall; #6-40 thd; thd 0.172" lg.
ARM: steel, irregular shape; 2.171" lg x 0.869" wd x 1.455" d overall.
SCREW, pilot: slotted, headless; steel; %"-32; 0.875" lg w/0.562" lg thd; pilot 0.313" lg x 0.155" diam w/end chamfered 0.015".
BEARING, >;leeve: steel; male; 0.139" ID, 0.312" OD, 0.130" lg overall w/head 0.187" diam x 0.100" lg.
BEARING, sleeve: steel; male; 0.139" ID, 0.312" OD, 0.181" lg overall w/head 0.187" diam x 0.140" lg.
ROLLER, cam: screw steel; 0.189" ID, 0.875" diam x 0.214" thk.
SPRING: extension; 0.045" diam music wire; 0.350" OD x 1.240" lg overall.
SCREW: upstop, punch bail; steel; 0.844" lg overall; #6-40 thd; %e" lg under head; hex head 0.094" thk x across flats.
SCREW, machine: FH; steel; #4-40; %" lg overall; thd portion J%2" lg.
SHIM: steel; ID, 13/l6" OD, 0.012" thk______
SHIM: steel; 1%2" ID, 13/16" OD, 0.016" thk_
SHIM: steel; i%2" ID, i%6" OD, 0.020" thk___
BUSHING, threaded: head type; steel; %"-32 thd x 0.313" lg x 0.126" ID; hex head 0.062" thk x 0.312" across flats.
SPRING: flat; steel; %" lg x %" wd x %" h overall.
FELT: oiling; 1%2" lg x 1" wd x %" thk______
Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
Code bar bell crank separator 4T95436
Punch bail and vertical link 4T95438
bracket assembly.
Punch block bracket assembly-- 4T95443
Tape feed pawl 4T95446
Tape feed pawl 4T95447
Punch block bracket assembly-- 4T95449
4T95451
Punch, tape code 4T95454
Punch, tape feed 4T95455
In punch block assembly 4T95456
Spring retainer bracket 4T 95457
Punch bail and vertical link 4T95459
bracket assembly.
Ribbon reverse 4T95467
Punch bail and vertical link 4T95487
bracket assembly.
Punch bail and vertical link 4T95490
bracket assembly.
Punch bail and vertical link 4T95492
bracket assembly.
For punch arm cam 4T95493
Punch bail and vertical link 4T95496
bracket assembly.
Adjustment 4T95499
Punch block bracket assembly _ _ 4T95971
For main shaft 4T96763
For main shaft 4T96764
For main shaft 4T96765
Punch block bracket assembly-- 4T96837
For tape guide 4T96846
Main bail bracket assembly 4T98150
196
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND
• FPR29GS235—Continued
SUPPRESSOR, electrical noise: consists of 5 capacitors and 1 brass core retard coil; lg x 1%" wd x 2%" h overall; 110 V AC, 1.6 amp.
CABLE ASSEMBLY: 2 #18 AWG stranded copper cond, type SJ; 32" lg excl terminations; Hubbell #7057 connector one end, ring type term lug other end.
SPRING: extension; 0.063" diam music wire; 0.426" OD x 2%" lg overall.
LEVER: steel; 4.187" lg x 0.781" wd overall_
CABLE ASSEMBLY: 2 #18 AWG stranded copper cond; 45J4" lg excl terminations; Hubbell #9202 connector one end, ring type term lug other end.
WORM, gear: steel; 14 teeth; 28 pitch, 0.9238" PD, 3.0714 to 1 ratio; 1.500" lg overall, gear 0.750" lg x 0.9952" OD, shank 0.750" lg x 0.688" diam, 0.312" diam bore x 0.063" d (this item used in the AN/TGC-IA only).
BLOCK ASSEMBLY, punch: 5 unit, straight feed; c/o 6 punches and 6 strippers; steel; h x %" wd x 11%2,/ d overall.
RETAINER, disk: steel; 1.250" diam x 0.280" thk overall, polished friction surface 1.250" diam w/shank 0.606" diam x 0.093" wd, two 0.125" lg x 0.120" wd prongs on shank (this item used in the AN/TGC-IA only).
BRACKET: L-shaped; steel; 4.187" lg x 2.478" wd x 0.065" thk overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-IA only).
BRACKET: cast-iron; 1.531" lg x 1.125" wd x 0.281" thk overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-IA only).
BRACKET: L-shaped; steel; 1.125" lg x 0.765" wd x 0.065" thk overall (this item used in the AN/TGC-IA only).
ARM: steel; 1.500" lg x 0.260" wd tapered to 0.094" wd w/0.078" rad ball on tapered end (this item used in the AN/TGC- 1A only).
MODIFICATION KIT MX-763/FG: for Teletype model #FPR5H typing reperforator (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
BAR, type: w/pallet; steel; 3.440" lg x 0.703" wd over-all, as follows:
BAR, type: (X 1); stamped 2-----------------
BAR, type: (Q 1); stamped 3-----------------
BAR, type: (V ;); stamped 4_________________
BAR, type: (G &); stamped 5_________________
BAR, type: (W 2); stamped 6_________________
BAR, type: (F !); stamped 7 (this item used in the
AN/TGC-IA only).
BAR, type: (F !); stamped 7 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
BAR, type: (C :); stamped 8_________________
BAR, type: (D $); stamped 9_________________
To suppress electrical noise 4T99250
Power cable assembly 4T99968
Main shaft assembly 4T101083
Code bar locking 4T103310
Power cable assembly 4T110768
For speeding up operation 4T110881
4T111023
* Friction disk _ _ 4T111686
For selector unit 4T204372
Armature bracket 4T204384
Selector spring mounting 4T204644
Selector spring extension 4T204645
To convert typing reperforator from 60 to 100 words per minute. 4T205064
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98968
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98969
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98971
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98974
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98975
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98977
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98979
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98981
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98984
823667—49----15
197
f. symbol Name of part and description
REPERFORATORS FPR5H193 AND FPR29GS235—Continued
BAR, type: (R 4); stamped 10__________
BAR, type: (J '); stamped 11 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
BAR, type: (A -)1; stamped 12---------
BAR, type: (T 5); stamped 13__________
BAR, type: (E 3); stamped 14__________
BAR, type: (N ,); stamped 15 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
BAR, type: (N '); stamped 15 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1A only).
BAR, type: (I 8); stamped 16__________
BAR, type: (O 9); stamped 17__________
BAR, type: (H £); stamped 18__________
BAR, type: (L )); stamped 19__________
BAR, type: (U 7); stamped 20__________
BAR, type: (M .); stamped 21 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
BAR, type: (M %); stamped 21 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
BAR, type: (Y 6); stamped 22__________
BAR, type: (P 0>; stamped 23 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
BAR, type: (B ?); stamped 24__________
BAR, type: (K (); stamped 25__________
BAR, type: (Z "); stamped 26__________
BAR, type: (. ,); stamped 27__________
BAR, type: (= #); stamped 28 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
BAR, type: (J); stamped 11 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 only).
BAR, type: (S); stamped #1____________
BAR, type: (<£); stamped 27 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
BAR, type: (= =); stamped 28 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
BAR, type: (P 0); stamped 23 (this item used in the AN/TGC-1 A only).
RESISTOR, fixed: WW; 550 ohms ±10%; 90 w; tapped at 300 ohms; 250 ohms sect 75 w, 300 ohms sect 15 w; 5" lg x 1%" diam; 3 solder lug term.
NUT, hexagon: steel; #6-32; %2/z thk; y" across flats; special.
WASHER, lock: spring steel; #6; %4/z ID, 1%4" OD, 0.031" thk; split Never Slip type.
RIBBON: black, medium inked; wd x 12 yds lg; Fed Spec #DDD-R-311, type A, class 1.
SIGNAL INDICATOR
CONTROL: signal indicator: c/o alarm lamps and push-button control switches; 21" wd x 1%" h x 4%" d; Western Union dwg #108233-3.
SIS CONNECTOR, plug: female; 27 flat cont blades; straight; 21%f," lg x 1 1%e" wd x 1%" d overall:
I Jones HB #S-327-CCT.
Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
4 Type bar (with pallet) 4T98985
Tvpe bar (with pallet) 4T98987
Type bar (with pallet) _ 4T98991
Tvpe bar (with pallet) _ _ _ 4T98992
Type bar (with pallet) _ _ _ 4T98993
Tvpe bar (with pallet) 4T98995
Type bar (with pallet) 4T98997
Type bar (with pallet) _ _ 4T98998
Type bar (with pallet) _ 4T98999
Type bar (with pallet) _ _ . 4T99001
Tvpe bar (with pallet) _ 4T99004
Tvpe bar (with pallet) 4T99006
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99007
Type bar (with pallet) _ 4T99008
Type bar (with pallet) _ 4T99010
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99011
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99013
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99016
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99019
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99022
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99025
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99027
Type bar (with pallet) _ _ 4T99028
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99032
Type bar (with pallet) 4T99033
Type bar (with pallet) 4T104951
Terminal block, capacitor and 4T106049
resistor block assembly.
t 6L3606-32-4.3
6L73006
Typewriter ribbon 6M1175
QM53-R-2880
Alarm control 4T1000-1/C4
Signal indicator panel connector- 2Z8697.1
198
Ref. symbol Name of part and description Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
B-l, B-2 SIGNAL INDICATOR—Continued LAMP LM-41: incandescent; 120 v, 6 w; bulb Signal lamps 2Z5941
B-l S—6; clear; 1%" lg overall; candelabra screw base; Mazda #6S6. LIGHT, indicator: white disk, 1" jewel; minia- Jewel for white lamp 2Z5884-50
B-2 ture candelabra screw base; 21}j6" lg x 1%" diam overall: Drake #75. LIGHT, indicator: red disk, 1" jewel; miniature Jewel for red lamp L _ . 2Z5884-9
F candelabra screw base; 21J4a" lg x 1%" diam overall; Drake #75. SWITCH, push: DPDT; 25 amp, 250 v; 1J£" lg Release key 3Z9824-27
D-l, D-2 x Yi" wd x %" h; nonlocking; Mallory type #2006. SWITCH, push: DPST; l1Xe// lg x %" wd x 2%" Number release and break key__ 3Z9824-27.5
E h; nonlocking, 2 pole normally closed; Mallory type #2005. SWITCH, push: DPDT; 25 amp, 250 v; 2^6" lg Alarm off 3Z9824-27.8
C-l, C-2 x %" wd x h; locking type; Mallory type #2006-L. SWITCH, push: DPST; 2}{b// lg x %" wd x Tape feed-out keys ; 3ZK9824-44
1-304-7 h; nonlocking; Mallory type #2004. TAPE WINDER WINDER, tape: consists of AC-DC motor, reel and reduction gear; approx 12^" lg x 6" wd x 12" h overall; Western Union part #1039-A, dwg #K-10208, Bunnell #109905. BEARING, sleeve: bronze; 0.250" ID, 0.377" Winds tape Bearing for drive shaft 4T1000-1/C2 4A35
FI-300 OD, %" lg overall: Oilite #A-304-7. BEARING, sleeve: bronze; 0.252" ID, 0.3775" Bearing for drive shaft 4A35-1
C-3516 OD, 1%2" lg overall w/fiange 1%2" diam x %4" thk; Oilite #FI-300. BEARING, sleeve: bronze; 0.376" ID, 0.627" Bearing for drive shaft 4A35-2
FI-503 OD, %" lg overall w/flange %" diam x J-j6" thk; Oilite #FI-503. BEARING, sleeve: bronze; 0.376" ID, 0.564" Bearing for reel shaft 4 A 35-3
#2-50 OD, %" lg overall w/flange 0.740" diam x %6" thk; Oilite #FI-503. BOARD, terminal: 2 screw term; spaced on %" Connector between motor and 2Z9463.1
C-3530 ctr; bakelite; 16%4" lg x %" wd x %" thk; Jones HB #2-50. BRACKET: U-shaped; steel; 1%6" lg x 0.936" switch. Light support 4TP10186
3661 wd x 1" h overall; Western Union dwg#A-10186. BUSHING: spacer; brass; 1%4" ID, %" OD, 1" Support for terminal board 2Z1409-78
C-3500 lg; Amer Rad Hdwe #3661. CAP: bearing; aluminum; 2^" diam 0.328" thk; Support for main shaft bearing. _ 4TP10155
2364 3 mtg ears, ea w/0.149" diam hole; Western Union dwg #10155. CLAMP: cable; steel; %" lg x %" wd x %" h Clamp for light cable 2Z2636-34
SC-37 overall; for %" diam cable; Amer Rad Hdwe #2364. COLLAR, locking: steel; %" ID, %" OD, %" Positions driven-gear shaft 4A420
thk overall; Boston Gear #SC37.
199
Name of part and description
Ref. symbol
C-3513
HE
CCO
C-3510
C-3362
H2448R
C-3515
C-3497
C-3498
TAPE WINDER—Continued
COLLAR, shaft: steel; 0.376" ID, 0.875" OD, %" thk overall; milled flat on outer surface w/0.144" diam hole for securing to shaft; Western Union dwg #A-10168.
CONNECTOR, plug: male; 2 cont; straight; 1%" lg x diam excl cont; Hubbell #7057.
COUPLING, flexible: cushion type; steel; l%e" lg x l^e" diam overall; w/1 end bore, other end %" bore, %"-20 x %" lg setscrew ea end; Flexible Coupling Co type #1, Bunnell #109911.
DISK: steel; 1%" diam x H62" thk overall w/1 side extended 0.031" x y2" diam to accommodate friction washer; opposite side extends 0.2503" x %" diam; Western Union dwg #A-10165.
FLANGE, mounting: steel; 0.173" ID, 0.875" OD, 0.093" thk overall w/extension 0.609" diam x 0.015" thk; Western Union dwg #9980.
GEAR: spur; steel; helical; RH; 48 teeth; 33.94 pitch, 24 PD; 2" OD, %" bore, %" thk; straight face; Boston Gear #2448R.
GEAR: spur; steel; helical; 48 teeth; 33.94 pitch, 24 PD; 2" OD, bore, %" thk; straight face; Boston Gear #H2448R modified per Bunnell dwg #109913.
GEAR: spur; steel; straight; 64 teeth; 48 pitch, 1%6" PD; 1%" OD, %" bore, %" thk vc!2" lg x %" diam shaft force-fitted to gear; straight face; Bar Col gear #PYAZ-508, Bar Col shaft #PYAZ-16-1; Bunnell #113035.
GEAR: spur; steel; straight; 14 teeth; 64 pitch, %" PD; %2" OD x %" thk, %" bore; straight face; Bar Col #PYAZ-201; Bunnell #113043.
GEAR ASSEMBLY: c/o gear and gear hub and necessary hdwe; steel; %" ID, 2Xe" OD, %" wd overall; Western LTnion dwg #10152.
GEAR ASSEMBLY: drive; c/o steel gear and bronze bearing; 0.376" ID, 2#e" OD, 0.312" thk overall; Western Union dwg #10153.
GEAR ASSEMBLY: c/o steel shaft l^e" lg x %2" diam, Bar Col #PYAZ-20; steel, 72 teeth, 64 pitch, 1%2Z/ PD; 1%" OD x %" thk, Bar Col #PYAZ-458: steel pinion gear 32 teeth, 48 pitch, 2%2" PD; iyie" OD x %b" thk w/hub %" thk, Bai1 Col #PYAZ-316~1; Bunnell #113038.
GEAR ASSEMBLY: c/o steel shaft 1%6" lg x %2" diam Bar Col #PYAZ-20; steel, 75 teeth, 64 pitch, 1%2" PD; 1%6" OD x %" thk, Bar Col #PYAZ-461; steel pinion gear 18 teeth, 64 pitch, %" PD; %2" OD x %" thk w/hub %" thk, Bar Col #PYAZ-22-3; Bunnell #113037.
Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
Holds driving gear in place on 4TP10168
clutch shaft subassembly.
Power plug 6Z1727
Connects motor to drive shaft-. 4A442
Clutch disk _ 4TP10165
For mounting snubber roller 4A475
Driving gear 4A700
Driven gear 4T109913
Part of reduction gear train 4T113035
On motor unit drive shaft, part 4T113043
of reduction gear train.
In reel shaft drive 4TP10152
Driving gear and hub 4TP10153
Spur gear 4T113038
Spur gear 4T113037
200
Ref. symbol Name of part and description Function of part Signal Corps stock No.
TAPE WINDER—Continued GEAR ASSEMBLY: c/o steel shaft Ifa" lg x %2" diam, Bar Col #PYAZ-20; linen phenolic, 56 teeth, 64 pitch, %" PD; 2%2" OD x %2" thk, Bar Col #PYAZ-414; steel pinion gear 15 teeth, 64 pitch, %" PD; %2" OD x %6" thk w/hub %2" thk, Bar Col #PYAZ-220; Bunnell #113036. Spur gear 4T113036
C-3514 HUB: gear; steel; %" ID, 1%6" OD, %" thk overall; Western Union dwg #A-10169. Support for spur gear 4TP10169
5381 INSULATOR, bushing: round; bakelite; %" ID x lg overall, head %" diam x x/u" thk; OD thd portion %"-18 thd yy lg; Hubbell #5381. Socket bushing 3G131-24
194120 LAMP, incandescent: 120 v, 15 w; bulb T-7 frosted; 2%" lg overall; bayonet candelabra base; Mazda #15T7DC. Cabinet lamp 6Z6820-2.2
193296 LAMPHOLDER: double cont bayonet candelabra base; bakelite body; 120 v, 6 amp; 6^" lg x 1%" diam overall; toggle switch; two 18" wire leads; Diehl #48694. For cabinet lamp 6Z8335-1
FUE51 MOTOR, AC: shaded pole ind type; 0.008 hp at 20 rpm; closed frame; 115 v, 60 eye, single ph, 0.16 amp; 3%" lg x 4%" wd x 3%" h overall; Bar Col #PYAZ-4433-l. PLATE, retainer: steel, cadmium pl; pear shape; outside dimen 2%" lg x 1%" wd, inside dimen 1%" lg x %" wd, ^2" thk; Bar Col #PYAZ-10-l; Bunnell #113047. Drive tape winder Holds felt oil seal 3H3000-136 4T113047
C-3494 REEL ASSEMBLY: c/o shaft, nut, hub, core, 2 flanges, and necessary hdwe; aluminum and brass; 9%" x 2" OD thk overall; Western Union dwg #10149. Tape reel assembly 4A1985-1
6-3506 ROLLER, sleeve: steel; 0.626" ID, %" OD, 1" lg: Western Union dwg #A10161. SEAL, oil: pear shape; outside dimen 2%6" lg x 1%" wd, inside dimen 1" lg x % wd, thk; Bar Col #PYAZ-9; Bunnell #113046. Snubber for tape For motor reduction gear assembly. 4TP10161 4T113046
C-3509 SHAFT: drive; steel; 41Xe,/ lg x %" diam overall; Western Union dwg #A-10164. In tape winder mechanism 4TP10164
C-3495 SHAFT ASSEMBLY: c/o lever, shaft, pin, 2 springs, and 2 steel balls; SS; 6%" lg x %" diam overall; Western Union #A-10150. In tape reel assembly 4A2298A.1
C-3496 SHAFT ASSEMBLY: c/o shaft, disk, washer spring, collar, and necessary hdwe; steel; 4iy6" lg x 2" diam overall; Western Union dwg #10151. Clutch 4TP10151
C-3512 SPRING: compression; 0.095" diam music wire: 7 turns; 1%" lg x 0.971" diam; Western Union part/dwg #10167-2. Holds pressure against clutch 4TP10167
IF-24 SUPPRESSOR: capacitor type; 50,000 mmf; 2" lg x %" diam; 110 v ac-dc; 2 flexible wire leads 8" lg; Dubilier “Quietone” #IF-24. Suppresses electrical noise 3Z1891-56.1
20992 SWITCH, toggle: SPST: 3 amp, 250 v; bakelite, body: IjKs" lg x %" wd x J4" d overall; AH&H #20992. Turns tape winder on or off 3Z9692
201
Signal Corps stock
No.
Ref. symbol
Name of part and description
Function of part
TAPE WINDER—Continued
WASHER, thrust: steel; ID, OD, 1^6" thk; Boston Gear per Bunnell dwg #109918.
WINDING, motor field: c/o rotor, stator assembly, 1780-turn coil winding #YAB-456-l: lamination assembly c/o 15 right #YAB-73-l, 15 left #YAB-74-l, one #YAB-77-l, 2 oil tubes #PYAZ-188, shaft 2%" lg x diam, #YAB-838, two stranded copper wire leads 16" lg for power connection; 115 v, 60 eye, 0.16 amp, single ph; 2%" wd x 2%" h x 2%" d overall; Bunnell #113045.
In clutch______________________
For a-c motor__________________
6L75050-1
4T113045
202
INDEX
A and B transmitting relays: graph
Functioning_______________________________________________________________________________ 101
Trouble analysis__________________________________________________________________________ 145
Abbreviations, list_______________________________________________________________________app. 1, 9
Adjusting and cleaning:
Control relays RA, RB, RRl, RR2, RC, RN, RNN, RBK1, RBK2___________________________________ 158
255A type relays___________________________________________________________________________ 156
Adjustments and requirements. (See Requirements and adjustments.)
Alarm lamp (white)_____________________________________________________________________________ 1095
Circuit____________________________________________________________________________________ 106
Trouble analysis__________________________________________________________________________ 1395
ALARM OFF (Button Out) switch____________________________________________________________ 109c
Circuit____________________________________________________________________________________ 106
Trouble analysis__________________________________________________________________________ 1395
Application:
Five-unit start-stop teletypewriter code____________________________________________________ 15
General functioning of equipment____________________________________________________________ 14
Normal operation:
Duplex make-and-break (neutral)__________________________________________________________ 7
Duplex polar_____________________________________________________________________________ 8
Single___________________________________________________________________________________ 9
Split operation:
Duplex make-and-break (neutral)___________________________________.___________________ 10
Duplex polar____________________________________________________________________________ 11
Single__________________________________________________________________________________ 12
Synchronism_________________________________________________________________________________ 16
System_______________________________________________________________________________________ 6
Typical comcenter lay-out________________________________________________,________________ 13
Armature spring tension________________________________________________._______________________ 173
Assembly, installation, and disassembly:
Assembly__________________________________________________________________________________ 20
Disassembly and repacking_________________________■_______________________________________ 23
Installation of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-IA___________________1____________ 22
Location of equipment_______________________________________________________________________ 17
Physical checks_____________________________________________________________________________ 21
Unpacking shipping containers:
Domestic______________________________________________________________________________ 19
Oversea_________________________________________________________________________________ 18
Auxiliary and test equipment, technical manuals___________________________________________app. 1, 2
B and A transmitting relays. (See A and B transmitting relays.)
Break:
Circuit, relays RBK1 and RBK2___________________________________________________________ 107
Trouble anslysis_______________________________________________________________________ 145
Feature:
Circuit________________________________________________________________________________ 107
Normal single operation__________________________________________________________46d: 46e
Split single operation:
Circuit No. 1___________________________________________________________49d; 54c; 1025
Circuit No. 2________________________________________________________________ 52d; 1025
Key______________________________________________________________________________46e; 54c; 109gr
Functioning______________________________________________________________;------------ 102
Trouble analysis______________________________________________________________________ 139c
Lamp (red)_______________________________________________________________________ 33c; 109/; 109gr
Circuits_________________________________________________________________________ 1045; 1075
Trouble analysis______________________________________________________________________ 139d
Signal, action upon receiving______________________________________________________________ 46d
Page 84
114 142
119 118
94
93
111
94
93
111
17
15
7
9
9
9
9
15
17
7
15
127
23
28
23
18
23
23
18
141
94
114
94
38, 39
39, 41, 86
40, 86
39. 41, 96
86
111
34, 96
88, 94
111
38
203
Cabinet, power. (See Power cabinet.) graph,
Call-in circuit____________________________________________________________________________ 106
Camouflage______________________________________________________________________________app. 1, 6
Capacitors and resistors, preventive maintenance___________________________________________ 74
Check list, preventive maintenance_____'___________________________________________________80; 81
Checks:
Performance. (See Routine checks of performance.)
Physical___________________,___________________________________________________________ 21
Checking and adjusting motor speed___________________________________________________________ 38
Circuits________________________________________________________________________________ 96-107
Send-receive loops______________________________________________________________________ 25b
Unconnected, switch settings for________________________________________________________ 43c
Cleaning and adjusting. (See Adjusting and cleaning.)
Clutch:
Magnets________________________________________________________________________________ 115/
Requirements and adjustments____________________________________________________________ 171
Spring compression_____________________________________________________________________ 170
Throw-out lever, trouble analysis______________________________________________________ 144c
Code, five-unit start-stop teletypewriter____________________________________________________ 15
Comb-shaft retainers, requirements and adjustments__________________________________________ 176
Concenter, typical lay-out___________________________________________________________________ 13
Compartments, tape___________________________________________________________________________ 3?
Completion of transmission cycle____________________________________________________________ 100
Components, table of__________________________________________________________________________ 2
Connections____________________________________________________________________ 146; 14d; 176; 24c
Ground and power supply__________________________________________________________________ 24
Line_____________________________________________________________________________________ 25
Normal operation:
Duplex make-and-break_________________________________________________________ 27
Duplex polar__________________________________________________________________ 26
Single__________________________________________________________________________ 28
Split operation:
Duplex make-and-break___________________________________________________________ 30
Duplex polar____________________________________________________________________ 29
Single__________________________._____________________________________________ 31
To other equipment_______________________________________________________________________ 32
Console:
Assembly____________________________________________________________________________ 20a; 206
Shelf: Lubrication chart___________________________________________________________________ 88c
Preparation for lubrication_________________________________________________________ 85c
Contacts NC__________________________________________________________________________________ 98
Control relays RA, RB, RR1, RR2, RC, RN, RNN, RBK1, RBK2. (See relays.)
Converting Teletypewriter Set AN/TCG-1 to Teletypewriter Set AN/TCG-1A______________________ 159
Cords, cables, and plugs, preventive maintenance___________________________________________ 68
Page 93
141
56
58
23
35
78
30
37
98
127
127
113
17
128
15
5
83
2
17, 18, 29
29
30
32
30
32
33
33
33
33
23
65
61
80
120
54
Decontamination________________________________________________________________________app. 1, 4
Demolition_____________________________________________________________________________app. 1, 5
Department of the Army Signal Supply Catalog pamphlets______________________________ 1, app. II, 1
Description:
General____________i___________________________________________________________________ 1
Multiple transmitter distributor_______________________________________________________ 114
Base (MXB8)________________________________________________________________________ 117
Packaging data for shipment:
Domestic________________________________________________________________________ 5
Export__________________________________________________________________________ 4
Table of components______________________■.________________________________________ 2
Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A___________________________________________ 3
Differences in models__________________________________________________________________ 16; 159
Disassembly of Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1_________________________________________________ 23
Distortion Test Set TS-383/GG______________________________________________________________ 130
Distributor-unit position, requirements and adjustments____________________________________ 218
141
141
144
1
96
101
7
6
2
2
1, 120
28
106
138
204
Domestic shipment: gr^
Packaging data___________________________________________________________________________ 5
Unpacking_______________________________________________________________________________ 19
DUPLEX SINGLE switch SB_____________________________________________Z_ZZ2ZIZZZZ2Z221ZZZ2Z 120
Trouble analysis_______________________________________________________________________ 145
Emergency operation__________________________________________________________________________ 55
Equipment:
Connections:
Ground and power supply____________________________________________________________ 24
Line__________________________1____________________________________________________ 25
Normal operation:
Duplex make-and-break______________________________________________________ 27
Duplex polar_______________________________________________________________ 26
Single--------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
Split operation:
Duplex make-and-break______________________________________________________ 30
Duplex polar_______________________________________________________________ 31
Single--------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
To other equipment___________________________________________________________________ 32
Drawer:
Description_________________________________________________________________________ 3fc
Installation____________________«._________________________________________________ 22a
Trouble-analysis chart______________________________________________________________ 145
Unpacking__________________________________________________________________________ 18c
Performance check lists. (See Routine checks of performance.)_________________________57-62
Export shipment:
Packaging data___________________________________________________________________________ 4
Unpacking_______________________________________________________________________________ 18
Exterior of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-IA), preventive maintenance______________ 67
Feed-out key:
FO-1 and relay RRl:
Functioning____________________________________________________________________ 103; 109d
Trouble analysis______________*________________________________________________ 139c; 145
FO-2 and relay RR2:
Functioning____________________________________________________________________ 104; 109d
Trouble analysis_______________________________________________________________ 139c; 145
Feed-pawl:
Arm spring tension___________________________________________________________________ 195
Lever requirements and adjustments_____________________________________________________ 194
Spring tension------------------------------------------------------------------------- 196
Feed-wheel:
Detent:
Requirements and adjustments________________________________________________________ 191
Spring tension______________________________________________________________________ 193
Requirements and adjustments___________________________________________________________ 186
Five-unit start-stop teletypewriter code_____________________________________________________ 15
Forms__________________________________________________________________________________ app. I, 8
Functioning of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 (or AN/TGC-IA):
Detailed:
A and B transmitting relays_________________________________________________________ 101
Break:
Circuit, relays RBK1 and RBK2__________________________________________________ 107
Key____________________________________________________________________________ 102
Call-in circuit_____________________________________________________________________ 106
Completion of transmission cycle___________________________________________________ 100
Components________________________________________________________________________ 108
DUPLEX SINGLE switch SB___________________________________________________.________ 120
Feed-out key:
FO-1 and relay RRl____________________________________________________________ 103
FO-2 and relay RR2____________________________________________________________ 104
General______________________________________________________________________________ 95
Locking-out of typing reperforators_________________________________________________ 105
Page
7
23 102 114
41
29
30
32
30
32
33
33
33
33
6
24
114
18
42
6
18
54
86, 96
111, 114
88, 96
111, 114
132
132
132
132
132
131
17
142
84
94
86
93
83
94
102
86
88
77
91
205
Functioning of Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1—Continued
Detailed—Continued
r ■ Para-
Message transmitter: graph
Circuits_______________________________________________________________________ 99
Units (MXD8)____________________________________________________________________ 115
Monitor (upper) typing reperforator_______________________________________________ 110
Multiple transmitter distributor and base____________________________ 114; 115; 116; 117
NORMAL SPLIT switch SA______________________________________________________________ 119
Number transmitter:
Circuit______________________________________________________________________ 98
Unit (MXD9)___________________________________________________________________ 116
OPR. NON-OPR. switches Si and S2______________________________________________ 121
POLAR MAKE-BREAK switches S3 and S4__________________________________________ 122
Power cabinet_____________________________________________________________________ 118
RA, RB, RN, and RNN relays________________________________________________________ 124
RBK1 and RBK2 relays______________________________________________________________ 126
Receiving lower) typing reperforator______________________________________________ 112
RR1 and RR2 relays________________________________________________________________ 125
Signal indicator panel____________________________________________________________ 109
Tape winder_______________________________________________________________________ 111
Transmitter circuits_______________________________________________________________ 97
Sequence of description________________________________________________________ 96
Transmitting and receiving relays_____________________________I___________________ 123
54A rectifier___________________________________________________________________ 113
General________________________________________________________________________________ 14
Fuses, preventive maintenance_______________________________________________________________ 69
Gear guard, requirements and adjustments___________________________________________________ 217
Glossary______________________________________________________________________________app. I, 10
Governor:
Adjusting bracket requirements and adjustments_________________________________________ 213
Brush spring
Plate bracket requirements and adjustments________________________________________ 211
Pressure__________________________________________________________________________ 212
Inner and outer disk contact springs_________________________________________________ 210
Shims requirements and adjustments___________________________________________________ 215
Speed-adj usting:
Lever stop plate__________________________________________________________________ 214
Wheel friction-washer spring tension______________________________________________ 209
Ground connections_________________________________________________________________ 14d; 24a; 24c
Page 82 97 96 96, 97, 100, 101
102
80 100 102 103 102 103 103
96 103 994
96 79 78 103
96 15
54
137 143
136
136 136 135
137
137 135
17, 29
1-176, Test Unit______________________________________________________________________________
1-181, Test Set_______________________________________________________________________________
I-193-A, Test Set_____________________________________________________________________________
128
132
131
103
108
106
Indexes:
Alphabetical:
Parts identification illustrations for—
Multiple transmitter distributor and base______________________________________ app. II, 2
Tape winder, number tape reel, tape shute, spring tape holder, power cabinet, signal indicator panel, and rectifier unit____________________________________________app. II, 3
Numerical:
Parts identification illustrations for—
Multiple transmitter distributor and base______________________________________ app. II, 5
Tape winder, number tape reel, tape chute, and spring tape holder______________ app. II, 6
Inner and outer disk contact springs requirements and adjustments_________________________________ 210
Inserting message tape____________________________________________________________________________ 53b
Installation:
Ribbon in typing reperforators_________________________________________________________________ 37
Tape:
Tape winder________________________________________________________________________________ 35
Typing reperforators_____________________________________________________________________ 34
Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A_____________________________________________________ 22
Interrupting message traffic_______________________________________________________________________ 54c
144
141
161
164
135
40
35
34
34
23
41
Jack box, monitor.
32
33
206
Keys. (Nee Switches and keys.)
Letters operating lever horizontal extension: .
Requirements and adjustmensts__________________________________________________________ 202
Spring tension____________________________________________________________________________ 203
Line:
Circuits---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 256
Connections___________________________________________________________________________ 14rf- 25
Terminal strip:
Connections______________________________________.__________________________________ 25a
Description___________________________________________________________________________ 3j
Local operating test___________________________________________________________________________ 40
Location of equipment__________________________________________________________________________ 17
Locking-out of typing reperforators___________________________________________________________ 105
Lubricants, recommended________________________________________________________________________ 82
Lubrication:
Charts:
Multiple transmitter distributor and base___________________________________________ 88
Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN-TGC/1A__________________________________________ 88
Detailed instructions____________________________________________________________________84; 85
Preparation:
Multiple transmitter distributor______________________________________________________ 86
Base___________________________________________________________________________ 87
Teletypewriter Sets AN/TGC-1 and AN/TGC-1A____________________________________________ 85
Recommended lubricants_____________________________________________________________________ 82
Schedules__________________________________________________________________________________ 83
Main-shaft:
Bearings alinement________________________________________________________________________ 206
End play requirements and adjustments_____________________________________________________ 207
Maintenance parts______________________________________________________________________________134
Message:
Procedures______________._______________________.________________________________________ 54
Transmitter circuits_____________________________________________________________________ 99
Models, differences in____________________________________________________________________ 16; 159
Moistureproofing and fungiproofing_____________________________________________________90a; 91; 92
Monitor jack box_____________________________________________________________________________ 32
Motor:
Gear clearance requirements and adjustments_______________________________________________ 216
Pinion requirements and adjustments_______________________________________________________ 208
Multiple transmitter distributor:
Description________________________________________________________________________________ 3g
Installation__________________________________________________________________________ 226; 22c
Motor____________________________________________________________________________________ 117
Number tape, preparing______________________1____________________________________________ 39
Unpacking________________________________________________________________________________ 18c
Multiple transmitter distributor and base:
Description and functioning_______________________________________'___________________ 114-117
Lubrication:
Charts______________________________________________________________________________ 88
Preparation__________________________________________________________.______________ 87
Parts identification illustrations index:
Alphabetical_____________________________________________________________________ app. II, 2
Numerical!---------•_------------------------------------------------------------ app. II, 5
Parts necessary to change from 368 opm to 600 opm_____________________________________,__ 159
Preventive maintenance___________________________________________________________________ 73
Repairs-----------------------------------------------------------------------4_______ 153-155
Requirements and adjustments__________________________________________________________ 165-218
Trouble-analysis chart______________________*______________._____________________________ 144
Multiple transmitter distributor base:
Description______________________________________________________________________________ 117
Motor, removing from______________•______________________________________________________ 205
Page 134 134
30 17, 30
30
5
36
18
91
59
63
63
59, 60
61
62
60
59
59
135
135
109
40
82
1, 120
70, 71, 75
33
137
135
7
24
101
35
18
96
63
62
144
161
120
55
117
124
113
101
134
207
Normal duplex: graph
Connections to other equipment___________________________________________________________ 32a
Make-and-break operation:
Application_____________________________________________________________________________ 7
Line connection________________________________________________________________________ 27
Setting conditioning switches__________________________________________________________ 45
Polar operation:
Application_____________________________________________________________________________ 8
Equipment performance check list_______________________________________________________ 59
Line connections_______________________________________________________________________ 26
Setting conditioning switches__________________________________________________________ 44
Normal operation:
A and B transmitting relays_______________________________________________________________ 101a
Break key_________________________________________________________________________________ 102a
Call-in circuit___________________________________________________________________________ 106a
Completion of transmission cycle__________________________________________________________ 100a
Equipment performance check lists_____________________________________________________ 58; 59; 61
Feed-out key:
FO-1 and relay RRl___________________________________________________________________ 103a
FO-2 and relay RR2___________________________________________________________________ 104a
Locking-out of typing reperforators______________________________________________________ 105a
Message transmitter circuits_______________________________________________________________ 99a
Number transmitter circuit_________________________________________________________________ 98a
Starting sequence__________________________________________________________________________ 42
Transmitter circuits_______________________________________________________________________ 97a
Normal single operation:
Application____________________________________________________________,------------------ 9
Equipment performance check list____________________________________________________________ 61
Line connections__________________________________________________________________________ 28
Setting conditioning switches___________________________________________________________1 46
Normal split switch SA_________________________________________________________________________ 119
Trouble analysis_________________________________________________________________________ 145
Numbered messages, transmitting_____________________________________________________________ 42a; 43a
Number release key__________________________________________________________________________ 109a
Trouble analysis__________________________________________________________________________ 139a
Number-tab holder:
Assembly__________________________________________________________________________________ 20 _______6750 SIDE FRAME- RIGHT
6748 SCREW T \ [(WITH BUSHING)
2S UXK WASHER] \\ / -----97563 GEAR-42T
7391 DRIVEN CLUTCH--------------------< \ \ / /
K790J SPRING--------------------------- \ \\ J _fl6O SCREW
\ \ \ \ ; /Z2I9I LOCK WASHER
72563 WASHER-FELT (6) MXD10--nTTTl \ \ \\ ■ /
97503 SIDE FRAME - LEFlZ—.
(WITH BUSHING) J JIH jl I IM V fe) : pJ___Jl269 SCREW
hCH II II II II II II tl--|| Ull'ill? I5*!! 7(2191 LOCK washer 98361 SHIMS----X r'lWWMMHJ
97506 SHAFT----' LI \-----------------J Lj \
72563 WASHER-FELT (4) MXD II- \
KX766 CAM SLEEVE (ASSEM) MXD 10, II- ' 97564 GEAR HUB
--------------------------SHAFT (ASSEM.)-----------------------
TM 2203-CI-3
Figure 102.1 (Added.) Shaft assembly, parts identification (applies to equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-48).
97533 CONTACT SPRING-MULTIPLE} i---------""07537 CONTACT LEVER 01
97534 CONTACT SPRING-SINGLE J \ / .------7318 CONTACT LEVER (6)
> \ / / (204370 BACKSTOP-MULTIPLE
97540 SHAFT \ J / / h12048 BACKSTOP-SINGLE
2191 LOCK WASHER I-—---------/
3598 NUT J (mH) / __(33-54 SCREW
WlXZ Xk4'” NUT
97538 LEVER— X K Si ___ (97535 CONTACT SPRING-MULTIPLE
c~>. [97536 CONTACT SPRING-SINGLE
2526 SPACING COLLAR (6)} <-=<
7654 SHIMS ______________ 7^ j _________ fe753l STIFFENER-MULTIPLE
75606 SPRING / 8 HL 197532 STIFFENER- SINGLE
75607 WASHER J « J wX
Cf \ N \ _ [02498 SCREW
W ^12499 BUSHING-BAKELITE
80478 SPRING POST------------' /* \
X L---\ x-------------H2497 PLATE
98636 SPRING------------------ jX X. \---------2504 INSULATOR
8543 SCREW----------------' >------97530 CONTACT BRACKET
-----------------------------CONTACT LEVER (ASSEM) —————————/
TM 2203-CI-4
Figure 103.1 (Added.) Contact lever assembly, parts identification (applies to equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-48).
Figure 107: With equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-48, substitute “118125AB base, gray-green wrinkle” for the “110654” base used. At the lower right-hand side of this figure,
AGO 1751A
5
substitute a “6746” screw for the “82440” screw which mounts the 110726 gear guard. Add a 2191 lockwasher to the mounting parts.
Figure 108: With equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-48, substitute “118125AB base, gray-green wrinkle” for the “110654” base used. Substitute “1026” screw for the “1269” screw used. Substitute “8254” cable clamp for the “8253” cable clamp used.
Figure 110: With equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-48, delete the number 99250 and the line brackets inclosing the part numbers.
Figure 111: With equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila^48, delete the 82474 terminals.
Figure 113: With equipment procured on Order No. 9838—Phila—48, change the following designations:
Old designation 110679 cover, left rear_____
110678 cover, left__________
110676 cover, front (with tape guide).
110680 motor-cover assem____
New designation 118448AB cover, left rear. 118447AB cover, left. 119542AB cover, front.
118130AB motor - cover
assem.
[AG 300.7 (8 Mar. 49)]
Old designation
110772 cover plate__________
110677 cover, right_________
110957 card holder bracket assem.
103782 screw, drive_________
110956 bracket______________
New designation 118128AB cover plate. 118445AB cover, right. 119569AB card holder bracket assem.
87638 screw, drive. 119545AB bracket.
Figure 114: With equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-48, substitute 116992 screw for the 1100 screw used. Attach the prefix (A) to the following parts in figure 114.
116992 screw.
104451 lockwasher.
8222 wearing strip.
7661 adjusting lever.
91617 shims.
84047 stop.
6746 screw.
2191 lockwasher.
8330 washer.
78301 screw.
2669 lockwasher.
84579 washer.
6746 screw.
2191 lockwasher.
110650 pinion.
Figure Ilf. Motor, parts identification (excludes parts marked (A); these parts must be ordered separately).
Figure 115: In the middle illustration, indicate the 6979 hub located in center of bottom side of the illustration. With equipment procured on Order No. 9838-Phila-A8, delete the 72835 contact point; add 6348 screw and 3640 lockwasher to the 6330 bearing (assembly).
6
AGO 1751A
By order of the Secretaries of the Army a nd the Air Force:
Official :
EDWARD F. WITSELL
Major General
The Adjutant General
OMAR N. BRADLEY
Chief of Staff, United States Army
Official :
L. L. JUDGE
Colonel, USAF
Air Adjutant General
HOYT S. VANDENBERG
Chief of Staff, United States Air Force
Distribution :
Army:
Tech Sv (2); Arm & Sv Bd (1); AFF Bd (ea Sv Test Sec) (1); AFF (5); OS Maj Comd (5); Base Comd (3); MDW (5); A (ZI) (20); (Overseas) (5); CHQ (2); FC (2); USMA (2); Sch 11 (10) ; Gen Dep (10) ; Dep 11 (5) except Baltimore & Sacramento (20) ; Tng Ctr (2) ; PE (10), Overseas Supply Div (2); Lab 11 (2) ; 4th & 5th Ech Maint Shops 11 (2) ; T/O & E 11-47 (2); 11-107 (2); 11-127 (2); 11-587 (2); 11-592 (2); 11-597 (2); SPECIAL DISTRIBUTION.
Air Force:
Tq USAF (25) ; USAF Maj Comds (5) ; USAF Sub Comds (3) ; Services (MATS) (2); All other Class III Installations (2). Overseas: Maj Air Comds (5) ; Numbered Air Forces (3); Overseas Air Bases (2). Special Distribution: Commandant, AF Technical School (Communications) Scott Air Force Base, Belleville, Ill. (10).
For explanation of distribution formula see SR 310-90-1.
«, S. MVtRKMEkT PglHTtMi OFFICE: 194*
AGO 1751A